Home

Intermec 700 User's Manual

1. rpm exe 0 rpm ini rpmce212 ini 0 m fcce212 d11 o lece212 dl TIT O lece211 dl EEF rdm45wce dl EEF picfmt dll 234 d r 0 0 0 0 0 rpmce212 ini 1 intermec bmp 1 rpmlogo bmp rpmname bmp import bmp export bmp 1 clock bmp 1 printer bmp 1 filecopy bmp 1 readme txt 1 lang_eng bin 1 rpmdata dbd 1 database wcel tahoma ttf 2 mfcce212 dll 3 olece212 dll 3 olece211 dll 1 c windows ce tools wce400 NMSD61102 11 mfc lib x86 rdm45wce dll 1 c rptools rdm45wce 4_50 lib wce400 wcex86rel picfmt dll 1 c rptools picfmt 1_00 wce400 wcex86re16110 fmtctrl dll 1 c rptools fmtctr1 1_00 wce400 wcex86rel16110 ugrid dll 1 c rptools ugrid 1_00 wce400 wcex86re16110 simple dll 1 c rptools pspbm0c 1_00 wce400 wcex86rel psink dll 1 c rptools psink 1_00 wce400 WCEX8 6Re1MinDependency pslpwce dll 1 c rptools pslpm0c 1_00 wce400 WCEX8 6Re1lMinDependency npcpport dll 1 c rptools cedk 212_03 installable drivers printer npcp dexcom dll 1 c rptools psdxm0c 1_00 x86 ncsce exe 1 c rptools ncsce 1_04 nrinet dll 1 c rptools ncsce 1_04 DestinationDirs Required section Shortcuts All 0 CE3 Windows Desktop Files App 0 InstallDir Fil
2. When a CAB file is built a registry entry is created with a build number for that file This CAB Files control panel applet looks for a registry key for each CAB file installed When the registry entry is found the CAB file name and version number information are displayed If a CAB file has not been installed then its information is not displayed Below is a list of CAB files from Intermec Technologies that are available for your 700 Color Computer with their latest developer or released ver sion of the software build Should you need to add any of these to your 700 Color Computer contact an Intermec representative BtMainStack Installation of the Main Bluetooth Stack is handled automatically as part of the operating system boot up procedure See Chapter 4 Network Support for more information about Bluetooth wireless printing Comm Port Wedge The software build for the Comm Port Wedge Note that the Comm Port Wedge CAB file is available NPCPTest This installs a Norand Portable Communications Protocol NPCP Printing test application which will print to an Intermec 4815 4820 or 6820 Printer See Chapter 5 Printer Support for more information 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings S9C Upgrade Installs the files needed to upgrade the S9C scanner firmware See the 700 Color Management Tools for information on upgrading the fir
3. Eq Profile Wizard Pod PET ok Inner PEAP Authentication EAP M5 CHAP W2 Certificate Settinas L Validate Server Certificate Ej 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 381 Appendix A 382 Configurable Settings TLS EAP TLS EAP TLS is a protocol that is based on the TLS Transport Layer Security protocol widely used to secure web sites This requires both the user and authentication server have certificates for mutual authentication While cryptically strong this requires corporations that deploy this to maintain a certificate infrastructure for all their users Use TLS to configure the use of EAP TLS as an authentication protocol and select either Open or WPA as an association mode To Enable TLS with an Open Association 1 Set 8021x Security as TLS 2 Set Association to Open 3 Skip Encryption as it is automatically set to WEP See page 372 for information about WEP encryption 4 Enter your unique Subject Name and User Name to use this protocol 5 Tap Get Certificates to obtain or import server certificates See page 388 for more information 6 Tap Additional Settings to set options for server certificate validation and trust See page 384 for more information Profile Wizard 7 d 238 ok Basic Security advanced 6021 x Security Ts Association Encryption Open gt WEP X Get Certificates A
4. ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN SetAuthenticationMode ULONG else UINT SetAuthenticationMode ULONG fendif SetChannel This function is currently not implemented Ad hoc networks automatical ly select a channel or use the already existing channel UINT SetChannel USHORT USHORT value that should populate with the desired channel 1 14 None None ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT PFN_SetChannel USHORT else UINT SetChannel USHORT endif 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions Chapter 7 Programming SetNetworkMode Call this function to set the desired Network Mode UINT SetNetworkMode ULONG NDIS_NET_MODE_IBSS 802 11 Ad Hoc Mode NDIS_NET_MODE_ESS 802 11 Infrastructure Mode NDIS NET MODE UNKNOWN Anything Else Unknown Error NDIS NET AUTO UNKNOWN Automatic Selection Use of this option is not supported or recommended NDIS NET TYPE OFDM 5G 5 Gigahertz 54 Mbps NDIS NET TYPE OFDM 2 4G 802 11 2 4 Gigahertz ERROR SUCCESS when successful ERR QUERY FAILED when the query failed or ERR CONNECT FAILED if a connection with the radio failed None ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN SetNetworkMode ULONG else UINT SetNetworkMode ULONG fendif SetPowerMode Call this fu
5. 0 0 00 eee eee eee ee 85 Pocket Excel cssc ES ed der 86 Citeaunig cc Workbook iaa lr eU idan d Bia AER patios 86 Tips for Working in Pocket Excel iine esae EVI REEF A EE 87 MSN Messenger sooo eee eater m p ie S en E tacet e ca e quss 87 Setting Up an Accounter soa saw na cr ERU ea EE VET ds 88 Signing In and ntu ass Cosas adem cioe eed e la eati p ede eee Lanes 89 Working with Contacts pis A ER P Sa Reda 89 Managing Contacts in E CEPI Me alee ded E PEPPER A es 90 Sending a Message AA PORE E Roe tora e pet oca e eds 91 Windows Media Player for Windows Mobile 0 c eee ences 92 Microsoft Readers MS yao DA a step E d EE uc eb e DR E 93 Getting Books on Your 700 Color Computer 0 0000 eee eee 93 Using thie IDEAE ore A E O eua 93 Reading a Book ANM 94 Using Reader Beatut s 2 ern vba deve hewn d i ab a 95 Removing a Book e UR I TREAT REOR Pid Oe SEE Rad DEP E 95 Pocket Interner Explotar id d Sue i ool pu eret fs Bh Sal etse 96 The Mobile Favorites Folder Z5 ead duke E s Re welds Viens eta Pe e ae CR s s 96 Favorite inks quada spa eut AR d qan dis da vos RUE Poncii s qas Ud 96 Mobile EME vb esae Es beans dha Ups etas ete beagle erp ud E 97 Using a ito Channels oi deo cv ve dte Se Di E gw a DA ecce DR GU ra wah eed 98 Using Pocket Internet Explorer ss dvi et op da IAPS 98 Viewing Mobile Favorites and Channels 5e eeu re ne Rh hen 99 Browsing the Internet i tai ceesre ar t a tna s 99 Geiting Connected
6. IpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned by the function Return Values Returns TRUE if function succeeds Returns FALSE if the function fails GetLastError may be used to get the extended error value 262 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL HAL REBOOT Causes the system to perform a warm boot The object store is retained Usage Zinclude oemioctl h Syntax BOOL KernelloControl IOCTL HAL REBOOT LPVOID lpInBuf DWORD nInBufSize LPVOID lpOutBuf DWORD nOutBufSize LPDWORD lpBytesReturned Parameters IpInBuf Should be set to NULL IpInBufSize Should be set to zero IpOutBuf Should be NULL nOutBufSize Should be zero Return Values None 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 263 Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL PROCESSOR INFORMATION Returns processor information Usage include pkfuncs h Syntax BOOL KernelloControl IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION LPVOID lpInBuf DWORD niInBufSize LPVOID lpOutBuf DWORD nOutBufSize LPDWORD lpBytesReturned Parameters IpInBuf Should be set to NULL nInBufSize Should be set to zero IpOutBuf Should be a pointer to the PROCESSOR_INEO structure The PROCESSOR_INFO structure stores information that describes the CPU more descriptively typedef PROCESSOR INFO WOR wVersion Set to value 1 AR szProcessorCore 40 ARMNO wCoreRevision 4 szProcessorName 40 PXA255N0 w
7. Change Beeper Setting L Beeper 8 vibrate Symbology Options Beeper LED Imager 4 a 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual For Units With PSM Build 3 00 or Newer Chapter 1 Introduction e Do the following to enable the vibrator for the 700 Color Computer Tap Start gt Settings gt the System tab gt the Intermec Settings icon Tap the Intermec Device Settings option tap to expand Beeper then tap to expand Settings BFlintermec Settings EIE T EXC Data Collection Communications Device Settings Beeper H Volume El Number of good read beeps E Vibrate O Beeper O vibrate t Display Power Management File Backup H System Component Versions IDL Runtime Versions SmartSystems Information ION Configuration File Edit view Help fe 5 a Vibrate Select an item then close this option Le Note Information about the settings you can configure with the Intermec Settings control panel applet is described in the Intermec Computer Com mand Reference Manual The online manual is available from the Intermec web site at www intermec com Wireless Network Support Radios are installed at the factory and cannot be installed by a user The 700 Color Computer must be serviced to install or replace radios Contact your Intermec representative for more information See Chapter 4 Ver work Support for information about suppo
8. rrab a w e r t v u i Jo B T icoP a s a r e n i k t shirt z x c v b n m 7 cuja A vw tel Tools Chats My Text 3 EE 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 91 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Windows Media Player for Windows Mobile Use Microsoft Windows Media Player for Windows Mobile to play digital audio and video files that are stored on your 700 Series Computer or on a network To switch to Windows Media Player on your 700 Color Computer tap Start gt Windows Media Use Microsoft Windows Media Player on your desktop to copy digital au dio and video files to your 700 Color Computer You can play Windows Media and MP3 files on your Windows Mobile Windows Media 4 4 12 08 LX er Welcome To Windows Media 54 k ta f Windows Media Player Indicates the progress of the current track Tap to adjust volume Tap to skip to the next song Tap to play a previous song Tap to stop Tap to play or pause For more information about using Windows Media Player for Windows Mobile tap Start gt Help gt Windows Media Player to see Windows Media Player Help 92 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Microsoft Reader Use Microsoft Reader to read eBooks on your 700 Color Computer Download books to your desktop from your favorite eBook Web site Then use ActiveSync to copy the book files to your activated 700
9. Association Encryption w P T TKIP T Password O Prompt For password e Use em i assword Get Certificates Additional Settings E 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Additional Settings 1 Select an authentication protocol from the Inner TTLS Authentication drop down list Password Authentication Protocol A simple authentication protocol that sends security information in the clear Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol Use of Radius to authenticate a terminal without sending security data in the clear Authenticates against non Windows user databases You cannot use this if authenticating against a Windows NT Domain or Active Directory MS CHAP Authenticates against a Windows Domain Controller and other MS CHAP V2 non Windows user databases PAP Token Card Use with token cards The password value entered is never cached EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol See page 371 for informa tion about EAP 2 If you select EAP for the inner authentication protocol then select an inner EAP protocol from the Inner EAP drop down list 3 Enter the Common Names of trusted servers Note that if these fields are lefi blank the server certificate trust validation is not performed or required 4 Check Validate Server Certificate to verify the identity of the authenti cation server based on its certificate when usin
10. Pocket Word contains a list of files stored on your 700 Color Computer Tap a file in the list to open it To delete make copies of and send files tap and hold a file in the list then select the action on the pop up menu Pocket Word B Al Folders Name y Tap to change the sort Agency 9 26 a 480b order of the list Document 9 26 a 424b 33 Meeting Notice Create Copy Tap to open a document 3 21 03 Delete 11 9 04 Select All Send via E mail Beam File Tap and hold an item to see a pop up menu of actions New Tools E3 Tap to create a new document 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 You can enter information in Pocket Word in one of four modes typing writing recording and drawing which are displayed on the View menu Each mode has its own toolbar which you can show and hide by tapping the Show Hide Toolbar icon on the command bar You can change the zoom magnification by tapping View gt Zoom then select the percentage you want Select a higher percentage to enter text and a lower one to see more of your document If you are opening a Word document created on a desktop you may select View gt Wrap to Window so that you can see the entire document To check spelling select text then tap Tools gt Spell Check To use your new document as a template move the document to the Templates folder You can insert the data in
11. cn te When the service representative asks For the Electronic Serial Number ESN please provide the following number 099 00130357 When the service representative provides you with the activation code please enter the number below Ej 4 Enter the phone number MIN and MSID received from Sprint These numbers may be the same ay SB555 Watcher lt 7 1212 B Please enter the phone number given ba you by your wireless service provider Please enter the MSID given to you by your wireless service provider 514 6s 2 133146842 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 4 Network Support 5 After entering the phone number and MSID the modem then resets and the Watcher application displays the following screens B555 Watcher lt 7 1217 9 SB555 Watcher gf 1215 9 SIERAe WIRELESS SIERRA WIRELESS Tools Admin mj Tools Admin Z Note If the searching for SB555 screen does not proceed to the next screen after 30 40 seconds perform a warm boot on your 760 Comput er then restart the Watcher program 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 179 Chapter 4 Network Support 180 Data Provisioning At this point the activation on the Sprint network is complete It is rec ommended by Sprint to wait before you launch data provisioning to allow time for the activation to propagate through your Sprin
12. 7599 100 150 200 300 Select the text you want to convert and tap Recognize on the pop up menu Rename Move Delete Note New Edit Tools New Edit Tools The writing is turned into text Tap to disable the pen function If the conversion is incorrect you can choose different words from a list of alternates or return to the original writing To do so tap and hold the incorrect word tap one word at a time On the pop up menu tap Alternates Tap the word use from the menu with a list of alternate words or tap the writing at the top of the menu to return to the original writing Turn in Tap to return to your original writing Or tap the word you want to use report reporT New Edit Tools a 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 39 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 40 Tips for getting good recognition Write neatly Write on the lines and draw descenders below the line Write the cross of the t and apostrophes below the top line so they are not confused with the word above Write periods and commas above the baseline For better recognition try increasing the zoom level to 300 by using the Tools menu Recognition does not work well below a 150 zoom level Write the letters of a word closely and leave big gaps between words so that the 700 Color Computer can easily tell where words begin and end Hy
13. Dock Switch Registry Save Wakeup Mad 4 e aj 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Registry Save ab From the 700 Color Computer tap Start gt Settings gt the System tab gt Utilities gt the Registry Save tab to access the Registry Save control panel Utilities applet For Windows Mobile 2003 the only medium available for saving the reg istry is the Flash File System PSM Registry data is stored in the Flash_File_Store Registry path Check Enable Registry Storage to en able this function To ensure that the 700 Color Computer restores the real time clock after a cold boot check the Enable RTC Restore option Vote that this does not apply to the 730 Computer E settings s o k 3 Settings 845 m utilities utilities Registry settings can be saved between cold boots The registry is saved during device resets or when applications use the RaegFlushKey Function Enable Registry Storage Registry settings can be saved between cold boots The registry is saved during device resets or when applications use the ReaFlushkey Function Enable Registry Storage If enabled the real time clock can be restored on a cold boot Enable RTC Restore Dock Switch Registry Save Wakeup Mad 4 gt Ej Dock Switch Registry Save Wakeup mag dle Ej 700 Color Screen 730 Screen 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 367 Ap
14. L4 Note Depending on the e mail address options that you select you can use a directory service in addition to your contact list to verify names 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 81 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Companion Programs Pocket Word 82 Pocket Word The companion programs consist of Microsoft Pocket Word Microsoft Pocket Excel Windows Media Player and Microsoft Reader To switch to a companion program on your 700 Color Computer tap Start gt Programs then tap the program name Pocket Word works with Microsoft Word on your desktop to give you access to copies of your documents You can create new documents on your 700 Color Computer or you can copy documents from your desktop to your 700 Color Computer Synchronize documents between your desk top and your 700 Color Computer to have up to date content in both locations Creating a Document Use Pocket Word to create documents such as letters or meeting minutes To create a new file tap Start gt Programs gt Pocket Word gt New You get either a blank document or a template depending on what you have se lected in the Tools gt Options dialog box Select an input mode from the View menu You can open only one document at a time when you open a second doc ument you have to save the first You can save a document you create or edit in formats such as Word DOC Pocket Word PSW Rich Text Format RTF and Plain Text TXT
15. UPC EAN page 307 For Units With PSM Build 3 00 or Newer e You can configure scanner settings for the 700 Color Computer via the Intermec Settings control panel applet From the 700 Color Computer tap Start Settings the System tab the Intermec Settings icon See the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual P N 073529 for infor mation about the settings you can configure with this applet This online Intermec Settings manual is available from the Intermec web site at www intermec com 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 209 Chapter 6 Scanner Support Internal Scanners The Intermec Internal Scanner feature allows Automatic Data Collection ADC by accepting data from the COMI port and wedging it into the keyboard interface You can enable or disable this feature from the Today screen on the 700 Color Computer For Units With PSM Build 3 00 or Newer 210 e Intermec Settings Do the following before you configure your internal scanner from the In termec Settings control panel applet Information about the settings you can configure with this applet is described in the Intermec Computer Com mand Reference Manual The online manual is available from the Intermec web site at www intermec com 1 From the 700 Color Computer tap Start gt Settings gt the System tab gt the Intermec Settings icon EG Intermec Settin T q 9 29 3 Data Collection Communications Device Settings SmartS
16. 284 Z EnableZeroConfig This enables or disables the Wireless Zero Configuration Wizard from Microsoft After calling this function a warm boot is required for the change to take effect Note Enabling this function effectively disables all the SET commands in this API UINT EnableZeroConfig USHORT TRUE Enable Wireless Zero Config FALSE Disable Wireless Zero Config ERROR SUCCESS when successful ERR_ZERO_CONFIG_CHANGE_FAILED when the query failed Call this function to set the desired Zero Config status ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN EnableZeroConfig USHORT else UINT EnableZeroConfig USHORT fendif isZeroConfigEnabled Call this function to determine whether Zero Config is currently enabled UINT isZeroConfigEnabled None TRUE if ZeroConfig is enabled and FALSE if it is disabled None ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN_isZeroConfigEnabled else UINT isZeroConfigEnabled endif isOrinoco Call this function to determine whether the current radio is an ORiNOCO Lucent or WaveLAN radio UINT isOrinoco None TRUE if this is an ORINOCO radio and FALSE if it is not None ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT PFN_isOrinoco else UINT isOrinoco endif 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 7 Programming isSupplicantRunning Call this function to determine whether the security sup
17. 700 Color pertains to 740 741 750 751 760 and 761 Com puters unless otherwise noted The components include Ambient light sensors next page Audio system page 3 Battery page 5 Beeper page 7 Keypad page 12 Modem support page 17 PSM build version page 18 Resetting your 700 Series Computer page 19 Software build version page 20 Storage media page 21 Vibrator page 22 Wireless network support page 23 Note Desktop icons and control panel applet icons are shown to the left 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 1 Chapter 1 Introduction Ambient Light Sensor Z Backlight Note This information does not apply to the 730 Computer The ambient light sensor turns on the display lighting when conditions warrant but automatically turns if off again as surrounding light increases This conserves your 700 Color battery power Ambient Light Sensor Ambient Light Sensor This illustration shows the 700 Color Computer with a numeric keypad left and an alphanumeric keypad right To adjust the ambient light sensor tap Start gt Settings gt the System tab gt the Backlight icon gt the Both Power tab Make your selections then tap ok to exit this applet HEIDE Backlight On All Power Sources Restore backlight state an resume Automatic Backlight Control 8 Disabled O Turn OFF In Normal Light O Turn Off In Bright Light Extern Pow
18. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 29 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Basic Skills Today Screen Today 30 Learning to use your 700 Color Computer is easy This section describes the basic concepts of using and customizing your 700 Color Computer When you turn on your 700 Color Computer for the first time each day or after four hours of inactivity you see the Today screen You can also display it by tapping the Start flag shown left and then Today On the Today screen you can see important information for the day Tap to start a program Tap and hold to change time format d 12 07 Saturday March 22 2003 3 Tap to change date and time Tap here ta set owner information Tap to change owner information No upcoming appointments Mo unread messages Your day at a glance Tap to open the associated Mo tasks program Nel Tap to create a how item Tap to disconnect from ActiveSync To customize what is displayed on the Today screen including the back ground image tap Start gt Settings gt the Personal tab gt Today Status icons display information such as low batteries or when the 700 Color Computer is connected to a desktop or to the Internet You can tap an icon to open the associated setting or program 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Programs You can switch from one program to another by selecting it from the
19. IpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned by the function Return Values Returns TRUE if function succeeds Returns FALSE if the function fails GetLastError may be used to get the extended error value 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 257 Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL HAL GET OAL VERINFO Returns the HAL version information of the Pocket PC image Usage Zinclude oemioctl h Syntax BOOL KernelloControl IOCTL HAL GET OAL VERINFO LPVOID lpInBuf DWORD nInBufSize LPVOID lpOutBuf DWORD nOutBufSize LPDWORD lpBytesReturned Parameters Should be set to NULL Should be set to zero Must point to a VERSIONINFO structure as defined by OEMIOCTL H The fields should have these values cboemverinfo sizeof tagOemVerlInfo verinfover 1 sig ITCIO e id N e tgtcustomer pie e tgtplat SeaRay tgtplatversion Current build version number tgtcputype 8 Intel 0 tgtcpu PXA255 0 e tgtcoreversio date Build time etime Build date nOutBufSize The size of VERSIONINFO in bytes lpBytesReturned Returns sizeof PVERSIONINFO Return Values Returns TRUE if function succeeds Returns FALSE if the function fails GetLastError may be used to get the extended error value 258 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL HAL GET BOOTLOADER VERINFO Returns the HAL version information of the Pocket
20. You can receive Internet e mail messages and SMS messages in Inbox In ternet e mail messages are sent by using an address you receive from your Internet service provider ISP or your employer SMS messages are sent and received through your wireless phone service provider by using a phone number as the message address You can send and receive e mail by synchronizing with your desktop or by connecting to a Post Office Protocol 3 POP3 or Internet Message Ac cess Protocol 4 IMAP4 mail server You need to set up an e mail account for each method that you use except for Microsoft ActiveSync which is set up by default The ActiveSync folder on your 700 Color Computer stores messages that you send and receive through synchronization with a desk top Account names appear as folders in the folder list located on the left under the navigation bar in the Inbox message list With synchronization messages are synchronized between the device In box and the PC Inbox by using ActiveSync and Microsoft Exchange or Microsoft Outlook For more information see Synchronizing E mail Mes sages below When connecting to a POP3 or IMAP4 server you use a modem to con nect to your Internet service provider ISP or a modem or Ethernet card to connect to the local area network to which your e mail server is connec ted You can also use your phone to connect by using a cellular line con nection For more information see Connecting to a Mail
21. e ITC DEVID INTERMEC2D IMAGER Intermec 2D imager is installed e TC DEVID SE900 LASER SE900 laser is installed e TC DEVID SE900HS LASER SE900HS laser is installed e ITC DEVID INTERMEC EVIO EVIO linear imager is installed The high bit indicates whether the S6 scanning engine is installed The bit mask for this is ITC DEVID SGENGINE MASK A non zero value indicates that the S6 scanning engine is installed ITC NVPARM WAN INSTALLED This IOCTL reads the state of the WAN radio installed flag A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by pOutBuffer TRUE indicates that the WAN radio is installed FALSE indicates that no WAN radio is installed ITC NVPARM WAN FREQUENCY This IOCTL reads the state of the WAN radio frequency flag A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by pOutBuffer TRUE indicates that the WAN radio frequency is United States FALSE indicates that the WAN radio frequency is European ITC NVPARM WAN RADIOTYPE This IOCTL reads the WAN radio ID installed by manufacturing A BYTE is returned in the buffer pointer to by 4p OutBuffer which indicates the type of WAN radio hardware installed The maximum possible value returned is ITC DEVID WANRADIO MAX The current definitions are e ITC DEVID WANRADIO NONE No WAN radio installed e ITC DEVID WANRADIO SIERRA SB555 CDMA Sierra Wireless radio ITC DEVID WANRADIO XIRCOM GEM3503 GSM GPRS Intel Xircom radio e ITC DEVID WANRADIO SIEMENS MC45 GSM GP
22. 12 28 QD Ox6013782F 319 270 2934 319 270 2934 C 0 48 0 1 39 0 0 50237 2 Ej Verizon Networks 153 Chapter 4 Network Support Microsoft Phone Application 761 Computers with GSM Radios Phone Activation Phone Application 154 With the WAN radio module installed in your 761 Computer you can send and receive telephone calls Use the speaker on the back of the com puter as your earpiece and use the connector on the bottom of the com puter for your mouthpiece Tap Start gt Settings gt the Phone desktop icon from the Personal tab or tap Start gt Phone from the Today screen to access the application which processes your phone calls Tap the Close button in the upper right corner of this application to close The GSM phone is activated via a SIM card that you can purchase from your network provider Tap the appropriate keys to enter a telephone number then tap Talk to dial the number y d 12 04 X AT amp T Wireless EG Phone 3 19 369 8450 Tap this to backspace one digit E EN Lr GBRESESJETDEM Tap this to view your previous calls dialed number pamer P fo fr N Bae Tap this to dial the phone number shown above the keypad Edit Tools Tap this toggle the mute option Tap this to access the Contacts application Tap this to access the Notes application 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Call History Tap Call H
23. 270 SetAuthenticationMode 280 NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_OPEN GetAuthenticationMode 270 SetAuthenticationMode 280 NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_SHARED GetAuthenticationMode 270 SetAuthenticationMode 280 NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_WPA GetAuthenticationMode 270 SetAuthenticationMode 280 NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_WPA_NONE GetAuthenticationMode 270 SetAuthenticationMode 280 NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_WPA_PSK GetAuthenticationMode 270 SetAuthenticationMode 280 NDIS_RADIO_POWER_AUTO GetPowerMode 274 SetPowerMode 281 NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_CAM GetPowerMode 274 SetPowerMode 281 NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_FAST_PSP GetPowerMode 274 SetPowerMode 281 NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_ PSP GetPowerMode 274 SetPowerMode 281 NDIS_RADIO_POWER_UNKNOWN GetPowerMode 274 SetPowerMode 281 NDIS RADIO SCANNING GetAssociationStatus 269 nInBufSize IOCTL HAL GET BOOTLOADER VERINFO 259 IOCTL HAL ITC READ PARM 251 IOCTL HAL ITC WRITE SYSPARM 255 IOCTL PROCESSOR INFORMATION 264 nInfold NLEDGetDeviceInfo 290 NLED COUNT INFO NLEDGetDevicelnfo 290 NLED SETTINGS INFO ID NLEDGetDevicelnfo 290 NLED SUPPORTS INFO ID NLEDGetDeviceInfo 290 NLEDGetDeviceInfo 290 NLEDSetDevice 290 nOutBufSize IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID 265 IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT 260 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE 262 408 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO 259 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO 250 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID 257
24. Symbology Options Beeper LED virtual A mj 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Good Read Beep Duration Sets the duration of the good read beep Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer Action Tap the Good read beep duration parameter then enter a duration value to change this parameter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 1 4 1 9 1 Options 0 2550 Beep duration in milliseconds default is 80 Emm a 461207 Q Data Collection Beeper volume High Beeper Frequency 20907 Good read beeps lt 1 gt Good read beep duration lt 80 gt il Good read beep duration X Symbology Options Beeper LED virtual A a 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 337 Appendix A Imager 338 Configurable Settings I4 JJ Ig SYS Data Collection Note These instructions do not apply to the 730 Computer To access the settings from the 700 Color Computer tap Start Settings the System tab Data Collection to access its control panel applet Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Imager tab then tap this tab to access its parameters The following are parameters for the imager Note that these are listed in the order of their appearance within the Imager tab Aimer LED Duration The Aimer LED Duration controls the time the Aimer LED is turned o
25. cFailedRegKeys cFailedRegVals cFailedShortcuts return codeINSTALL EXIT UNINSTALL if IsProcessRunning L autocab exe h CreateFile L NNWindowsNN resetmeplease txt GENERIC READ GENERIC WRITE 0 NULL CREATE ALWAYS FILE ATTRIBUTE HIDDEN NULL if h INVALID HANDLE VALUE CloseHandle h else Couldn t create the file If it failed because the file already exists it is not fatal Otherwise notify user of the inability to reset the device and they will have to perform it manually after all of the installations are complete end if else DWORD dret h CreateFile L SYI1 GENERIC_WRITE GENERIC_READ 0 NULL OPEN_EXISTING FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL NULL Ez Force a warm start NOW if h INVALID HANDLE VALUE DeviceloControl h IOCTL TERMINAL RESET NULL 0 NULL 0 amp dret NULL Won t return but we ll show clean up anyway CloseHandle h else Couldn t access SYSIO Notify user end if end if return codeINSTALL EXIT DONE COdeUNINSTALL INIT Uninstall Init HWND hwndParent LPCTSTR pszInstallDir 238 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 7 Programming TODO Perform the
26. i News C Weather 9 Sports ESPN Jig Entertainment view Tools E 4 c zz Perform a cold boot on your 760 Computer to uninstall the Watcher application Watcher is intended for activation purposes only Intermec recommends using the following for establishing and maintaining con nection to the WAN radio Custom application using Intermec WWAN Toolkit API Custom customer application using Connection Manager Interface Note When connecting to the WAN radio via Pocket PC Connection Manager use the 10 digit phone number vzw3g com for the user name such as 1234567890 vzw3g com and vzw for the password 171 Chapter 4 Network Support Sprint Automated Activation Process 172 Z Note Sprint PCS uses a data provisioning method termed IOTA Internet Over The Air to complete its activation and data enablement The follow ing steps detail how to properly activate and data provision your 760 Computer Do the following to set up activation 1 Provide Sprint with your ESN rate plan and account information The ESN is either on the box or on a label inside the battery compartment The label would include the term ESN and a bar code along with the serial number 2 Sprint provides you with the following for each ESN e MDN such as 214 555 5555 e MSID such as 214 555 5555 e MSL OTKSL Activation Code such as 945614 e NAI Network Access Identifier such as the following CustomerNameo10
27. mj Speakerphone Output Input Levels Tap for more information on these level settings then click ok or OK to return to the Output Input Levels screen Caution Use care when adjusting the audia levels Microphone To Radio and Mic sliders adjust the microphone sensitivity volume Adjust these if the party at the other end of the call cannot hear you Speaker From Radio and Speaker sliders will adjust output level from speaker Adjust these if you cannot hear the party at the other end of the call m 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 161 Chapter 4 Network Support B555 Watcher 760 Computers with CDMA Radios The SB555 Watcher program is used on the 760 Computer with CDMA radios only Use this primarily to activate the WAN radio Once the WAN radio is activiated you can remove the SB555 Watcher program from the 760 Computer This tells you how to set up your CDMA radio in your 760 Computer Below are terms to familiarize you with CDMA radio technology Z Note Set up and provision information is also available in the 700 Color Activation Data Provisioning NID Network ID SID System ID CDMA Radio Setup Quick Start Guide P N 962 054 063 The process of programming the radio with the lock code MSL and phone number MIN to allow it to communicate on the provider s network Once activation is complete you can make voice calls if enabled by the carrier with th
28. signal che TTC KEYBOARD CHANGE named event using the CreateEvent API Advanced Keypad Remapping 294 It is also possible to map multiple key presses to one button and to map named system events to a button The multiple key press option could be useful to cut down on the number of keys needed to press in a given situa tion or to remap which key behaves like the action key Mapping events to a button could be useful to change which buttons will fire the scanner control volume and allow for suspending and resuming the device If you need help performing one of these advanced topics please contact Intermec Technical Support 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 7 Programming Scan Codes At the lowest driver level the 700 Color Numeric Keypad and the 700 Color Alphanumeric Keypad identifies keys as scan codes These scan codes are sent via the keypad microcontroller and cannot be changed without modifying the keypad firmware Numeric Keypad The following scan codes pertain to the 700 Color Numeric keypad Numeric Keypad Scan Codes and Meanings Press this Key Meaning ScanCode Reserved 0x00 I O button 0x01 Scanner Handle Trigger 0x02 Scanner Left 0x03 Scanner Right 0x04 4 GHI A2 None Left arrow Back Tab None BkSp forward slash Gold key Mi None Esc minus sign Down arrow Volume decrease 1 Caps Send 7 PQRS PgUp Alpha key ES 8g ES ES None Up arro
29. 1 NULL 0 amp bytesReturned NULL MessageBox NULL TEXT SYSIO IoControl Failed TEXT Network loader MB ICONHAND if hLoaderDev INVALID HANDLE VALUE CloseHandle hLoaderDev hLoaderDev INVALID HANDLE VALUE bad handle jelse CloseHandle hLoaderDev 266 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual NETWLAN DLL PRISMNDS DLL 80211API DLL MOD80211 DLL 80211CONF EXE CPL802 CPL 80211SCAN EXE 802PM DLL URODDSVC EXE Chapter 7 Programming The API provided by Intermec Technologies exposes a limited set of rou tines that allows a programmer to access and affect the 802 11b or 802 11b g network interface card from within their application The rou tines provided also reads writes values to the CE registry that pertain to the 802 11b or 802 11b g radio driver By using the provided functions a programmer can alter the 802 11b or 802 11b g parameters of Network Name SSID WEP keys infrastructure modes radio channel and power management modes A programmer can also retrieve network connect sta tus and signal strength indication from the RF network card The API is contained within the 80211API DLL file that should be pres ent in any load with the 802 11b or 802 11b g networking installed This file is the 802 11b or 802 11b g driver It is present in all 700 CE loads that use the 802 11b or 802 11b g network interface card This file is an Intermec authored file that provides the programmer
30. 393 backlight timeout 393 key clicks 393 Bar codes configuration audio volume 396 automatic shutoff 397 backlight timeout 397 Code 39 396 key clicks 398 internal scanner supported symbologies 212 scanning labels 396 supported symbologies 303 tethered scanner supported symbologies 222 Battery ambient lighting 2 low battery conditions 6 RAM maintenance 6 specifications 26 status 5 Battery status unit information control panel applet 363 Beeper configuration parameter frequency 335 volume 333 334 disabling the volume 334 selecting a volume 9 silencing the volume 11 supported functions 332 volume turning it on 7 when not available beeper frequency 335 good read beep duration 337 good read beeps 336 Bell Mobility activation process 183 Block recognizer Windows Mobile input panel 36 Bluealps CORE module installing available modules 137 loading a module 137 Bluetooth accessing 189 activating 189 unit information control panel main stack CAB file 364 WPport 191 Bluetooth compatibility network support 189 411 Index Books Microsoft Reader adding bookmarks 95 adding drawings 95 annotations index 95 attaching notes 95 copying 95 downloading 93 highlighting 95 reading 94 removing 95 searching 95 Browsing the Internet Pocket Internet Explorer 99 Build information software 20 e CAB files after the extraction 236 creating 224 INF files 224 with CAB Wiza
31. 6301FD35 IMSI MIN 9133146842 Phone Number MDN 9133146842 913 314 6842 Current Channel Activated YES Radio Temp 38 degrees C On Hardware Rev 010 Firmware Rev R2 D D0 138B RSSI 88 dBm Firmware Type Sprint PCS Pom PRL version 10023 TH History General Details General Details CORE Modules Configure mj CORE Modules Configure a GSM GPRS WAN Monitor General GSM GPRS WAN Monitor Details WAN Monitor Details Below are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information pro vided via the Details tab Most of this is similar to what is shown under the General tab Note that the information is listed alphabetically Identifies the firmware version if avaialble The IMEI International Mobile station Equipment Identity serial number of the GSM GPRS radio module Shows the IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity number assigned to the SIM card installed in this 760 Computer Lists the name of the manufacturer that developed this radio module such as Siemens Lists the product name for this radio module such as MC45 Lists the name of the service providing the network support Displays the RSSI frequency or lists Unavailable if there is no signal or the signal cannot be retrieved from the radio module Identifies whether a SIM card is installed in this 760 Computer 143 Chapter 4 Network Support Microsoft Phone Application 761 Computers
32. 74 System Phone application CDMA radios 153 T Tasks creating a task 74 Pocket Outlook 73 Start menu icon 31 synchronizing 74 TCP IP client DHCP server 194 Telepen configuration parameter 319 user ID 328 Telus activation process 183 Testing AT commands 185 Tethered scanner capabilities 216 disabling 214 enabling 214 error messages 214 limitations 216 settings 214 supported symbologies 222 Text messages Windows Mobile 43 Time setting 395 Tips for working Pocket Excel 87 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Index TLS 802 11 profile certificates 388 WPA encryption 383 profile security information WEP encryption 382 WPA encryption 383 Today Windows Mobile settings 45 Today screen Windows Mobile 30 Tools CD CAB files 122 364 CE Imager 128 Comm Port Wedge CAB file 364 management tools installed on desktop 121 MIB files 195 sample NPCP code 202 wireless printing sample 365 Tracking people via Contacts 64 Transcriber Windows Mobile input panel 37 Trap configuration parameters authentication 357 threshold 358 Traps control panel appet SNMP 357 Troubleshooting 1551 1553 Tethered Scanners 221 CAB Wizard 240 does not turn off 402 I O key 402 power status LED 402 power supply 402 shuts down during operation 402 slow recovery after a boot 402 unit does not turn on 402 unit does not turn on in dock 402 TTLS 802 11 radio module WPA enc
33. Calendar d 2 55 ok Subject Review z Location Starts 2 28 05 12 00 PM Ends 2 28 05 1 00 PM All Day No ccurs Once Remind me M Remind me 4 4 Reminder Tap to select Remind me to enable the reminder feature Categories Attendees No attendees Status Busy Sensitivity Normal Appointment tates Edit Ej Z Note To automatically set a reminder for all new appointments in the calendar tap Tools gt Options select Set reminders for new items then tap the number and timeframe options to change the information given ae Calendar 3l d 2 58 fok Options 1st day of week Week view 5 day week O Show half hour slots O Show week numbers L use large Font Set reminders for new items Tap this to set reminders 15 minutes for new appointments automatically EE Of ale Send meeting requests via ActiveSync M Show icons Ej 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 57 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 O To choose how you are reminded for example by a sound tap Start gt Set tings gt the Personal tab gt the Sounds amp Notifications icon Sounds amp Notifications Adding a Note to an Appointment You can add written or typed notes and even recordings if your device supports recordings to an appointment This is a good place for maps drawings and other detailed information 1 In the calen
34. GSM Global System for Mobile communications is an open nonpro prietary wireless system GPRS General Packet Radio Service is the high speed data evolution of GSM that supports Internet Protocol IP enab ling access to Internet and intranet content and applications from GPRS wireless devices WAN Monitor General The WAN Monitor CORE module displays helpful information about the GSM GPRS radio option built into your 760 Computer The following illustrations are for a GSM GPRS Siemens MC45 radio Below are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information pro vided via the General tab Note that the information is listed alphabetically Lists the name of the service providing the network support Identifies the frequency spectrum used by the radio module Bit Error Rate The average number of bits transmitted in error Identifies the firmware version if available Identifies the hardware version if available The network type which would list GSM GPRS Identifies the telephone number assigned to the SIM card The Electronic Serial Number ESN assigned to this radio module Unavailable appears if a number cannot be read from the radio This number which you give to your provider is either on the box or on a label inside the battery compartment The label would include the term ESN and a bar code along with the serial number If the WAN radio module has registered with a service provider network
35. Introduction Resetting Your 700 Color Computer Performing a Warm Boot Performing a warm boot may be necessary to correct conditions where an application stops responding to the system It does however unload all running programs Press and hold the I O key for about ten seconds then the 700 Color Computer continues from the screen you were at before you performed the warm boot Performing a Cold Boot In some cases where the 700 Color Computer completely stops respond ing it may be necessary to perform a cold boot Because this may result in data loss this procedure is not recommended unless all other recovery methods have failed Z Note This deletes all programs and data stored in RAM including the Ob ject Store Make sure data is backed up to your host computer or a storage card before performing a cold boot 1 Release the lower clip of the hand strap 2 Remove the battery pack 3 Press the Reset button 4 Reinstall the battery pack Reset button 700 Color Computer 730 Computer This illustration shows the back of the 700 Color Computer on the left and of the 730 Computer on the right 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 19 Chapter 1 Introduction Software Build Version To check to see if your 700 Color Computer has the latest software build select Start gt Internet Explorer gt the Intermec logo Intermec The latest software build version is disp
36. L2TP NDISW AN Miniport AsyncMac NDISWAN Miniport PPTP NDISWAN Minipart My network card connects to es Tap an adapter to modify settings Built In Ethernet 10Mbps 802 11b Wireless LAN L2TP NDISW AN Miniport AsyncMac NDISWAN Miniport Tap an adapter to modify settings Built In Ethernet 10Mbps 802 11b PRISM Wireless LAN L2TP NDISWAN Miniport AsyncMac NDISWAN Miniport PPTP NDISW AN Miniport PPTP NDISWAN Miniport Network Adapters Network Adapters New Tools Accounts E aj i Network Adapters E 730 Screen 750 Screen 761 with CDMA Screen 136 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 4 Network Support CORE 760 761 Computers with WAN Radios Activating CORE File Explorer g The Intermec CORE application provides a framework for various mod ules that let you configure and manage your Intermec products If a mod ule is not yet used or set CORE defaults to the first module as listed al phabetically These modules are software plug ins that can be configuration tools such as the 802 11b or 802 11b g radio configuration module or they can pro vide information on your environment such as a battery life module CORE modules are collections of specific information Each module can display general and detailed information Tap the General and Details tabs near the bottom to switch between general and detailed information Note that not all modules hav
37. Location Add a location if applicable gt Change Mame Setting Pocket Pc Security Traps Identification mlj 360 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Location Sets the identification location for this 700 Color Computer such as Shipping Action Tap the Location parameter then enter the location of where your 700 Color Computer to change this parameter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 6 0 Options The identification location may be up to 255 ASCII characters Default is no characters or blank eun Q p Contact Add an administrator here gt Name lt Pocket_PC gt Location Add a location if applicable gt Change Location Setting Add a location if applicable Security Traps Identification a 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 361 Appendix A Configurable Settings Unit Information Control Panel Applet US g Intermec Settings o Unit Information Versions Unit Information 362 Note This applet is not available in units with PSM Build 3 00 or newer To determine your PSM build version tap Start gt Programs gt File Explorer gt the PSMinfo text file If your unit has PSM Build 3 00 or newer then you may have the Intermec Settings control panel applet in place of the Unit Information applet Information about the settings you can configure with the Intermec Se
38. MSI Plessey Code 11 Matrix 2 of 5 Telepen PDF417 Micro PDF417 MaxiCode Data Matrix QR Code RSS 14 PA X X pA MR KM MM MK KM XK PA 0X MK MK MM MM KR KM X PA X X PA 0X X pA MK MM MM KR XM X PA 0X X KM KM MM KM KM KM X PA PX X X A pA X X A a a pA pw4 X Available in f w Available in f w Sxxp304 Sxxp304 Available in f w Available in f w Sxxp304 Sxxp304 RSS Expanded Available in f w Available in f w Sxxp304 Sxxp304 Codablock A X X Codablock F X X UCC Composite RSS Limited gt 212 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support Tethered Scanners The Intermec Tethered Scanner feature allows Automatic Data Collection ADC by accepting data from the COMI port and wedging it into the keyboard interface You can enable or disable this feature from the Today screen on the 700 Color Computer The following information is divided between units with PSM Builds old er than 3 00 next paragraph or units with PSM Builds 3 00 or newer starting on page 218 For Units With PSM Builds Older than 3 00 Enabling and Disabling x On the 700 Color Computer tap Start Today Tap the bar code scan ner icon in the System Tray circled below Initially the bar code scanner icon indicates that this feature is disabled shown to the lefi Friday March 21 2003 Tap here to set owner information No upcoming appointments No unread messages E Select Comm Po
39. Microsoft P cket Outlook Ji eoe Tenues S bb CORDERO an d PALO VU MA Race dede 50 Calendar Scheduling Appointments and Meetings 0 00 e eee eee eee 50 Synchronizing Calendar sad di dd 51 Why Use Categories in the Calendar 2a ez REESE ERRARE 51 What saa All Day Event dear pea pn E ep Pt piod ES 52 Whar s a Recurrence Pattern tl E Oe EE Us cmd 53 Viewing Appointments llis e 53 Creating or Changing an Appointment ers eer oper ne en Se ee ee ES rub 55 Creating an All Day Event a det a ados eta esas t per an Dye e Boe 2 eink qe tate odas 56 Setting a Reminder for an Appointment iussa eaa ie DS a MAC Va i ERA 57 Adding a Note t an Appointment zx Cos cie x Coca irae a rai 58 Making an Appointment Recurso 59 Assigning an Appointment to a Category lise 60 Sending a Meeting Request c uach scat nca dute iota esci ats a teach orga 61 Finding an Appointment iii ceo Ea ee p hoc dp er whee ea CE des 62 Deleting an Appointment mu snag tes RED t Bee a eee eee eo 62 Changing Calendar Options dora nina wey a mechs eek re 63 Contacts Tracking Friends and Colleagues 2 ec Er d mee te wae oS 64 Creatine CONC eoo tr dete e np ian dar Se cH a peter ete 65 Synchronizing C ntac s sd rn eed ace ER ep RE ego e fe a emda 65 Viewing CODES dore dett rh e opa e OD AC Maree E Dade 66 Creating or Changing a Contact pica neta FE NER PER ET ES 67 Adding a Note to a Contact aia uud deae a Sete bie Bude panis 68 Assigning a Contact to a C
40. Off off oO Moe ADR ese fun a Ej 700 Color Screen 730 Screen 190 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Wireless Printing Use this tab to print via Bluetooth devices Tap Device Discovery to disco ver or scan for remote Bluetooth devices When the 700 Color Comput er is finished scanning any newly discovered devices appear in the upper Devices box Tap Clear Devices to remove the list from the Devices box To print to a Bluetooth device select any of the devices listed in the Devices box then tap Connect Once connected the selected device moves to the lower Connected box To view connection information or register a COM port for a device from the lower Connected box select a device then tap Properties See Properties on the next page for information When done printing to a device select that device in the Connected box then tap Disconnect This moves the device in question back to the upper Devices box ir 13 Settings LL SEIT ok Bluetaoth Devices P840 4894163 00c0 1b Device Anonymous QDcO1bOS1 Discovery EMT AC BTGPS ODO2C7 PE20 4322365 0002c7 Clear Devices WindowsCE OD20807f1 Connected UcO1b Properties Disconnect Mode Wireless Printing File Transfer a New Tools Accounts i s a Properties Select a COM Port from the Choose COM Port box to register for this device then check Enable Wireless P
41. Phone Number Not available Sounds Ring type z Ringtone does Defan gt m Security O Require PIN when phone is used Change PIN 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Tap the Services tab to access settings for any of the provided services e ESSE ol BF Settings To access settings For a service select it From the Following list and tap Get Settings Call Barring Caller ID Call Forwarding Call waiting Voice Mail and SMS Get Settings Tap any of the settings then tap Get Settings Make your changes then tap ok to return to the Settings screen Below is a sample Settings screen T 59 Settings ef 461215 ok Phone Voice Mail and SMS SMS service center voice Mail 1 630 699 1314 E 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 157 Chapter 4 Network Support Tap the Network tab to find set or select the type of network on which this phone is to communicate Tr settings d 1216 AT amp T Wireless Current network Preferred networks Network selection 8 Automatic Manual Select Network Phone Services Network Phone Information t To learn the latest phone settings including the manufacturer model firmware rev and IMEI select Start gt Settings gt the System tab then tap WAN Info the WAN Info desktop icon Tap ok when finished SWAN
42. Smaller sizes may be useful over slower links Default is 65536 Sets the device name Used by Intermec management software Disables the default Intermec account A value of 0 disables the account Default is 1 Note that disabling the default account without providing a working access control list on the server will result in a device that will not accept any FTP connections Sets the interval between network announcements in seconds A value of 0 turns the network an nouncement off Default is 30 seconds where addr is in the form of a b c d Sets the preferred 6920 Communications Server optional where log is either 0 or 1 Sets the state of logging Default is O disabled Specifies the number of seconds to wait before initially starting FTP server services Sets the UDP port on which the network announcement will be sent Default port is 52401 Sets the port on which the FTP Server will listen for connections Default port is 21 Sets the FTP mount point to this directory Default is the root folder of the object store Sets the script name for the 6920 Communications Server to process Sets the default URL for this device Sets extended parameters to be included in the network announcement 242 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 7 Programming Configurable Parameters Via the Registry Editor The following parameters receive default values during the installation of
43. Tap the Read Encryption parameter then select an option to change this parameter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 10 5 1 4 0 Options 1 On SNMP get and get next packets must be encrypted 2 Off SNMP packets do not have to be encrypted default gun Read Only Community lt public gt Read Write Community lt private gt E ea cryption Off Write Encryption Off Encryption Key lt gt Change Read Encryption Setting O On otf Security Traps Identification mj 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Write Encryption Sets the packet level mode of security for SNMP read write requests If you enable write encryption all SNMP packets that are received with the read write community string have to be encrypted or the packet will not be authorized You need to use software from Intermec Technologies that supports encryption 6 Note To enable security encryption you also need to set the Security En cryption Key page 356 Action Tap the Write Encryption parameter then select an option to change this parameter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 10 5 1 5 0 Options 1 On SNMP packets must be encrypted 2 Off SNMP packets do not have to be encrypted default Settings gun SNMP E Read Only Community lt public gt E Read Write Community lt private gt Read Encryption Off Write Encryption Off Encryption Ke
44. The 700 Series Color Mobile Computer is available with imaging or laser scanning technologies including the following APS Linear Imager standard for 730 Computers Reads 1D symbologies and PDF417 bar codes Linear imag includes the EV10 Scan Engine ing using Vista Scanning technology reads low contrast bar codes laminated bar codes and bar codes displayed on CRT or TRT displays This imaging uses harmless LEDs for illu mination and does not require any warning labels Vista Scan ning is more reliable than lasers as it is a completely solid state with no moving parts or oscillating mirrors 2D Imager not supported on 730 Computers This decodes several stacked 1D and 2D symbologies includ includes the IT4000 Scan Engine ing PDF417 Data Matrix and MaxiCode without paint ing It can also read 1D codes from any orientation for ex ample the scan beam does not need to align perpendicular to the symbol to read it Photography is a secondary application the lens in the device favors bar code reading Photos are 640x480 256 gray scale 1D Laser Scanner not supported on 730 Computers Traditional laser scanner that decodes 1D bar codes includes the SE900 SE900HS SE900 S6 and SE900HS S6 scan engines PDF417 Laser Scanner not supported on Higher speed laser scanner that can read PDF417 labels by 730 Computers painting the label A 700 Color Imager Demo application demonstrates the more common fea
45. W 7 0x22 X 8 0x23 U 6 0x24 Gold White 0x25 NumLock 0x26 Space 0x27 Z 0 0x28 Enter 0x29 Y 9 0x2A None 0x2B 0x40 Charge Detect 0x41 LCD frontlight Ambient light Threshold crossed Keypad Backlight Ambient Light Threshold Crossed Ge wt m2 En re 4 uz x8 e D o 9 8 18 1 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 297 Chapter 7 Programming Sample View of Registry Keys The following is a sample view of the current default key mapping for the 700 Color Numeric Keypad See the registry on your device for the latest HK EY LOCAL MACHIN key mappings ENHARDWAR ResumeMask dword 7 Vkey hex 00 00 0B 05 02 03 C1 07 04 03 BE 00 34 00 00 00 25 00 00 00 08 00 03 02 00 00 1B 00 28 00 31 00 N 37 00 01 02 00 00 26 00 27 00 32 00 38 00 30 00 35 00 00 00 01 03 33 00 39 00 0D 00 36 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 07 05 01 05 03 05 02 05 EVIC END EMAPNK EYBD VkeyGold hex 00 00 0B 05 02 03 C1 07 04 03 BE 00 34 00 00 00 09 01 00 00 BF 00 03 02 00 00 BD 00 75 00 72 00 N 21 00 01 02 00 00 76 00 09 00 73 00 38 01 5B 00 35 00 00 00 BB 01 09 05 22 00 32 01 36 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
46. available online at www intermec com WE 10 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Disable the Beeper Do the following to disable the beeper O 1 Tap Start gt Settings gt the Personal tab gt Sounds amp Notification gt the Volume tab Sounds amp Notifications 2 Drag the System volume slider completely to the left to Silent 3 Tap ok to exit this applet Sounds amp Notifications System volume Silent SS Loud Enable sounds for Events warnings system events Programs Notifications alarms reminders _ Screen taps O Sort Loud _ Hardware buttons O sek Loud volume Notifications 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 1 Introduction 11 Chapter 1 Introduction Keypad Instructions for the keypad include the backlight and keypress sequences Backlight for Keypad Z Note This information does not apply to the 730 Computer E You can configure your keypad to turn on a backlight to assist you when you are working in low lighting To adjust the backlight for the keypad Backlight tap Start gt Settings gt the System tab gt Backlight Use the left right scroll arrows to move to and tap the Keyboard tab Make your selection then tap ok to exit this applet E Settings 4 C818 al Backlight Keyboard Backlight Always OFF On In Low Light On In Medium Light Q Always On Extern Power Both Power Powe
47. endif SetCCXStatus Call this function to set the desired CCX Network EAP status UINT SetCCXStatus ULONG NDIS NETWORK EAP MODE OFF Disable Network EAP CCX NDIS NETWORK EAP MODE ON Enable Network EAP CCX ERROR SUCCESS when successful ERR QUERY FAILED when the query failed or ERR CONNECT FAILED ifa connection with the radio failed None ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN SetCCXStatus ULONO else UINT SetCCXStatus ULONG fendif SetMixedCellMode Call this function to set the desired mixed cell mode UINT SetMixedCellMode ULONG NDIS MIXED CELL OFF Disable Mixed Cell NDIS MIXED CELL ON Enable Mixed Cell ERROR SUCCESS when successful ERR QUERY FAILED when the query failed or ERR CONNECT FAILED if a connection with the radio failed None ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT else UINT SetMixedCellMod fendif PFN SetMixedCellMode ULONG ULONG 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions Chapter 7 Programming RemoveWep Call this function with a key index of 0 3 to remove the WEP key at that index UINT RemoveWep ULONG ULONG value that specifies the key index to set Valid values are 0 3 ERROR SUCCESS when successful ERR QUERY FAILED when the query failed or ERR CONNECT FAILED if a connection with the radio failed On disassociation with all BSSIDs of
48. identification Identification mj 352 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Read Write Community Sets the read write community string which is required for processing of SNMP set requests by this 700 Color Computer An SNMP packet with this name as the community string will also process SNMP get and next requests Action Tap the Read Write Community parameter then enter a community string to change this parameter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 10 5 1 3 0 Options The read write community string can be up to 128 ASCII characters De fault is Private eui SNMP Read Only Community lt public gt A Read Write Community lt private gt Read Encryption lt OfF gt Write Encryption Off Encryption Key lt gt Change Read Write Community Setting Security Traps identification Identification mj 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 353 Appendix A 354 Configurable Settings Read Encryption Sets the packet level mode of security for SNMP read only requests If you enable read encryption all received SNMP get and get next packets have to be encrypted or the packet will not be authorized If encryption is en abled you can only use software provided by Intermec Technologies Note To enable security encryption you also need to set the Security En cryption Key page 356 Action
49. mj New Tools Accounts 1 mj 700 Color with Laser Scanner 700 Color with Imager Screen 730 Screen Screen 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 9 Chapter 1 Introduction Intermec Settings For Units With PSM Build 3 00 or Newer To select a beeper volume for the 700 Color Computer tap Start gt Set tings gt the System tab gt the Intermec Settings icon Tap the Device Set tings option tap to expand Beeper then tap to expand Volume Select an item then close this option E intermec Settings 2 12 32 e EG Intermec Settings ex 2 12 28 La Data Collection Communications Device Settings Beeper Volume Data Collection Communications Device Settings El Beeper El Volume O off O Low 9 medium O off O Low 9 Medium O High O High very high O very high E H Number of good read beeps amp e Number of good read beeps H Vibrate amp Display t Display Power Management Power Management File Backup File Backup System Component Versions i System Component Versions IDL Runtime versions File Edit view Help E gt File Edit view Help ll 700 Color Screen 730 Screen Note Information about the settings you can configure with the Intermec Settings control panel applet is in the Intermec Computer Command Refer ence Manual P N 073529
50. the setup application decom presses the files stored in a cabinet and copies them to the user s system For the 700 Series Computer CAB files register DLLs create shortcuts modify registry entries and run custom setup programs Tap a CAB file to extract that file or place the CAB file on one of the approved storage de vices in the CabFiles folder then perform a warm boot on the 700 Se ries Computer There are two methods available to extract a CAB file Tap a CAB file to extract it With this method the CAB file is automat ically deleted when the extraction process is successful unless the CAB file is set with the read only attribute Use AUTOCAB to extract all files when a cold boot is performed on the 700 Series Computer See the Software Tools Users Manual for in formation 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 4 Network Support The 700 Series Color Mobile Computer can integrate up to three radios in a single unit and automatically installs the appropriate software for radio or phone use when the unit is powered on L4 Note 700 Color pertains to 740 741 750 751 760 and 761 Com puters unless otherwise noted 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 131 Chapter 4 Network Support Understanding Your 700 Series Computer Due to the number of 700 Series Computers now available and to the number of applications drivers and modules that may or may not be available the
51. then click Properties On the Download tab specify the number of links deep you want to download To conserve 700 Color Computer memory go only one level deep Connect your 700 Color Computer to your desktop If synchronization between your 700 Color Computer and desktop does not start in Acti veSync on your desktop click Sync Mobile favorites take up storage memory on your 700 Color Computer To minimize the amount of memory used In the settings for the Favorites information type in ActiveSync op tions turn off pictures and sounds or stop some mobile favorites from being downloaded to the 700 Color Computer For more information see ActiveSync Help Limit the number of downloaded linked pages In Internet Explorer on the desktop right click the mobile favorite you want to change and then Properties In the Download tab specify 0 or 1 for the number of linked pages you want to download 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 97 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Using AvantGo Channels AvantGo is a free interactive service that gives you access to personalized content and thousands of popular Web sites You subscribe to AvantGo channels directly from your 700 Color Computer Then you synchronize your 700 Color Computer and desktop or connect to the Internet to download the content For more information visit the AvantGo Web site To synchronize an AvantGo channel md In Pocket Internet Explor
52. use a file list section name defined in the Destination Dirs section such as DefaultDestDir or the 96InstallDir96 string shortcut list section standard destination path Optional string value A standard CEx path or 96InstallDir96 If no value is specified the shortcut_list_section name of the current section or the DefaultDestDir value from the DestinationDirs section is used Example CEShortcuts Shortcuts All Shortcuts A11 Sample App 0 sample exe Uses the path in DestinationDirs Sample App 0 sample exe InstallDir The path is explicitly specified Sample INF File Version Required section Signature SWindows NTS Provider Intermec Technologies Corporation CESignature SWindows CES CEDevice 7ProcessorType se DefaultInstall Required section CopyFiles Files App Files Fonts Files BitMaps Files Intl Files TelecomNcsCE Files Windows Files Import Files Export Files Work Files Database Files WinCE AddReg RegSettings All CEShortcuts Shortcuts All SourceDisksNames Required section 1 App files c appsoft 2 Font files c WinNT Fonts 3 CE Tools c windows ce tools wce400 700ie mfc lib x86 SourceDisksFiles Required section rpm exe 1 C Appsoft program wce400 WCEX8 6Re1700 wcestart ini 1 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 233 Chapter 7 Programming
53. 05 1 00 PM A All Day Occurs le ad Tap to select either Yes or No whether this is an all day event Reminder MA 15 minute s Categories NO Categories Attendees No attendees Status Busy Sensitivity Normal Appointment motes Edit Ej x Note To change an all day event switch to Day or Agenda view tap the event listed at the top of the calendar and then tap Edit Change any ap pointment detail by tapping it and entering the new information You cannot modify or create all day events with attendees on the 700 Col or Computer If you create all day events with attendees on your desktop use ActiveSync to copy such events to the 700 Color Computer Then view them in Calendar For more information on copying files see Active Sync Help To use the device to schedule an appointment with attendees lasting all day set type to Normal then adjust date and time accordingly 56 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Setting a Reminder for an Appointment Do the following to set a reminder for an appointment in the calendar 1 Tap the appointment then tap Edit to change the appointment 2 Tap Reminder and select Remind me 3 To change how many minutes before the appointment you are re minded tap the minutes displayed then select the new minutes from a drop down or enter the new minutes Tap minutes to change hours days or weeks
54. 11b g radio module is installed in a 700 Color Computer Control panel applets that are specific for Wireless Printing CDMA IxRTT and GSM GPRS radio modules will only appear when each respective hard ware configuration is done on the 700 Color Computer See Chapter 4 Network Support for more information about the radio modules or the wire less printing Information about using reader commands and configuration bar codes to configure some of your settings is also in this appendix 6 Note Information about the settings you can configure with the Intermec Settings control panel applet is described in the Intermec Computer Com mand Reference Manual P N 073529 The online manual is available from the Intermec web site at www intermec com 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 299 Appendix A Configurable Settings Configuration Parameters A configuration parameter changes the way the 700 Color Computer op erates such as configuring a parameter to have the 700 Color Computer emit a very loud beep in a noisy environment Use any of the following methods to execute configuration parameters Change Data Collection and SNMP parameters via control panel ap plets later in this appendix Send parameters from an SNMP management station See SNMP Con figuration on the 700 Color Computer starting on page 195 Scan EasySet bar codes You can use the EasySet bar code creation soft ware from Intermec Technolo
55. 126 Updating Other Computers in Your Network 00 000000 126 Updating the System Software EIA eee Baas ERO P eC EO MDC RO 127 Migrating Applications IE Cei BE ERR a NER 128 Migrating from a 700 Monochrome Computer iissseeeeeee eee eee 130 Instala Cabinet Files y errs rat s etate Rex ad ce da 130 4 Network Support 5545 se ki tee eA Pd te e MO RR d 131 Understanding Your 700 Series Compitters sega AS ra oce A Qo Rees s ee 132 Antennas 760 761 Computers 545209 x zer A ME be Se Be Sow cR EORR rec do 133 Necwork Adapter i ads bee ar hts ud oy anta Moots wisn 133 Ethernet Communications 740 741 750 751 760 761 Computers 134 Wireless 802 11 Communications 25 pie rasa ke et whee rad 134 No Networking yuca ta nee lod tee nr Den vida mE PEU Ep Tia 135 Network Selection APIs ost xeu ae oa Ups Meee Ss eb Dated hE VE EA E pe ee 136 Network Connections await ob epe S E tineo ia iei ba En pa EE PE et E Eds 136 CORE 760 761 Computers with WAN Radios ia Fee d 137 Actiyating CORE merei yet XD AT eee e e ede Rd 137 Install an Available Radio Module scoters ecw ok way avert eat gU exa el eee 137 Loading a Radio Module toser ira Ecco Lip shee PEE Bep YS 137 802 11 CF CORE Module pais irl oto axles Ph pe e b e Oe ca Pert eel dd 138 General perrita ge Runge ant ee ul ayer dean i EOD ee di 138 A a E NE E E E E AE EE AA E E LN 139 CDMA 1xRTT CORE Module 760 Computers with WAN Radios 140 WAN Monito
56. 13 a Iphad Blue Plane Keys ouo unit bes A don dale d Coca et tel wae 15 BEDS cs ara PELI o Od EMT dd SE 17 Modemi Supports seria ES Ad E CEPI E A AES 17 PSM B ild Version on A SN serene OS 18 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual v Contents Resetting Your 700 Color Computer au sie dates instat Pots ife basin Lanes Cobalt ditte reu 19 Performing a Warm Boot edad sonde eA Vy E tu Voc b vba Vati beet er ne 19 Performins a Cold BOOt su av od oat dud escas wo o pb ent erase pfo Vaca ds 19 Software Build Versi n liada tra atio OU eaa E UE wal EAE EAR acia i A V cb p 20 Storage Media st gread eaa aini a gf A uae roa eda Vf RAT nca bassa ole rue Sol ucl 21 Compactblash Carden kewl actum mati ou e acide cpu tb axe and Ra do A 21 Secure Digital Cards Copa is repo ee ton ting quia ba t RE tna ce delit 21 NBI ooo A As Goku ace 22 Wireless Network Support s Dent nase ate aded uc toe RU Ate aah Sal Rog e acp aes 23 GCOS OT IOS uc esee ELA C LEA pU dada risen Aaah esate 24 Physical and Environmental Specifications 2 15522 soso RR EE P ade Deo RR RR A 24 2 Windows Mobile 2003 0 cece eee 27 Software Builds ad Selle EEUU QUA Vx P neath pis e M ALS do 28 Where to Find Information 22 acd edo A et Siete kd urged hab Mad satin pedo 29 Basic SUS ana IS HC oe VA AR ue apr wang nen vey Kp e dea 30 Today Serec S bietet Te wats a A EA eae ce bo ERO RA Eden 30 l EOBIAIBS Sotelo 31 Navigation Bar and Command Bar yi
57. 15 3 2 1 1 3 1 Syntax ADdata where data is any acceptable values up to 31 ASCII characters Embedded null NUL characters are not allowed Below are the non printing characters you can use for Virtual Wedge Preambles Default is blank Alert bell Backspace Form Feed New line line feed Carriage return Horizontal tab Vertical tab nnnn is up to four HEX digits Use leading zeros to fill out to four digits to ensure proper conversion For example to prepend the character M to scanned data set the Preamble to either 1 M or 2 x004D where 4D is the HEX equivalent for an uppercase M Settings eiu Data Collection i Virtual wedge lt Enable gt Pestamble lt tt gt Grid lt gt Code page lt 1252 gt l Preamble 3 Beeper LED Virtual Wedge KIG New Tools Accounts jl ES mlj 344 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings 4 Note When you enter the AD command without data the preamble is disabled If you want to use quotation marks or the following combina tions of characters as part of the appended data separate those characters from the AD command with quotes If you do not use quotes as described here the 700 Color Computer interprets the characters as another config uration command AD AE AF KC BV EX DF Example To use the two character string BV as a preamble scan this command as a Code 39 label or send this command through
58. 245 QUIT 245 RETR 245 RMD 245 RNER 245 RNTO 245 SITE 246 SITE ATTRIB 246 SITE BOOT 246 SITE COPY 246 SITE EKEY 247 SITE EVAL 247 SITE EXIT 246 SITE GVAL 247 SITE HELP 246 SITE KILL 246 SITE LOG 246 SITE PLIST 246 SITE PVAL 247 SITE RUN 246 SITE STATUS 247 SITE TIMEOUT 247 STOR 245 SYST 245 TYPE 245 USER 245 XCUP 245 XCWD 245 XMKD 245 XPWD 245 XRMD 245 stopping server from application 248 support 245 web browsers 247 G GetAssociationStatus 269 GetAuthenticationMode 270 GetBSSIDO 270 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Index GetCCxXStatus 277 GetCurrentDriverName 287 GetDiversity 271 GetLinkSpeed 271 GetMac 272 GetMedia Deprecated 288 GetMedium Deprecated 288 GetNetworkMode 272 GetNetworkType 273 GetNicStats Deprecated 288 GetPowerMode 274 GetRadiolpAddress 277 GetRSSI 274 GetRTSThreshold Deprecated 288 GetSSID Q 273 GetTXPower 275 GetWepStatus 276 H HAL verion of Pocket PC IOCTL HAL GET BOOTLOADER VERINFO 259 IOCTL HAL GET OAL VERINFO 258 Helper functions 283 ID field values IOCTL HAL ITC READ PARM ITC NVPARM 80211 INSTALLED 253 ITC NVPARM 80211 RADIOTYPE 253 ITC NVPARM ANTENNA DIVERSITY 252 ITC NVPARM BLUETOOTH INSTALLED 254 ITC NVPARM CONTRAST 252 ITC NVPARM DISPLAY TYPE 252 ITC NVPARM ECN 252 ITC NVPARM EDBG SUBNET 252 ITC NVPARM EDG IP 252 ITC NVPARM ETHERNET ID 251
59. 28 05 12 00PM Ends 1 28 05 1 00 PM b All Day No Occurs Once Reminder Remind me 15 minuters Categories MO categories Appointment Not Meaning Peau ca a Tab t en ete ty Todi tt E 5 IO Tap a text box to display the currently selected input panel Tap to insert anticipated word To enter characters tap them on the onscreen keyboard Ed mm To change word suggestion options such as the number of words sug gested at one time tap Start gt Settings gt the Personal tab gt Input gt the Input Word Completion tab Typing With the Onscreen Keyboard E Tap the input panel arrow then tap Keyboard On the soft keyboard that is displayed tap the keys with your stylus To type lowercase letters tap the keys with the stylus To type a single uppercase letter or symbol tap the Shift key To tap multiple uppercase letters or symbols tap the CAP key To convert a letter to uppercase tap and hold the stylus on the letter and drag up To add a space drag the stylus to the right across at least two keys To backspace one character drag the stylus to the left across at least two keys To insert a carriage return tap and hold the stylus anywhere on the key board and drag down 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 35 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Ej If you want to use larger keys tap the input panel arrow tap Option
60. 6 Scanner Support Tethered Scanner Default settings for the Tethered Scanner are shown in this illustration E Start a AE 6 46 Comm Port 1 Settings Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits X Flow Control x Sabre 1551E or 1553 Tethered Scanner The default communication configuration for the Sabre 1551E or 1553 Tethered Scanner is shown in the following illustration Scan the EasySet Reset Factory Defaults label to set the Sabre 1551E or 1553 tethered scan ner communications settings to this configuration The COMI port con figuration settings must also match those of the scanner to scan labels g Start a 4648 Comm Port 1 Settings Baud Rate 3600 Ed Data Bits Parity Even x Stop Bts Flow Control None bd Welch Allyn 1470 Imager Settings You can set the Welch Allyn 1470 Imager to this configuration by scan ning the Factory Default Settings label 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 215 Chapter 6 Scanner Support Scanner Cabling A null modem cable is required for the Welch Allyn 1470 Imager to com municate with the 700 Color Computer when using the 700 Color Serial Cable P N 226 999 001 Sabre 1551E 1553 Cables connect directly to the Model 700 COM Port Limitations and Capabilities The Tethered Scanner has the following limitations No auto detection of a scanner s physical connection to COMI port User needs to ensure
61. 62 Finding an Appointment There are two ways to find an appointment Tap Start gt Find enter the appointment name tap the Type arrow and select Calendar from the drop down list and then tap Go n the calendar tap Tools gt Categories and select the type of appoint ment you want displayed To show all appointments again tap Tools gt Categories and clear all categories E g a 7 15 exi i eo Tap this to select from a drop down Find review list or enter a phrase Type Calendar i Tap this for a drop down list of areas where to search this phrase Results E Updated TE2000 Weekly Meeting Appointment 12 16 04 12 00 PM E Updated TE2000 Weekly Meeting Appointment 1 11 05 12 00P E Updated TE2000 Weekly Meeting Appointment 2 7 05 1 00PM E Staff Meeting Appointment 2 14 05 9 00 AM Tap these to see details Ej Note In Find you can tap the Find arrow to select from a list of items of y P previously searched items or phrases Deleting an Appointment 1 In the calendar tap and hold the appointment 2 On the pop up menu tap Delete Appointment The next time you synchronize the appointment is also deleted from the desktop 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Changing Calendar Options In the calendar tap Tools gt Options To see appointment indicators select icons to display in Show icons You can choose to display
62. 700 Color Computer 8 Warm boot the 700 Color Computer to add these files to the Secure Digital storage card If the AUTOUSER DAT file is found and the RUN statement is cor rect the task manager launches and executes your program on startup Replicating 700 Color Settings Using the Registry The following information updates the registry on your 700 Color Com puter confirms the registry update then copies the information onto oth er 700 Color Computers in your network If you are using DHCP no changes are necessary If you are using Static IP the new 700 Color Computer will have the IP address of the original 700 Color Computer because the copied registry includes this information When you change the IP address using the Intermec Settings applet the information is lost when you perform a warm boot and the original IP address is used You must load the REGFLUSH CAB file before running the Registry Save application Once you do performing a warm boot keeps the new IP ad dress 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 123 Chapter 3 Installing Applications 124 File Explorer To install the Registry Save application after a cold boot is performed change the properties of the REGFLUSH CAB file to that of read only Using ActiveSync copy the CAB file to the Flash File Store CabFiles folder on the 700 Color Computer then perform a cold boot to load this CAB file Deleting the Old Regi
63. 9 Contacts ex Marne Job title Department Tap to return to the contact list the contact is saved automatically Company Work tel Work Fax Work addr E mail Mobile tel Web page Office loc Home tel Home addr Details Motes Edit Scroll to see more fields Notes is a good place for maps and directions Synchronizing Contacts Contacts stored on your device can be synchronized with Outlook contacts stored on your desktop or with Mobile Information Server 2002 or later New items entered in one location are copied to the other during synchro nization Handwritten notes and drawings are saved as pictures when syn chronizing with your desktop but are removed when synchronizing with a server For more information on synchronization see ActiveSync Help on the desktop 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 65 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 66 Viewing Contacts The contact list displays the contact name and the first primary phone number or e mail address specified for that contact Contacts are ordered by name of contact or company Tap the default letter home w ork mobile or e mail to the right of the contact to see additional phone numbers and e mail addresses Use your up down controls on your keypad to select a contact then press the left right controls on your keypad to change the default num ber displayed as a letter to the right of the contact nam
64. ABC End End ABC ABC ABC aw 267 CD LO GHI GHI GHI ama A 42 42 MNO M MNO MNO M M MNO MNO MNO POR PgUp PORS PORS PgUp PgUp POR POR PORS PgUp PgUp PgUp PORS PORS PORS PORS Pout Pout Pout Pout A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O p Q R S T U V W X Y Z 125 ABC Send End Caps ABC ABC Send End End Caps ABC ABC ABC Caps Send C F F ape 1 amp 8 BE GF Tes Send Tess Send Ce GHI GHI GHI Caps Send 125 Send Send AS AS AS Caps MNO Caps MNO MNO 1 Caps MNO 6 MNO MNO Send A4 Ad A4 Caps PQRS Send PgUp Send PgUp PgUp Caps PQRS PQRS PQRS 1 Caps PQRS PQRS PQRS PQRS Send PgUu PgUu Pgur Pgur ER Send 125 Send Caps TUV TUV TUV aD ED E E 125 Send TE Send Caps Send 1 Send 15 Chapter 1 Introduction Alphanumeric Keypad When you press the Scanning Alpha LED YO lights red to indi cate Alpha mode The keypad stays in the Alpha mode until you press E again If you want to type a lowercase c press c4 If you want an uppercase C press and hold the 2 key then press c4 Press space to enter a space Press the Keys O 4 O c O E gt O E O 4 O ko O gt O uD O a2 O O se O rs O v O wn O vs A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O p Q R S T U V wW X Y Z 16 Press the Keys O amp E O amp q O amp
65. After switching to a new packet driver perform a warm boot for changes to take effect ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT PFN_SwitchPacketDriver USHORT else UINT SwitchPacketDriver USHORT fendif Deprecated Functions Function The following functions are deprecated While these are not removed from the API these are no longer supported Their parameters are no longer applicable and the return value for all of these functions is ERR FUNCTION DEPRECATED Syntax GetRTSThreshold Deprecated UINT GetRTSThreshold USHORT amp GetMedia Deprecated U GetMedium Deprecated U GetNicStats Deprecated SetRTSThreshold Deprecated EncryptWepKeyForRegistry Deprecated SetDiversity Deprecicated 288 T GetMedia ULONG amp T GetMedium ULONG amp T GetNicStats NDIS 802 11 STATISTICS T SetRTSThreshold USHORT amp l EncryptWepKeyForRegistry TCHAR szDest AR szSource JL I 1 I SetTXRate Deprecated INT SetTXRate UCHAR I C JE NT SetDiversity USHORT 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 7 Programming Notifications Use the following information to programmatically control the vibrator to write an application to turn on the vibrator when a message is received via the WLAN radio link and turn it off when the user hits a key Vibrator support is implemented in the NLED driver as a false LED The vibrator is LED 5 a
66. Chapter 7 Programming CEDevice Describes the platform for the targeted application All keys in this section are optional If a key is nonexistent or has no data Windows CE does not perform any checking with the exception being UnsupportedPlatforms If the UnsupportedPlatforms key exists but no data the previous value is not overridden Required Yes ProcessorType processor type The value that is returned by SYSTEMINFO dwProcessorType For example the value for the ARM CPU is 2577 UnsupportedPlatforms platform family name This lists known unsupported platform family names If the name specified in the CEDevice xxx section is different from that in the CEDevice section both platform family name values are unsupported for the microprocessor specified by xxx That is the list of unsupported platform family names is appended to the previous list of unsupported names Application Manager will not display the application for an unsupported platform Also a user will be warned during the setup process if the CAB file is copied to an unsupported device Example CEDevice UnsupportedPlatforms pltfrml pltfrml is unsupported CEDevice SH3 UnsupportedPlatforms pltfrml is still unsupported 226 VersionMin minor version Numeric value returned by OSVERSIONINFO dwVersionMinor The CAB file is valid for the currently connected device if the version of this device is greater than or equal to VersionMin Ve
67. Component Object Model COM functions Specify these files in the SourceDiskFiles section During installation if installation on the device fails to call the file s exported DilRegisterServer function the file s exported DllUnregisterServer function will not be called during removal Example DefaultInstall AddReg RegSettings All CEShortcuts Shortcuts All SourceDiskNames This section describes the name and path of the disk on which your ap plication resides Required Yes disk ordinal disk label path 1 App files C Appsoft RP32 2 Font files C RpTools 3 CE Tools C Windows ce tools e CESignature Windows CES Example SourceDisksNames Required section 1 Common files C app common Using an absolute path SourceDisksNames SH3 2 SH3 files sh3 Using a relative path SourceDisksNames MIPS 2 MIPS files mips Using a relative path 228 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 7 Programming SourceDiskFiles This describes the name and path of the files in which your application resides Required Yes filename disk number subdir RPM EXE 1 c appsoft WCESTART INI 1 RPMCE212 INI 1 TAHOMA TTF 2 L4 Note subdir is relative to the location of the INF file Example SourceDisksFiles Required section begin wav 1 end wav 1 sample hlp 1 SourceDisksFiles SH3 sample exe 2 Uses the
68. Configuring the Tethered Scanner Do the following before you configure your tethered scanner from the In termec Settings control panel applet Information about the settings you can configure with this applet is described in the Intermec Computer Com mand Reference Manual The online manual is available from the Intermec web site at www intermec com 1 Connect your tethered scanner to the tethered scanner port e 2 From the 700 Color Computer tap Start Settings the System tab the Intermec Settings icon Intermec Settings EG Intermec Settin T 4 9 29 Data Collection Communications Device Settings SmartSystems Information ION Configuration File Edit view Help fe gt a 3 Tap the Data Collection option then tap to expand Dock Tethered Scanner O Enable scanner port Symbologies Symbology Options Scanner Settings Scanner Port Settings Imager Settings Decade Security 31 Virtual Wedge 31 Magstripe Reader Commurications Device Settings SmartSystems Information ION Configuration TERRE File Edit view Help ll mj 218 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support 4 Tap to expand Scanner Settings tap Scanner model for a drop down list then select the applicable scanner such as 1551E or 1553 in this sample screen EF Intermec Settings E x Internal Scanner F Dack Tethered Scanner O Enable sca
69. Do not create a CAB file with the MAKECAB EXE file included with Windows CE You must use CABWIZ EXE which uses MAKECAB EXE to generate the CAB files for Windows CE Do not set the read only attribute for CAB files 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 7 Programming Customization and Lockdown Pocket PC Windows Mobile is a hardware specification created by Microsoft Corporation Devices that wish to carry the Pocket PC logo must meet the minimum hardware requirements set in the Pocket PC spe cification Manufacturers are free to add extra hardware functionality Pocket PC devices also use a specialized version of the CE operating sys tem This operating system is built from Windows CE 4 2 but contains customizations most notably the lack of a desktop and the addition of the Today Screen To carry the Pocket PC logo all devices must be tested at an Independent Test Laboratory The ITL testing is done based on Microsoft require ments The test lab then reports the findings back to Microsoft Corpora tion and Intermec Technologies If the 700 Color Computer passed all tests Intermec is allowed to ship the device with the Pocket PC logo Each time the operating system is modified Intermec must resubmit to ITL testing This means we cannot change the operating system much and still be a Pocket PC device For example if we remove Word from the Start menu the device would fail ITL testing and we would not
70. Enter an asterisk Move down one page Access the Pocket PC Start menu Enter an at symbol amp Enter a backslash Enter a minus sign A Enter a plus sign Tab to the right Tab to the left 9 googesspsBab t G G Gold 2 ES Decrease volume Note Pocket PC applications are accessible only if configured to do so in the App Launch portion of the Utilities control panel applet See page 366 for more information a E E ME E E NEM c E c SE c E Increase volume 2 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 13 Chapter 1 Introduction Alphanumeric Keypad x Note This information does not apply to the 730 Computer The following table lists sequences that use the Gold White 6 plane key See Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 for information about the Pocket PC applications Press the Keys To Do This Gold White Toggle the backlight on or off also goes through backlight power levels if held down Gold White b Access the Pocket PC Record application see Note Y Access the Pocket PC Calendar application see Vote NS O Access the Pocket PC Contacts application see Note z Access the Pocket PC Tasks application see Note Move up one page Enter an asterisk Move down one page Access the Pocket PC Start menu Enter an at symbol Enter a back
71. GSM GPRS Radios 1 0 0 0 eee eee 159 Audio Moderada dev ier uet OA de Matas Cie sed vado Ab lp GAG do 159 INGE CAM OR rite a Bde E O BE RAR T acute Qs dts aN P nes 160 Adyanced Audio ss ode Sean dux oae de xe Ade pad p picis aes 160 SB555 Watcher 760 Computers with CDMA Radios 0 0 cee eee eee eee 162 Copying CDMA Radio Module CAB Files from Intermec Web Site 162 Via Microsoft CHIVES ING a s poe encore SU he eae US egal Ew yore E oe dU wpa 163 Via a CompactFlash or Secure Digital Storage Card suse ese ide oh 163 Finishing the Installation os eaten ered iets eat eee XA 164 NE IAL NOU Ede iue Tae e Kt p d ovt De ht eed ete dd teet eo eus 165 Verizon Automated Activation Process oiu s AN rs Ko bas 168 Sprint Automated Activation Process ici ai e e Rad 172 Download and Activate Sprint Watcher a viii EE a 173 Using Sprint Watcher serepet ii cri 176 Data Provisioning 1 1 6 cece a mee 180 Telus and Bell Mobility Activation IS ep UM v at ex ro ee 183 AT Command Interface 760 Computers wo so RES oe zeit eae dU o 184 Command Set for Sierra Wireless SB555 ere v SEE MRERN EXP 184 Command Set for Siemens MC45 or MC46 0 eee ee 184 Testing the AT Commands scence cee itr en one s scere eret dle 185 x 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Contents Wireless Personal Area Networking iu pd ueteris dat bal safe Anarchs aah eee det mite tese ite 189 Documentation ue cie rs om eR RES PRU SUA anb Us at
72. Info EE d 12 49 ok GSM GPRS WAN Information Manufacturer SIEMENS Model MC46 Firmware Rev REVISION 04 03 IMEI 351961000794808 E 158 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 4 Network Support PhoneUtility 760 Computers with GSM GPRS Radios Note This application is for 760 Computers with GPRS radios using PSM builds older than 3 65 Operating System version 4 41 due to E911 requirements issued by the FCC In the United States voice is not an op tion on 760 Computers with CDMA radios With the WAN radio module installed in your 760 Computer you can send and receive telephone calls Use the speaker on the back of the com puter as your earpiece and use the connector on the bottom of the com puter for your mouthpiece ZyPhoneUHlty Tap Start gt PhoneUtility from the Today screen to access the application which will process your phone calls Tap Exit or ok to close this application and return to the Today screen Audio Mode Select either Handset or Speakerphone from the Audio Mode box then do the following to send or answer a phone call Tap the numbers for a phone call using Clear to erase each digit then tap Send to initiate the call Tap Answer to receive an incoming call Tap End to disconnect a transaction Drag the Vol slider up or down to adjust the speaker volume Drag the Mic slider up or down to adjust the microphone sensitivity Phone App en 46 8 37
73. Intermec CEImager Note These instructions assume that the 700 Color Management Tools were installed on your desktop and that a storage card was added to the base configuration of the 700 Color Computer Do the following required steps to ensure that CAB files are restored ap plications automatically start and registry is restored on cold boot 1 From your desktop double click the Intermec CE Imager desktop icon to access the Intermec CEImager application If this icon is not on your desktop then double click the CEIMAGER EXE executable from the C Program Files Intermec 700C Mgmt Tools Tools CEImager folder 2 Click Default under Components List to activate the components 3 Click to expand the AutoRun System component click to ex pand the Destination Media option then select either the CompactFlash Card option or the Secure Digital Card option Do not select both storage cards as the AutoRun files copied will work for one stor age card but not work on the other storage card Z Note The 730 Computer does not support CompactFlash storage cards 128 intermec cermager x r Source Folder c Program Files ntermec S 00C Mgmt Tools Browse r Destination All 700 FTP Servers 200 FTP Server Browse Fomat Dive Remove Registry r Components List Default Custom r Components EH FEES System 32K selected Default Destination Media SELECT ONE MED C
74. Name Password a Note The activation process for your Watcher version may vary from the following steps Thus you may not have to do all of them v 1 Tap Start Programs the Watcher icon or tap the Watcher icon from the NDISTRAY via the Today screen circled in the following illustra Watcher tion to launch the SB555 Watcher program tart E q 1 19 Monday February 21 2005 Tap here to set owner information ig Mo upcoming appointments No unread messages No tasks 2 The Activation Wizard should start automatically If not then tap Admin gt Activation Wizard from the bottom of the screen 3 Follow the screen prompts tapping Next to move from one screen to the next 166 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 4 Network Support 4 When you reach the Activation screen select Manual Activation SB555 Watcher A d 557 B ZA Please select one of the following options 8 Manual Speak with a Customer Actiwation Care representative using a standard phone Also requires the manual input of certain items 5 At the appropriate screen enter the Activation Code OTSL MSL OTKSL or SPC provided by your carrier and tap Next a d 600 amp When the service representative asks For the Electronic Serial Number ESN please provide the following number 099 00130357 When the service representative provides you with the activation code please enter
75. O E amp O amp u O amp 12 O amp 03 O amp O amp 15 O Eu O amp vs 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 1 Introduction LEDs The battery status LED CO and the scanning keypad shift and notifica tion LED YO turn red green or yellow Battery Status LED LED Color and Action Description Steady Green Battery is more than 9596 charged and unit is on charger Blinking Red Battery is low The speed of the blinking increases as the battery s power gets increasingly lower Red Main battery is low or if charging remains red until your 700 Color Computer reaches 95 charge status Yellow The 700 Color Computer is on a charging source and there is no battery pack installed The mobile computer may also be out of the charging range of 32 to 122 F 0 to 50 C When back in range charging resumes and the LED changes to red or green Alternating Red Yellow Replace the battery pack Scanning Keypad Shift and Notification LED LED Color and Action Description Momentary Green Indicates a good scan Blinking Green Indicates the scanner is initializing Steady Red Indicates the keypad is shifted to the Alpha Blue plane and the 700 Color Computer is turned on Blinking Red Indicates the WAN GPRS or CDMA radio is on when the 700 Color Computer is in suspend mode Also indicates when the WAN radio is initialized on 761 Computers Yellow When the keypad is in alpha mod
76. POWER LEVEL 30 30 mW NDIS POWER LEVEL 15 15 mW NDIS POWER LEVEL 5 5mW NDIS POWER LEVEL 1 1 mW NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_UNKNOWN Unknown Value or Error ERROR SUCCESS when successful ERR QUERY FAILED when the query failed or ERR CONNECT FAILED if a connection with the radio failed If ERROR SUCCESS is returned your ULONG reference is populated with the TX power in milliwatts mW Valid ranges are from 5 mW to 100 mW ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN GetTXPower ULONG amp else UINT GetTXPower ULONG fendif 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 275 Chapter 7 Programming Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions 276 GetWepStatus Call this function to get the current state of the radio s WEP and encryp tion levels UINT GetWepStatus ULONG amp NDIS ENCRYPTION 1 ENABLED NDIS ENCRYPTION DISABLED NDIS ENCRYPTION NOT SUPPORTED NDIS ENCRYPTION 1 KEY ABSENT NDIS ENCRYPTION 2 ENABLED NDIS ENCRYPTION 2 KEY ABSENT NDIS ENCRYPTION 3 ENABLED NDIS ENCRYPTION 3 KEY ABSENT WEP is enabled TKIP and AES are not enabled and a transmit key may or may not be available same as NDIS RADIO WEP ENABLED Indicates that AES TKIP and WEP are disabled and a transmit key is available Same as NDIS RADIO WEP DISABLED Indicates encryption WEP TKIP AES is not supported Same as NDIS RADIO WEP NOT SUPPORTED Indicates that AES T
77. Resource Kit in the Intermec Developer Library IDL for information about data collection functions Contact your Inter mec representative for more information To access the settings from the 700 Color Computer tap Start gt Settings gt the System tab gt Data Collection to access its control panel applet 12 31145 Data collection Use the left and right arrows to scroll through the tabs along the bottom of the control panel applet then tap a tab to access its menus These tabs rep resent the following groups of settings or parameters Symbologies starting on page 303 Symbology Options starting on page 324 Beeper LED starting on page 332 Imager starting on page 338 Virtual Wedge starting on page 343 302 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Symbologies Appendix A Configurable Settings You can change bar code symbology parameter settings in your 700 Color Computer via the Data Collection control panel applet The following parameters are for bar code symbologies Additional information about the more common bar code symbologies are in Appendix B Bar Codes Note that these parameters are listed in the order of their appearance within this tab Most of these symbologies apply to both the imager and the laser scanner tools However when using an imager the Macro PDF page 314 Micro PDF417 page 316 Matrix 2 of 5 page 318 Telepen page 319 and Code 11 page
78. Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Plessey User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter you can set your own ASCII character to identify Plessey bar code data Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer Action Tap to expand the Symbology ID parameter select the Plessey user ID parameter then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 4 1 13 1 Options x where x is a single ASCII character Default is D Standard 2 of 5 User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter you can set your own ASCII character to identify Standard 2 of 5 bar code data Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer Action Tap to expand the Symbology ID parameter select the Standard 2 of 5 user ID parameter then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 4 1 23 1 Options x where x is a single ASCII character Default is D UPCA User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter you can set your own ASCII character to identify UPC A Universal Product Code bar code data Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer Action Tap to expand the Symbology ID parameter select the UPC A user ID parameter then enter a user ID value to cha
79. Start menu You can customize which programs you see on this menu For information see Adjusting Settings on page 45 To access some programs tap Start gt Programs and then the program name You can also switch to some programs by pressing a program icon Your 700 Color Computer has one or more program icons located on the front or side of the computer The icons on the icons identify the programs to which they switch x Note Some programs have abbreviated labels for check boxes and drop down menus To see the full spelling of an abbreviated label tap and hold the stylus on the label Drag the stylus off the label so that the command is not carried out The following is a partial list of programs that are on your 700 Color Computer Look on the Windows Mobile Companion CD for additional programs that you can install onto your 700 Color Computer t ActiveSync Synchronize information between your 700 Color Computer and desktop Ea Calendar Keep track of your appointments and create meeting requests u Contacts Keep track of your friends and colleagues Send and receive e mail messages Internet Explorer Browse Web and WAP Wireless Application Protocol sites and down load new programs and files from the Internet LES Create handwritten or typed notes drawings and recordings Keep track of your tasks Q Windows Media Play digital audio and video files that are stored on your 700 Series Co
80. To sign in upon connecting tap Tools Options General and select the Run this program upon connection box Signing in to an Exchange account may take several minutes depending upon your connection speed Reducing the number of Exchange con tacts decreases your sign in time Working with Contacts The MSN Messenger window shows all of your messenger contacts at a glance divided into Online and Not Online categories From this view while connected you can chat send e mail block the contact from chat ting with you or delete contacts from your list using the pop up menu fZMSNMessenger 4 11 49 LX A Anne work Online A Online 2 Bobbie Tap a contact to start a A Not Online chat Tap and hold to display a Send Mail hp91 msn com pop up menu of actions Block Delete Contact Properties Tools Chats Ej To add a contact tap Tools gt Add a Contact and follow the directions on the screen To delete a contact tap and hold the contact s name then tap Delete Contact from the pop up menu To see others online without being seen tap Tools gt My Status gt Appear Offline 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 89 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 90 Managing Contacts To be alerted each time you are added to a contact list tap Tools gt Op tions gt the Privacy tab To block a contact from seeing your status and sending you messages tap the contact and tap the ri
81. Yes Signature signature name Windows NT Provider INE creator The company name of the application such as Microsoft CESignature Windows CE Example Version Signature SWindows NTS Provider Intermec CESignature SWindows CES 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 7 Programming CEStrings This specifies string substitutions for the application name and the default installation directory Required Yes AppName app name Name of the application Other instances of AppName in the INF file are replaced with this string value such as RP32 nstallDir default install dir Default installation directory on the device Other instances of Install Dir in the INF file are replaced with this string value Example SDMMC_Disk AppName Example CEStrings AppName Game Pack InstallDir CE1 AppName Strings This section is optional and defines one or more string keys A string key represents a string of printable characters Required No string key value String consisting of letters digits or other printable characters Enclose value in double quotation marks if the corresponding string key is used in an item that requires double quotation marks No string keys is okay Example Strings reg path Software Intermec My Test App 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 225
82. a service provider network one of these appears Registered on home network Radio module is registered on its home network Registered on roamed network Radio module registered on another service provider s network Radio Not Registered There is no network within range of this radio module Displays the Received Signal Strength Indicator RSSI frequency or lists Unavailable if there is no signal or the signal cannot be retrieved from the radio module Indicates whether serial communications passed Serial com OK or failed Serial com FAIL in its last transaction A status of Serial com FAIL typically indicates that the 760 Computer is unable to establish communication with the radio module installed within Identifies your network service provider History This bar graph displays an active history of this radio module s quality of History connections 140 Friendly Indicator d Usually indicates the signal strength for this radio module Three filled dots indicate a high quality or strong signal Three empty dots indicate that the signal is out of range or there is no signal detected 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Firmware Rev Firmware Type Hardware Rev IMSI MIN Manufacturer MDN Model Phone Number PRI Version Radio Temp Rx 9 core er Er EY WAN MODULE Network Type Home network Radio ESN ffw R2 0 0 135B 913 314 684
83. a start character data characters an eight bit cyclic check digit and a termination bar The code is continuous and not self checking You need to configure two parameters for Plessey code Start Code and Check Digit Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer Action Tap to expand the Plessey parameter select the setting to be changed then select an option to change this setting or select an option from the drop down list SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 1 1 10 1 Options Decoding Not active default Active Check digit Not transmitted default Transmitted Bar code length Any length Minimum length default Minimum length 001 254 Minimum length 1 254 default is 6 Z Note If Bar code length 1 then Minimum length is entered Emm a 4 iiis Q Data Collection e TS sey EX Decoding lt Not active gt i check digit lt Not transmitted gt Bar code length lt Any length gt Minimum length lt 6 gt Symbologies Symbology Options Beepel 4 gt a 312 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings MSI MSI is a symbology similar to Plessey code page 312 that includes a start pattern data characters one or two check digits and a stop pattern Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Com puter Action Tap to expand the MSI parameter select t
84. account but you can set up only one SMS account Note You cannot add a new account while connected Tap Accounts gt Disconnect to disconnect Note You cannot delete your SMS account WOW C 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 79 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 80 RW Downloading Messages from the Server In Inbox tap Accounts gt Connect to open a connection to the Internet or your corporate network depending on the account For more information tap Start gt Help gt Connections to see Connections Help 1 Tap Accounts and ensure that the account you want to use is selected marked by a bullet Tap Connect The messages on your 700 Color Computer and e mail server are synchronized new messages are downloaded to the 700 Color Inbox folder messages in the 700 Color Outbox folder are sent and messages that were deleted from the server are removed from the 700 Color Inbox Tap a message in the message list to open it If you read a message and decide that you need the full copy tap Edit gt Mark for Download while in the message window If you are in the message list tap and hold the message and then tap Mark for Down load This also downloads message attachments if you selected those op tions when you set up the e mail account You can also choose to down load full copies of messages by default 4 When finished tap Accounts gt Disconnect Note Receiving entire messages consumes storag
85. and place the shortcut in the Start Menu folder Using File Explorer on the 700 Color Computer po Tap Start gt Programs gt File Explorer and locate the program tap the File Explorer folder list labeled My Documents by default and then My Device to see a list of all folders on the 700 Color Computer Tap and hold the program and tap Cut on the pop up menu Open the Start Menu folder located in the Windows folder tap and hold a blank area of the window and tap Paste on the pop up menu The program now appears on the Start menu For more information on using File Explorer see Finding and Organizing Information on page 44 Using ActiveSync on the desktop Use the Explorer in ActiveSync to explore your 700 Color Computer files and locate the program Right click the program and then click Create Shortcut Move the shortcut to the Start Menu folder in the Windows folder The shortcut now appears on the Start menu For more informa tion see ActiveSync Help Removing Programs Tap Start Settings the System tab Remove Programs Remove i the program does not appear in the list of installed programs use File Programs Explorer on your 700 Color Computer to locate the program tap and hold the program and then tap Delete on the pop up menu 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 47 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Microsoft ActiveSync 48 Visit the following Microsoft Web site for the latest in updates techn
86. appearance within the Virtual Wedge tab Virtual Wedge Enables or disables the virtual wedge for the internal scanner The virtual wedge retrieves scanned Automatic Data Collection ADC data and sends it to the keypad driver so that the 700 Color Computer can receive and interpret the data as keypad input Because the virtual wedge translates incoming data into keypad input the size of the keypad buffer limits the effective length of the label to 128 characters Longer labels may be truncated For labels of more than 128 characters you need to develop an application that bypasses the keypad buffer Action Tap the Virtual Wedge parameter then tap an option to change this pa rameter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 2 1 1 2 1 Options 0 Disable 1 Enable default AY settings Pd EO Data Collection Virtual wedge Enable Preamble lt gt Postamble zit Grid lt gt Code page lt 1252 gt Change Virtual wedge Setting O Disable a Enable Beeper LED Virtual Wedge apy New Tools Accounts jl ES mlj 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 343 Appendix A Configurable Settings Preamble Sets the preamble that precedes any data you scan with the 700 Color Computer Common preambles include a data location number or an op erator number Action Tap the Preamble parameter then enter a preamble value to change this parameter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963
87. bar code data Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer Tap to expand the Symbology ID parameter select the EAN 13 user ID parameter then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 4 1 9 1 x where x is a single ASCII character Default is F Matrix 2 of 5 User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter you can set your own ASCII character to identify Matrix 2 of 5 bar code data Vote that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer Tap to expand the Symbology ID parameter select the Matrix 2 of 5 user ID parameter then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 4 1 24 1 x where x is a single ASCII character Default is D Telepen User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter you can set your own ASCII character to identify Telepen bar code data Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer Tap to expand the Symbology ID parameter select the Telepen user ID parameter then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 4 1 25 1 x where x is a single ASCII character Default is an asterisk 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Code 11 User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter you can
88. be synchronized with Word documents on your desktop To synchronize files first select the Files information type for synchronization in ActiveSync When you select Files the My Docu ments folder for the 700 Color Computer is created on your desktop Place all files you want to synchronize with the device in this folder Pass word protected files cannot be synchronized All Pocket Word files stored in My Documents and its subfolders are syn chronized with the desktop ActiveSync converts documents during syn chronization For more information on synchronization or file conversion see ActiveSync Help on the desktop 6 Note When you delete a file on either your desktop or your 700 Color Computer the file is deleted in the other location the next time you syn chronize 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 85 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Pocket Excel 86 Pocket Excel You can create and edit workbooks and templates in Microsoft Pocket Ex cel as you do in Microsoft Excel on your desktop Pocket Excel workbooks are usually saved as PXL files but you can also save them in XLS format When you close a workbook it is automatically named and placed in the Pocket Excel workbook list You can attach a password to a workbook to help ensure privacy Creating a Workbook Use Pocket Excel to create workbooks such as expense reports and mileage logs To create a new file tap Start gt Programs gt Pocket E
89. change the suspend voltage to favor suspend time over rundown time then click ok to exit E settinos 9 o4cro D Power You can configure the mobile computer to increase battery runtime by decreasing RAM retention time and or performance Max RAM Max Battery retention runtime L I Max Max Battery performance runtime t D Fower Battery Notifications a 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Beeper Z Note Fach time the 700 Color Computer is cold booted all default set tings are restored unless registry storage is enabled See page 129 for infor mation about enabling the registry storage For information about setting volume levels for screen taps ActiveSync alert noises etc tap Start gt Help gt Pocket PC Basics then select Notifications Enable the Beeper To enable the beeper 1 Tap Start gt Settings gt the Personal tab gt Sounds amp Notifications gt the Volume tab Sounds amp o ul Notifications 2 Drag the System volume slider bar to the right of the Silent position 3 Tap ok to exit this applet Sounds amp Notifications System volume silent mu EO Loud Enable sounds for Events warnings system events Programs Notifications alarms reminders L Screen taps Q Soft e Loud _ Hardware buttons Q Soft e Loud Volume Notifications Ej 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 7 Chapte
90. client cannot find a DHCP server it generates an AutoIP address from the 169 254 xxx xxx block The client then tries to check for a DHCP server every 15 seconds and if a DHCP server is found the client drops the AutoIP address and uses the address from the DHCP server In the MSDN Windows CE documentation available out on the Micro soft Developer Network web site www msdn com see Automatic Client Configuration for more information on AutoIP To disable AutoIP set the AutoCfg registry entry to 0 If a DHCP serv er cannot be found instead of using AutoIP the system will display the Unable to obtain a server assigned IP address message Note If you try to disable AutoIP using a CAB file to set the registry value for AutoIP remember to set the EnableDHCP value to 1 to keep DHCP enabled Note To extend the number of attempts that a DHCP client makes to get a DHCP address use the DhcpRetryDialogue and DhcpMaxRetry registry settings Note Change the AutoInterval registry key value to make the client retry more often to obtain a DHCP address 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 4 Network Support SNMP Configuration on the 700 Color Computer In short SNMP is an application layer protocol that facilitates the ex change of management information between network devices The 700 Color Computer is such an SNMP enabled device Use SNMP to control and configure the 700 Color Computer anywhere o
91. da E Vadit gw E E E 100 Connecting to an Internet Service Provider 2 2o oie a t de 100 Connecting to Work ivory these Eb ERDEPEDECR EC deri E eed Sone RH 104 Creating a Modem Connection to Work rr cet E a 105 Creating a Wireless Network Connection 0 0 00 eee eee eee eee 108 Creating a VPN Server Connection to Work oooooooccoommomm o 113 Endinga Connection rasa Geis age ave Deas rade 116 Connecting Directly to an E mail Seer voee at Sepe o 116 Setting Up an E mail Account Miike a o Ere P LM REI eto 116 3 Installing Applications seeeeeeeeeesee 119 l ackagine an Application cine ca edv I Race cnet eee ck ac Da ate ar dcn 120 viii 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Contents Installing Applications ostias a ale Aris Lass natora sate Adie tr oie 121 Using Microsoft ActiveSync usus i eic uod whe aa sabatino px ta 121 Using the E TD Sever 223 53a d t aco ol ea sen een ite a Von a cat dd 122 sine a Storage ard sus vvv abe Ice DE CUR Rr A e oe Ai 122 Copying to a CompactFlash Card 515428 Opies RADA ed 122 Copying to a Secure Digital Storage Card vii e Seale ok 123 Replicating 700 Color Settings Using the Registry eee 123 Deleting the Old Registry File ues harris 124 Copying the RegFlush CAB File i cic cin tek Rer RR dee aed 124 Loading the Registry Save Application 422995240248 ea eb RE eee 125 Confirming the New Registry File Lir RE Rae tr See we
92. documents that you can download in PDF format To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals contact your local Intermec representative or distributor 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Before You Begin Patent Information Product is covered by one or more of the following patents 4 882 476 4 894 523 4 953 113 4 961 043 4 970 379 4 988 852 5 019 699 5 021 642 5 038 024 5 081 343 5 095 197 5 144 119 5 144 121 5 182 441 5 187 355 5 187 356 5 195 183 5 195 183 5 195 183 5 216 233 5 216 550 5 218 191 5 227 614 5 233 172 5 241 488 5 243 602 5 258 606 5 278 487 5 288 985 5 308 966 5 322 991 5 331 136 5 331 580 5 342 210 5 349 678 5 359 185 5 371 858 5 373 478 5 389 770 5 397 885 5 410 141 5 414 251 5 416 463 5 442 167 5 464 972 5 468 947 5 468 950 5 477 044 5 486 689 5 488 575 5 500 516 5 502 297 5 504 367 5 508 599 5 514 858 5 530 619 5 534 684 5 536 924 5 539 191 5 541 419 5 548 108 5 550 362 5 550 364 5 565 669 5 567 925 5 568 645 5 572 007 5 576 529 5 592 512 5 594 230 5 598 007 5 608 578 5 616 909 5 619 027 5 627 360 5 640 001 5 657 317 5 659 431 5 671 436 5 672 860 5 684 290 5 719 678 5 729 003 5 793 604 5 742 041 5 761 219 5 764 798 5 777 308 5 777 309 5 777 310 5 786 583 5 798 509 5 798 513 5 804 805 5 805 807 5 811 776 5 811 777 5 818 027 5 821 523 5 828 052 5 831 819 5 834 749 5 834 753 5 837 987 5 841 121 5 842 07
93. erational modes of specific hardware and software on the 700 Color Com puter including the dock switch registry storage wakeup mask and ap plication launch keys To access the settings from the 700 Color Computer tap Start gt Settings gt the System tab gt Utilities to access its control panel applet Use the left and right arrows to scroll through the tabs along the bottom of the control panel applet then tap a tab to access its menus These tabs rep resent the following groups of settings or parameters Dock Switch next paragraph Registry Save page 367 Wakeup Mask page 368 App Launch page 369 From the 700 Color Computer tap Start gt Settings gt the System tab gt Utilities gt the Dock Switch tab to access the Dock Switch control panel applet Use this applet to control the position of the dock switch This can be set either to a COM A phone jack for a modem position or to a COM B serial position If switched to COM B and suspended the terminal has the following be havior f the 700 Color Computer is on charge the dock switch remains switched to COM B f the 700 Color Computer is off charge the dock switch switches to COM A and remain in this position until the 700 Color Computer re sumes charge LES settings 115 Q Utilities You can switch a dock between COM A a phone jack For a modem and COM B Select 8 Switch to COM A MODEM C Switch to COM B SERIAL
94. external 4 Hiding your location from everyone except 911 CDMA radios 151 Highlighting text Microsoft Reader 95 I O controls NPCP driver 201 Identification configuration parameter contact 359 location 361 name 360 IDNA IDNATarget 244 ManifestName 244 Image dimension configuration parameter 340 Imager beeper functions not available beeper frequency 335 good read beep duration 337 good read beeps 336 beeper LED parameters beeper 333 control panel appet data collection 338 data collection parameters 1D OmniDir decode enable 342 aimer LED duration 338 datamatrix 322 image dimension 340 416 lighting mode 341 maxicode 323 QR code 321 sticky aimer duration 339 settings 215 supported beeper functions 332 functions 338 symbologies 303 symbologies not available CIP 128 French Pharmaceutical 310 Code 11 320 Code 128 FNCI character 311 EAN 128 C1 310 Macro PDF 314 Matrix 2 of 5 318 micro PDF417 316 Telepen 319 symbology user IDs not available Codabar 325 Code 11 329 Code 128 325 Code 39 325 Code 93 326 EAN 13 328 EAN 8 328 Interleaved 2 of 5 326 Matrix 2 of 5 328 MSI 326 PDF417 326 Plessey 327 Standard 2 of 5 327 Telepen 328 UPC A 327 UPC E 327 vibrator enabling 22 IMAP4 Folder behavior connected to e mail server 78 Inbox accounts 79 composing sending messages 81 connecting to a mail server 79 downloading messages from server 80 getting connected 1
95. file to transfer Press and hold on the file for a pop up menu then select Beam File Cut Copy Rename Delete Send via E mail Beam File The system searches for a list of Bluetooth devices that will accept a con nection from your unit When the list is complete tap on a device to which to send the file Note in some cases the user of the target device has to accept the file before it is transmitted A EM o L1 Quote from pwi To beam select a device Q Infrared Align ports PK80 4802001 Tap to send 3 008037218216 Tap to send 3 PK80 4892987 Tap to send 3 PK80 4802686 Tap to send 008037218d37 Tap to send 008037218500 Tap to send amp Searching f 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 193 Chapter 4 Network Support AutolP DHCP A 194 Automatic Private IP Addressing AutoIP is enabled by default in Windows Mobile 2003 To remain compatible with other versions of Pocket PC this setting needs to be enabled You can configure the registry settings in the following to set the required AutoIP DHCP behavior e For Ethernet HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Comm LAN9001 TcpIp e Fot 802 11 HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Comm NETWLAN1 TcpIp Other registry keys that can modify the behavior of AutoIP are as follows You can find the appropriate settings and behavior of each of these keys in Microsoft Help e Autolnterval AutoMask AutoSubnet e AutolP AutoSeed When a TCP IP
96. following are authentication and threshold parameters for traps Note that these are listed in the order of their appearance within the Traps tab Authentication Determines whether to send authentication traps When trap authentica tion is enabled an authentication trap is sent if an SNMP packet is re ceived by the master agent with an invalid community string Action Tap the Authentication parameter then select an option to change this parameter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 10 5 2 2 0 Options 1 On default 2 Off Pd Enos SNMP Authentication lt On gt Threshold 102 Change Authentication Setting E On off Security Traps 1denttfication mj 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 357 Appendix A 358 Configurable Settings Threshold Determines the maximum number of traps per second that the master agent generates If the threshold is reached the trap will not be sent Action Tap the Threshold parameter then enter a threshold value to change this parameter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 10 5 2 3 0 Options Any positive integer value Default is 10 Settings css Q SNMP gt Authentication On Threshold lt 10 gt B Threshold Setting Ej Security Traps Identification m 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Identification a To access the settin
97. following illustration U PF Start E gt d 12 48 Monday February 21 2005 Tap here to set owner information a ho upcoming appointments No unread messa ges ho tasks 802 11 CF CORE Module The 802 11 CF CORE module displays helpful information about the 802 11b or 802 11b g radio option built into your 760 or 761 Computer Note that you can configure the 802 11b or 802 11b g radio module from this CORE application Select Configure gt Configure Intermec 802 11 CF from the bottom menu bar to access the Profile Wizard application See Appendix A Configurable Settings for information about this ap plication via the Wireless Network control panel applet General Below are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information pro vided via the General tab Note that the information is listed alphabetically Adapter MAC Identifies the MAC address for this 802 11b or 802 11b g adapter Antenna Identifies the antenna used with the 802 11b or 802 11b g radio Primary Secondary or Di versity AP Mac Identifies the MAC address of the access point to which this 760 Computer is connected Connected to Reports the connection status and to which SSID this 760 Computer is attached or Scanning Encryption or Encryption reports the encryption mode and the association mode in parentheses See page 375 Keys Absent for information about WEP encryption Keys Absent reports the association mode
98. ges Beis Es 346 Ed riada mer De ts ara err re eae A 348 G de PAGE AFF 349 Intermec Settings Control Panel Applet nl da fies Kee ebat Matin e eges 350 SNMP Control Panel Applet ooo toed uta A Erico dde br eta 351 Securty oou aec eU C ens dead thea a Vut S RR Sam EUR Feci n nee et wa 352 Read Only Community Xo ese x xb RC NS Rex RR UE RES 352 Read Write Community oh eh eios xa Ren RASS EO e do e eee 353 Read En ryption sust it i n il 354 Write Encryption c ceo anita a ls a Iob beoe e asaya 355 e Key A O a ora sine osha ies Urt tiv 356 TAPS e Mc c cL 357 PITH SDM GAM oneee r aee es da kt gate Od ista ala e utut des 357 A heeshald suse eco dme E ENE a e qe d 358 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Xv Contents SUI RETE esie i a EE E TT T LT OE 359 CONTACT a been 359 INI o ineo e dal hod o PRODR Comal At dcs d eo ea P E hA m pna 360 Location AAA eos eco cote e eine uy e E e ean yk eif ledio Rl aes 361 Unit Information Control Panel Applet 43 wale bind iaa nites ca 4 04 abd elect 362 po octo pra deta won el MS a a At ee ad ea Raat lata ech da 362 B3tteby Statis Viethen eh o E ate DX Mo UE x ptis td LE cet meen AL 363 A PEDE REOR US EG Erde dede edt Ada SA oA MAR ADR 364 Utilities Control Panel Applet cibi eoa ECCE i etrn Peeled E PE ES 366 Dock SIE dub pati nous deh doch Sit ed iid doni dieto Bieter dedi hte d 366 Bess Save o cesa ate See pa a BIL LAE S ted pui P tbi Gau 367 RC COME A p
99. in Outlook on your desktop while notes con taining written text or drawings appear in the device format In addition all notes in the Notes group in Outlook on the desktop appear in Notes on the device To synchronize your notes as files in ActiveSync select the Files informa tion type for synchronization and clear the Notes information type When you select Files the My Documents folder for the 700 Color Computer is created on your desktop All PWI files placed in the My Documents fold er on your device and all DOC files placed in the My Documents folder for the 700 Color Computer on your desktop are synchronized Password protected files cannot be synchronized ActiveSync converts documents during synchronization For more infor mation on synchronization or file conversion see ActiveSync Help on the desktop Note When you delete or change an item on either your desktop or 700 Color Computer the item is changed or deleted in the other location the next time you synchronize Note If you synchronize your notes using file synchronization and then later decide to use notes synchronization all of your notes are synchro nized with Outlook on your desktop and no longer store in the My Docu ments folder for the 700 Color Computer 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Inbox Sending and Receiving E mail Messages To switch to Inbox on your 700 Color Computer tap Start gt Inbox
100. in parentheses See page 375 for information about WPA encryption ESS Identifies the type of network to which you are attached either an ESS Extended Service Set 802 11 Station or Ad hoc 138 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Provides the IP address which can be set as either DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol or statically Indicates the speed at which a connection is made the data rate of the last transmitted packet Indicates the power status of this 802 11b profile such as CAM Auto or PSP Identifies the radio signal strength in dBm of signals coming from an access point Shows the transmit power in milliwatts at which transmissions are made History This displays an active history of this radio module s connection quality History Friendly Indicator This indicates the general quality of the 802 11b or 802 11b g connection amp Three filled dots indicates the best quality two filled dots dictates good quality one filled dot is of fair quality and when all three dots are empty the quality is considered poor When this icon appears with a red line the radio is disconnected or nearly so from the access point 9 Core PE ETE X 9 core e qg 1255 9 Intermec 802 11 CF Attach Roam Cnt 1 ESS ARS Driver Name PRISMNDS1 Scanlist Disabled 802 11 Station Primary Adapter MAC AP Mac 00 02 b3 21 9a d9 00 00 00 00 00 00 Sc
101. indicators for such things as recurring ap pointments appointments with notes and appointments with remind ers Tap and hold an icon to see its name f you are having trouble reading the calendar select Use large font You may see less appointment information EF Calendar Pear 7 19 ok Options ist day of week Week view L Show half hour slots L Show week numbers Use large font Set reminders for new items 15 minute s x Ope e Tap this to view larger text Show icons Send meeting requests via Tap to indicate private Tap to indicate attendees Tap to indicate locations Tap to indicate notes Tap to indicate recurrences Tap to indicate reminders 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 63 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Contacts Tracking Friends and Colleagues 64 tg Contacts To switch to Contacts on the 700 Color Computer tap Start gt Contacts Contacts maintains a list of your friends and colleagues so that you can easily find the information you are looking for whether you are at home or on the road You can enter both personal and business information If you use Microsoft Outlook on your desktop you can synchronize contacts between your 700 Color Computer and your desktop Select the category of contacts you want displayed in the list EF Contacts All Contacts Tap and enter part of aname Fab cde foh ijk Imn eba rst uvw x
102. information Red 760 Computers CDMA non Sprint networks and GSM GPRS US Canada White 760 Computers GSM GPRS US Canada and CDMA Sprint networks Blue 760 761 Computers GSM GPRS International MC45 WAN radios No Color 761 Computers CDMA and GSM GPRS US Canada MC46 WAN radios Network Adapters Your 700 Color Computer can have up to three radios installed The de fault network adapter or radio is dependent on what radios are installed in your 700 Color Computer With the boot menu you can specify 802 11 Ethernet or No Net working to load onto your 700 Color Computer when a cold boot is per formed When a warm boot is performed the 700 Color Computer loads the network set just prior to the warm boot The 730 Computer only has the 802 11b radio and wireless printing It does not have an external antenna Other radios are not supported See the Developer s Support web site for the latest information on network adapt ers for your unit 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 133 Chapter 4 Network Support Ethernet Communications 740 741 750 751 760 761 Computers Follow the steps below to start Ethernet communications on the 700 Color Computer If your system does not contain an 802 11b or 802 11b g radio then Ethernet networking using DHCP is selected as the default When Built in Ethernet is selected from the NDISTRAY pop up menu the Network Driver I
103. is 479 Settings gis QD Data Collection B Image Dimension 000639000479 gt Left position lt Not supported POT Right position Mot supported Top position 0 Bottom position 479 Beeper LED Imager Virtual Wedge ale New Tools Accounts mj 340 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Lighting Mode The Lighting Mode sets the lighting mode of the imager When set to LED Priority the imager depends more on ambient lighting to illumi nate the bar code for reading When set to Aperture Priority the imager uses its built in LED to illuminate the bar code for reading Note that this is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Color Computer Action Tap the Lighting Mode parameter then select an option to change this parameter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 3 1 1 23 1 Options 0 LED Priority default 1 Aperture Priority Data Collection i Aimer LED Duration msecs E Sticky Aimer Duration msecs lt 1000 gt Image Dimension 000639000479 gt Lighting Made lt LED Priority gt 1D OmniDir Decode Enable Mot Available Change Lighting Mode Setting LED Priority D Aperture Friority Beeper LED Imager Virtual Wedge ale New Tools Accounts 1 mlj 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 341 Appendix A 342 Configurable Settings 1
104. labels may be truncated For PDF417 labels of more than 128 characters you can develop an application that bypasses the key pad buffer Action Tap the PDF417 parameter then select an option to change this parame ter setting Tap to access either the Macro PDF options parameter or the Micro PDF417 parameter SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 1 1 17 1 Options 0 Not active 1 Active default AY settings Enas Q Data Collection EXPDF 417 Not active gt E Macro PDF options lt 000000000 gt B Micro PDF 417 lt 00 gt ES Interleaved 2 of 5 lt O0000600000000 amp Matrix 2 of 5 lt 01006 gt AAA ul Change PDF 417 Setting e Mot active O Active Symbologies 5ymbology Options Beepe 4 gt i This illustration is from a 700 Color Computer using a laser scanner Macro PDF options Macro PDF is used when a long message requires more than one PDF417 label Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer Select Buffered to store a multi label PDF417 message in the Sabre buffer thus transmitting the entire message when all labels are read 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Select Unbuffered for multi label PDF417 messages that are too long for the Sabre buffer memory overflow Each part of the PDF417 label is transmitted separately and the host application must then assemble the messag
105. mark next to the writing area Tap for assistance E New Tools E Using Transcriber With Transcriber you can write anywhere on the screen using the stylus just as you would on paper Unlike Letter Recognizer and Block Recogniz er you can write a sentence or more of information Then pause and let Transcriber change the written characters to typed characters E Tap the input panel arrow then tap Transcriber Tap ok then write any where on the screen For specific instructions on using Transcriber with Transcriber open tap the question mark in the lower right hand corner of the screen e cw X Tap for assistance New Tools Selecting Typed Text If you want to edit or format typed text you must select it first Drag the stylus across the text you want to select You can cut copy and paste text by tapping and holding the selected words and then tapping an editing command on the pop up menu or by tapping the command on the Edit menu 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 37 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Writing on the Screen In any program that accepts writing such as the Notes program and in the Notes tab in Calendar Contacts and Tasks you can use your stylus to write directly on the screen Write the way you do on paper You can edit and format what you have written and convert the information to text at a later time Tap the Pen icon to switch to writing mode This acti
106. minutes 0000 9999 1999 1 12 6 Day 1 31 1 Hour 0 23 0 Minute 0 59 00 Second 0 59 00 Enables or disables the keypad clicks The 700 Color 0 Disable clicks Computer emits a click each time you press a key or Enable soft key clicks decode a row of a two dimensional symbology 2 Enable loud key clicks default Year Month Date Time Sets the current date and time 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 393 Appendix A Configurable Settings Using Reader Commands After the 700 Color Computer is connected to your network you can send the 700 Color Computer a reader command from an application to perform a task such as changing the time and date Some reader com mands temporarily override the configuration settings and some change the configuration settings Change Configuration The Change Configuration command must precede any configuration command If you enter a valid string the 700 Color Computer configura tion is modified and the computer emits a high beep To send the Change Configuration command through the network use the command syntax where command is the two letter command syntax for the configu ration command followed by the value to be set for that command You can also make changes to several different commands by using the command command n syntax There are seven configuration command settings that can be changed in this way See each command for information on r
107. name is entered and cannot be changed From Connects to select to what your network is to connect If you select Work you can do a vpn connection or use proxy servers If you select The Internet you can connect directly to the internet To connect to an ad hoc connection select This is a device to device ad hoc connection Configure Wireless Network Network name Management Connects to wok v O This is a device bo dewice ad hoc connection General Network Key Ej 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 109 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 4 Tap the Network Key tab then do the following To Disable Authentication a Set Authentication to either Open if WEP keys are not required or Shared when WEP keys are required for association b Set Data Encryption to Disabled cor Network Authentication Authentication Data Encryption Disabled The Key is provided For me automatically Metwork key FORSSK IOI ROK oo Key index General Network Key e021 Ej To Enable WEP Encryption a Set Authentication to either Open if WEP keys are not required or Shared when WEP keys are required for association b Set Data Encryption to WEP To change the network key clear The Key is provided for me auto matically box then enter the new Network key and select the ap propriate Key index Eig settings dins o k
108. numbers such as a 9 to dial from an office complex or hotel you must use additional dialing rules or change dialing pat terns See Create Dialing Rules via your online help for information a In the Country Region box enter the appropriate code when dial ing internationally For more information contact an operator at your local phone company b In the Area code box enter the area code Area codes are not need ed in all countries 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Enter the main phone number then tap Next to continue Company Connection Q Country Region code Area code Phone number a 9s ss93 es Cine Cee 4 Enter the user name password and domain if provided by an ISP or your network administrator If a domain name was not provided try the connection without entering a domain name then tap Finish Pa Settings Company Connection 9o Password Domain If provided by I5P or network administrator mj 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 107 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 108 ES TS Connections Note The following information applies when you have Wireless 802 11 selected via the NDISTRAY pop up menu see page 134 Creating a Wireless Network Connection Microsoft Corporation s wireless network configuration tool is called Wireless Zero Config Interme
109. one of these appears Registered on home network Radio module is registered on its home network Registered on roamed network Radio module registered on another service provider s network Radio Not Registered There is no network within range of this radio module Displays the Received Signal Strength Indicator RSSI frequency or lists Unavailable if there is no signal or the signal cannot be retrieved from the radio module Indicates whether serial communications passed Serial com OK or failed Serial com FAIL in its last transaction A status of Serial com FAIL typically indicates that the 760 Computer is unable to establish communication with the radio module installed within History This displays an active history of this radio module s connection quality Historv 142 Friendly Indicator Usually indicates the signal strength for this radio module Three filled dots indicate a high quality or strong signal Three empty dots indicate that the signal is out of range or there is no signal detected 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Firmware Rev IMEI IMSI Manufacturer Model Net Provider RSSI SIM Status 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 4 Network Support oe die34 XO CDMA 1XRTT WAN Toni eae Manufacturer Sierra Wireless m Model 56555 Module Serial Status Tx 0 Rx O Serial com OK ESN
110. reverse of INSTALL INIT here return codeUNINSTALL INIT CONTINUE codeUNINSTALL EXIT Uninstall_Exit HWND hwndParent TODO Perform the reverse of INSTALL EXIT here return codeUNINSTALL EXIT DONE The system software looks for the following directory structure and files on the installed media card whether it be an SD card or CF card or embedded flash file system No other folders need exist 2577 autorun exe 2577 autorun dat 2577 autocab exe 2577 autocab dat cabfiles cab Creating CAB Files with CAB Wizard After you create the INF file and the optional SETUP DLL file use the CAB Wizard to create the CAB file The command line syntax for the CAB Wizard is as follows cabwiz exe inf_file dest dest_directory err error_file cpu cpu_type cpu_type A batch file located in lt program gt directory with the following com mands works well cabwiz exe c appsoft lt program gt lt inf_file_name gt cd appsoft lt program gt inf file The SETUP INF file path dest_directory The destination directory for the CAB files If no directory is specified the CAB files are created in the inf_file directory error_file The file name for a log file that contains all warnings and errors that are encountered when the CAB files are compiled If no file name is specified errors are displayed in message boxes If a file name is used the CAB Wizard runs without the user
111. set your own ASCII character to identify Code 11 bar code data Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer Action Tap to expand the Symbology ID parameter select the Code 11 user ID parameter then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 4 1 16 1 Options x where x is a single ASCII character Default is asterisk 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 329 Appendix A 330 Configurable Settings Prefix Prepends a string of up to 20 ASCII characters to all scanned data Action Tap the Prefix parameter then enter a prefix value to change this parame ter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 4 1 29 1 Options Acceptable values are up to 20 ASCII characters Embedded null lt NUL gt characters are not allowed Default is no characters disabled Settings 46121 Q Data Collection E Symbology ID lt Disable gt i Suffix lt gt Change Prefix Setting Symbologies 5ymbology Options Beepel 4 gt New Tools Accounts 1 mj 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Suffix Appends a string of up to 20 ASCII characters to all scanned data Action Tap the Suffix parameter then enter a suffix value to change this parame ter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 4 1 30 1 Options Acceptable values are up to 20
112. tap Tools gt Go To and then type a refer ence that is in the hidden column Then tap Format gt Column gt Un hide For more information on using Pocket Excel tap Start gt Help gt Pocket Excel to see Pocket Excel Help MSN Messenger on your 700 Color Computer provides the same chat environment as MSN Messenger on your desktop These features include Seeing who is online Sending and receiving instant messages Having an instant message conversation with a group of contacts Telling contacts that you are unavailable Blocking contacts from seeing your status or sending you messages To use MSN Messenger you need a Microsoft Passport account or a Microsoft Exchange e mail account that your employer provides Once you have one of these accounts do the following 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 87 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 88 ES 3 MSN Messenger 1 Set up a connection on your 700 Color Computer such as a modem or wireless connection that enables you to connect to the Internet 2 Set up an account in MSN Messenger 3 Sign in to MSN Messenger Note To set up a free Hotmail account go to http www hotmail com To set up a Microsoft Passport account go to http www passport com To set up an Exchange account see your network administrator For more information on using MSN Messenger tap Start gt Help gt MSN Messenger to see MSN Messenger Help To switch to MSN Me
113. telecommunications components and equipment Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Com puter Action Tap to expand the Code 11 parameter select the setting to be changed then tap an option to change this setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 1 1 26 1 Options Decoding Not active default Active Check digit verification 1 digit default 2 digits Check digit transmit Disable Enable default Emm cis QQ Data Collection H Format lt ASCII gt amp Code 11 011 Decoding lt Not active gt Check digit verification 1 digit gt Check digit transmit lt Enable gt Symbologies Symbology Options Beepel 4 gt mj 320 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings QR Code QR Code Quick Response Code is a two dimensional matrix symbology containing dark and light square data modules It has position detection patterns on three of its four corners and features direct encodation of the Japanese Kana Kanji character set It can encode up to 2509 numeric or 1520 alphanumeric characters and offers three levels of error detection Note that this is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Col or Computer or if you are using a 730 Computer Action Tap to expand the QR Code parameter select the setting to be changed then tap an option to change this setting or select an option fr
114. that indicates if there is a diversity antenna installed TRUE indicates that it is installed FALSE indicates that it is not installed ITC NVPARM WAN RI This IOCTL reads the state of the WAN ring indicator flag A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by pOutBuffer that indicates the polarity of the WAN RI signal TRUE indicates active high FALSE indicates active low 252 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 7 Programming ID Field Values continued ITC_NVPARM_RTC_RESTORE This IOCTL reads the state of the real time clock restore flag ABOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by pOutBuffer TRUE indicates that the RTC is restored upon a cold boot FALSE indicates that the RTC is not restored ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_DATACOLLECTION_SW This IOCTL reads the state of the data collection software enabled flag A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointer to by pOutBuffer that indicates the data collection software is to install at boot time FALSE indicates the data collection software should not install ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_DATACOLLECTION_HW This IOCTL reads the data collection hardware flags A BYTE is returned in the buffer pointer to by pOutBuffer that indicates the type of data collection hardware installed The maximum possible value returned is ITC DEVID SCANHW MAX e ITC DEVID SCANHW NONE No scanner hardware is installed e ITC DEVID OEM2D IMAGER OEM 2D imager is installed
115. the current service set WEP key is removed by the adapter ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN RemoveWEP ULONO else UINT RemoveWEP ULONG endif Helper Functions Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions ConfigureProfile If using the Intermec 802 11 Profile Management system you can pro gram the API to configure the radio to a specific profile by passing the profile name UINT ConfigureProfile TCHAR Pointer to a character array that contains the profile name This should be null terminated ERROR SUCCESS when successful ERR QUERY FAILED when the query failed or ERR CONNECT FAILED ifa connection with the radio failed Call this function with a pointer to a null terminated TCHAR array that contains the name of the profile you wish to configure This function reads profile data from the profile manager sets that profile as the default active profile and configures the radio appropriately If needed the supplicant and any other related services are automatically started and stopped ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN ConfigureProfile TCHAR else UINT ConfigureProfile TCHAR fendif 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 283 Chapter 7 Programming Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions
116. the network AD BV 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 345 Appendix A Configurable Settings Postamble Sets the postamble that is appended to any data you scan with the 700 Color Computer Common postambles include cursor controls such as tabs or carriage return line feeds Action Tap the Postamble parameter then enter a postamble value to change this parameter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 2 1 1 4 1 Syntax AEdata where data is any acceptable values up to 31 ASCII characters Embedded null lt NUL gt characters are not allowed Below are the non printing characters you can use for Virtual Wedge Postambles Alert bell Backspace Form Feed New line line feed Carriage return Horizontal tab default Vertical tab nnnn is up to four HEX digits Use leading zeros to fill out to four digits to ensure proper conversion For example to prepend the character M to scanned data set the Preamble to either 1 M or 2 x004D where 4D is the HEX equivalent for an uppercase M Settings Fae ERTER Ok Data Collection Virtual wedge lt Enable gt E Preamble lt gt Grid lt gt Code page lt 1252 gt Change Postamble Setting E i Beeper LED Virtual Wedge KIG New Tools Accounts jl ES mlj 346 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings 4 Note When you enter the AE command without data the postamble is disabled If
117. transfers files over TCP IP net works The FTPDCE EXE program is a version that does not display a window but can run in the background FTPDCE is the Internet File Transfer Protocol FTP server process The server can be invoked from an application or command line Besides ser vicing FTP client requests the FTP Server also sends a network an nouncement to notify prospective clients of server availability Remarks The FTP Server currently supports the following FTP requests Changes to the parent directory of the current working directory Changes working directory Deletes a file Gives help information This FTP request is the same as the Is lgA command Gives list files in a directory Makes a directory Always Uses Binary Specifies data transfer mode Not supported Gives a name list of files in directory this FTP request is the same as the s command Does nothing Specifies a password Prints the current working directory Terminates session Retrieves a file Removes a directory Specifies rename from file name Specifies rename to file name Stores a file Shows the operating system type of server system Binary transfers only Specifies the data transfer type with the Type parameter Specifies user name Not Normally Used Changes the parent directory of the current working directory Not Normally Used Changes the current directory Not Normally Used Creates a directory Not Nor
118. using a RAS Remote Access Server account Before you can create this modem connection your network administrator needs to set up a RAS account for you Your network ad ministrator may also give you Virtual Private Network VPN settings Get a dial up access telephone number a user name and a password from your network administrator If your 700 Color Computer does not have access to a mobile phone network insert your 700 Color Computer into a modem dock Note To change modem connection settings in My Work Network tap Manage existing connections Select the desired modem connection tap Edit and follow the instructions on the screen To view additional information for any screen in the wizard or while changing settings tap the Help icon 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Creating a Modem Connection to Work 8 1 Tap Start gt Settings gt the Connections tab gt the Connections icon Tap Add a new modem connection beneath My Work Network to ini Connections tiate this procedure Connections o To set up ar change connection information tap one of the Following links My ISP Add a new modem connection My Work Network Add a new modem connection Add a new YPN server connection Set up my proxy server Ej 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 105 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 106 2 Enter a name for the connection such as Company Conn
119. with CDMA Radios With the WAN radio module installed in your 761 Computer you can send and receive telephone calls Use the speaker on the back of the com puter as your earpiece and use the connector on the bottom of the com puter for your mouthpiece Data Provisioning Sprint L4 Note If you wish to do this activation another time tap Cancel to close this wizard then tap Yes Exit Activation Wizard Your wireless device may not be activated yet Are you sure you want to exit the Activation Wizard It is necessary to initiate activation before using your Microsoft Phone ap plication Below are the instructions 1 Tap Start Programs the Phone desktop icon or tap Start Phone from the Today screen to access the application which processes your Phone phone calls Tap the Close button in the upper right corner of this ap plication to close 2 From the Phone application tap Tools Activation Wizard 3 Have your activation code phone number MDN and MSID infor mation ready before you tap Next to continue You can get this infor mation from your network provider Your PCS wireless device must be activated For activation you will need to provide an Activation Code Phone Number MDN and MSID information 144 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 4 Network Support 4 Enter your 6 digit activation code then tap Next to continue 9 start vq 46533 D Please enter yo
120. xiii Contents Helper EUTIGHOBS e acea cite d tonite inis prie Ake abad Ai oou detect Mok dead sage baie seed aay 283 Contigntebroflel sis acusa mre Donc ate dyed abo ca Ue oda e Sobek Banks eee d 283 Enable Zero Config cs seine sma asss aeii opt ec dogs d a E oa ect ob 284 isZeroContig Enabled IS cio ate Ca ipe E ooa d e ER bcn 284 isOrinoco rd eee bes e Vili Bake le lee em deb test 284 isSupplicantRunning 15 32 19 64 58004 ei branch ne Ale Gye scaleable maet ated Dea 285 StartScanList 5 ood eV ITb ee a em oe ei bee eee 285 StertSupplican s iat das Spe p RUP NAE ada ed 285 StopSupplicant ios pices cae ome Dex us UNE FRE S EIQUE es 286 iSDHGPEnabled eno rw rev p ET PUES qd 286 R new DHCP 22er e ehe ete ehe i emen 286 GetCurrentDriverName ccc ccc as 287 ResetRadioToSystemSave uu qoe Sie eee ene ome cake CE etos 287 EnablesappLoss mirala acini pad 287 Switch Packet rivers 1 et atem aa yan 288 Deprecated EHHOHODS ut ena sua bores aver a wpe M Uus vont Aa gai Fc CN act d 288 Not AS Bae tpud cA ao SD LI rA BE 289 NLEDGe tDevicelrifo i owostuktendb rmt end EA OPER Se es CHOSE TRE 290 NEEDS tD vice cupo ai ised BE eee per ed equ 290 RebonpE o sade e Os NON 291 LOCTLAHAL REBOOT iaa r ee erede Kee eese eec e E eU wie SUR TAN 291 IOCTLZFIAL COLDDOOT ats esas See race be recs eee EET E Facer a 291 IOCTL HAL WARMBOO T AAA NA 291 Remapping th Keypad 25 e A RN e eda E Sud pelis Se dafs 299 Unshifted Pline po ee Cua oe MM
121. you want to use quotation marks or the following combina tions of characters as part of the appended data separate those characters from the AE command with quotes If you do not use quotes as described here the 700 Color Computer interprets the characters as another config uration command AD AE AF KC BV EX DF Example To use the two character string BV as a postamble scan this command as a Code 39 label or send this command through the network AE Bv 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 347 Appendix A 348 Configurable Settings Grid Sets the virtual wedge grid which filters the data coming from this 700 Color Computer The data server supports data filtering which allows you to selectively send scanned data The virtual wedge grid is similar to the format argument of the C Runtime Library scan function Action Tap the Grid parameter then enter a grid value to change this parameter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 2 1 1 5 1 Syntax AF lt symID gt filter expression gt editing expression where e lt symiD gt The AIM symbology ID optional e filter expression Any character string that includes valid filter expression values See the user manual provided with your resouce kit via the IDL for a list of val id filter expression values editing expression Any character string that includes valid editing expression values See the user manual provided with yo
122. zero Return Values None IOCTL HAL COLDBOOT Causes the system to perform a cold boot The object store is cleared Usage Zinclude oemioctl h Syntax BOOL KernelloControl IOCTL HAL COLDBOOT LPVOID lpInBuf DWORD nInBufSize LPVOID lpOutBuf DWORD nOutBufSize LPDWORD lpBytesReturned Parameters IpInBuf Should be set to NULL IpInBufSize Should be set to zero IpOutBuf Should be NULL nOutBufSize Should be zero Return Values None 260 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL HAL GET RESET INFO This IOCTL code allows software to check the type of the most recent reset Usage Zinclude oemioctl h Syntax BOOL KernelloControl IOCTL HAL GET RESET INFO LPVOID lpInBuf DWORD nInBufSize LPVOID lpOutBuf DWORD nOutBufSize LPDWORD lpBytesReturned Parameters IpInBuf Should be set to NULL IpInBufSize Should be set to zero IpOutBuf Must point to a HAL_RESET_INFO structure See sample below nOutBufSize The size of HAL_RESET_INFO in bytes IpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned by the function Return Values Returns TRUE if function succeeds Returns FALSE if the function fails GetLastError may be used to get the extended error value Sample typedef struct DWORD ResetReason most recent reset typ DWORD ObjectStoreS
123. 0 5 844 222 5 854 478 5 862 267 5 869 840 5 873 070 5 877 486 5 878 395 5 883 492 5 883 493 5 886 338 5 889 386 5 895 906 5 898 162 5 902 987 5 902 988 5 912 452 5 923 022 5 936 224 5 949 056 5 969 321 5 969 326 5 969 328 5 979 768 5 986 435 5 987 192 5 992 750 6 003 775 6 012 640 6 016 960 6 018 597 6 024 289 6 034 379 6 036 093 6 039 252 6 064 763 6 075 340 6 095 422 6 097 839 6 102 289 6 102 295 6 109 528 6 119 941 6 128 414 6 138 915 6 149 061 6 149 063 6 152 370 6 155 490 6 158 661 6 164 542 6 164 545 6 173 893 6 195 053 6 234 393 6 234 395 6 244 512 6 249 008 6 328 214 6 330 975 6 345 765 6 356 949 6 367 699 6 375 075 6 375 076 6 431 451 6 435 411 6 484 944 6 488 209 6 497 368 6 532 152 6 538 413 6 539 422 6 621 942 6 641 046 6 681 994 6 687 403 6 688 523 6 732 930 Des 417445 Docking Station Device 5 052 943 5 195 183 5 317 691 5 331 580 5 544 010 5 644 471 There may be other U S and foreign patents pending 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual xxiii Before You Begin xxiv 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 7 Introduction This chapter introduces the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer devel oped by Intermec Technologies Corporation to enhance wireless connec tivity needs This chapter contains hardware and software configuration information to assist you in making the most out of your 700 Color Computer Note
124. 00 managing e mail messages and folders 78 Pocket Outlook 77 Start menu icon 31 synchronizing e mail messages 77 using My Text 43 INF files creating 224 Input Mixing Audio control panel applet 8 Input panel block recognizer 36 keyboard 35 letter recognizer 37 Pocket Word 83 selecting typed text 37 transcriber 37 Windows Mobile 32 word suggestions 35 Installation functions SETUP DLL 236 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Installing applications using a storage card 122 using CompactFlash cards 122 using Secure Digital cards 123 with ActiveSync 121 with FTP Server 122 Installing drivers DTR 204 NPCP 199 Instant messaging 87 Integrated scanners See Internal scanners Interface specifications ETSI GSM 07 0x 184 Interleaved 2 of 5 configuration parameter 317 user ID 326 Intermec part numbers 24 Intermec settings 302 350 beeper volume 10 vibrator 23 INTERMEC_PACKET_DRIVER SwitchPacketDriver 288 Internal scanners configuring 210 specifications 25 supported symbologies 212 Internet explorer software build version 20 Windows Mobile 2003 edition 28 Internet Service Provider See ISP IOCTL_NPCP_BIND 201 IOCTL_NPCP_CANCEL 201 IOCTL_NPCP_CLOSE 201 IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR 201 IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH 201 IP address replicating registry settings 123 IrDA printing 198 ISP connecting to via Windows Mobile 100 creating a modem connection 100 Pocket Internet E
125. 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 07 05 01 05 03 05 02 05 VkeyAlpha hex 00 00 0B8 05 02 03 C1 07 04 03 BE 00 47 00 00 00 25 00 00 00 08 00 03 02 00 00 1B 00 28 00 02 02 50 00 01 02 00 00 26 00 27 00 41 00 54 00 20 00 4A 00 00 00 01 03 44 00 57 00 0D 00 4D 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 07 05 01 05 03 05 02 05 298 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual A Configurable Settings This appendix contains information about the Data Collection Intermec Settings SNMP Unit Information Utilities and Wireless Network con trol panel applets that may be on the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer x Note 700 Color pertains to 740 741 750 751 760 and 761 Com puters unless otherwise noted SNMP Intermec Settings and Data Collection settings that can appear under Settings are dependent on what hardware configuration is done for each 700 Color Computer at the time of shipment These settings current ly only appear if a scanner or an imager option is present Likewise other control panel applets that are specifically related to the 802 11b or 802 11b g radio module will appear when a 802 11b or 802
126. 00 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 175 Chapter 4 Network Support 176 Watcher Using Sprint Watcher Before you start using the Sprint Watcher application make sure you match the correct ESN with each 760 Computer and that you have at least 80 CDMA signal strength The ESN that you give to your provider is either on the box or on a label inside the battery compartment The label would include the ESN term and a bar code along with the serial number 1 Tap Start Programs the Watcher icon or tap the Watcher icon from the NDISTRAY via the Today screen circled in the following illustra tion to launch the SB555 Watcher program Start en EDU j Monday February 21 2005 Tap here to set owner information E Mo upcoming appointments Mo unread mes No tasks 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 4 Network Support 2 If your 760 Computer was not previously activated Watcher automati cally starts the Activation Wizard Otherwise select Manual Activation to continue PE TES E Cancel Please select one of the following options SB555 Watcher 8 Manual Speak with a Customer Activation Care representative using a standard phone Also requires the manual input of certain items 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 177 Chapter 4 Network Support 178 3 Enter the MSL or lock code received from Sprint Egisesss watcher TN
127. 2 Activated YES CDMA WAN Monitor General Chapter 4 Network Support E 1258 E9 CDMA 1XRTT WAN Manufacturer Sierra Wireless poe ES Model 58555 Module Sprint PCS Serial Status Tx O Rx 0 Network Serial com OK ESN 6301FD35 g IMSI MIN 9133146842 Registered on Phone Number MDN 9133146842 Current Channel Radio Temp 38 degrees C amp 3 1FD35 On Hardware Rev 010 Firmware Rev R2 0 0 135B RSSI 97 dem Firmware Type Sprint PCS un eO PRL version 10023 History General Details General Details CORE Modules Configure Ej CORE Modules Configure Ej CDMA WAN Monitor Details WAN Monitor Details Below are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information pro vided via the Details tab Most of this is similar to what is shown under the General tab Note that the information is listed alphabetically Lists the Electronic Serial Number ESN assigned to this radio module or Unavailable if a num ber cannot be read from the radio This number is required for activation You must provide this number to your service provider such as Sprint Verizon Bell Mobility etc for activation Note that both the hex version and the decimal version of your ESN is provided Identifies the firmware version if available Identifies the type of firmware installed in the WAN radio module It should match the carrier you are using as your networ
128. 2 11 radio module 374 Cisco compatible extension specifications 24 Clock restore real time after cold boot 367 setting date and time 395 Windows Mobile settings 45 Closing drivers NPCP 200 Codabar configuration parameter 306 user ID 325 Code 11 configuration parameter 320 user ID 329 Code 128 configuration parameter 309 FNCI character 311 user ID 325 Code 39 configuration parameter 304 user ID 325 Code 93 configuration parameter 308 length 308 user ID 326 Code Division Multiple Access See CDMA IxRTT Cold boot performing 19 COM A modem position 366 COM B serial position 366 COM port configuration 214 wedge settings 214 COMI NPCP parameter 199 COMI port 198 Comm port wedge disabling 214 enabling 213 error messages 214 limitations 216 settings 214 unit information control panel 364 Command line syntax AutoCab 130 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Common Object Resource Environment See CORE Communications DTR 205 NPCP 202 CompactFlash cards card support 21 installing applications 122 migrating applications 128 packaging an application 120 specifications 25 Computer shutdown 6 Configuration parameters 1D OmniDir decode enable 342 aimer LED duration 338 automatic shutoff 393 backlight timeout 393 beeper 333 frequency 335 volume 334 codabar 306 user ID 325 code 11 320 user ID 329 code 128 309 FNCI character 311 user ID 325 code 39 304 u
129. 2003 is on your unit gt Internet Explorer 1 Select Start gt Internet Explorer gt the Intermec logo Intermec 2 Note the Software Build information displayed beneath the Version Information title 3 Internet Explorer e 42 12 37 DX fle windows 16_CEM htm pm A Intermec Foun 234 Internet Explorer i 9 33 e fle windaws i OEMhtm 2e Satermec Version Information Version Information Software Build v4 51 Premium Software Build v4 51 Phone CDMA Patent Information Patent Information This product is covered by the following This product is covered by the fallowing US patents US patents 4 455 523 5 410 141 5 740 266 4 553 081 5 425 051 5 790 536 4 709 202 5 469 947 5 805 807 4 737 702 5 488 575 5 862 171 4 455 523 5 410 141 5 740 366 4 553 081 5 425 051 5 790 536 4 709 202 5 469 947 5 805 807 4 737 702 5 488 575 5 862 171 730 740 750 760 Units 761 Units with CDMA 3 Tap the Close icon in the top right corner to exit the Internet Explorer 28 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Where to Find Information This chapter describes your 700 Color Computer hardware provides an overview of the programs on your 700 Color Computer and explains how to connect your 700 Color Computer to a desktop a network or the In ternet For instructions on setting up your 700 Color Computer and installing ActiveSync see the Quick Start Guid
130. 288 SetMixedCellMode 282 SetNetworkMode 281 SetPowerMode 281 SetRTSThreshold Deprecated 288 SetSSID 282 SetTXRate Deprecated 288 SHFullScreen 241 shortcut_list_section CEShortcuts shortcut_filename 233 shortcut_type_flag 233 target_file path 233 target_file_path 233 Signature Version 224 SIM cards protection hardware 254 protection software 254 software installed 254 SourceDiskFiles filename 229 SourceDiskNames CESignature 228 disk_ordinal 228 SourceDisksNames MIPS 229 SourceDisksNames SH3 229 StartScanList 285 StartSupplicant 285 StopSupplicant 286 string_key Strings 225 Strings string_key 225 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Index SwitchPacketDriver 288 SYSTEMINFO dwProcessorType 226 U UDP FTPDCE 245 UDP broadcasts IDNATarget parameter 244 UnsupportedPlatforms CEDevice 226 UUID 257 V Version CESignature 224 Provider 224 Signature 224 VersionMax CEDevice 226 VersionMin CEDevice 226 VN CLASS ASIC 252 VN CLASS BOOTSTRADP 252 VN CLASS KBD 252 Ww WAN radio IDs ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_NONE 253 ITC DEVID WANRADIO SIEMENS MC45 253 ITC DEVID WANRADIO SIEMENS MCA4G 253 ITC DEVID WANRADIO SIERRA 5B555 253 Warm boot IOCTL HAL REBOOT 263 IOCTL HAL WARMBOOT 260 Wireless TCP IP installations BlockSize parameter 243 WriteFile DTR printing 204 205 IrDA printing 198 NPCP printing 199 200 X Xsc
131. 28i a ado ad 309 DIGS C peus oc UE EMEND Ma pau Sk hs MEM Ee eee a Des 312 MSP T UR Reet ees tae Rc NOCH ETE d 313 PID PAD Foci ke A tte aou at aerae mu dte Son s 314 Interleaved 2 dl 3 ana eene taa re au ca BER At coc rp dona cn ve orca dra 317 MaR LOE MN Mn 318 Tele Be e r ente Deci O eyo SON 319 CORSE Ty arica res galas inane deus 320 ensem T 321 Data Matti i ceo ede EIE SU e a RITU DS RUE Ni e Ate eU a 322 MaxiCode pet T RUE MEETS 323 SyitibGlopy OPA cor Reet keen UE TCU RES OON PETS E 324 Symbols ID e cod eoo ore de ltd bad 324 luco NN T rre cc 330 A cider acetate pela Nog da atre ea PE Arp S ADR 331 Deeper LED qi eee rer PROC Ba QUE ORE REDE ASE a Rudd ue Bieta katte aad 332 Beeper vos eto e oL oec en ave a det eae eed 333 Peeper Voluts oed aeo iste m ciao td a 334 Beeper Frequency eee eee e n AE p RH hne ee RE 335 Good Reid Beeps 4355 c rade et saa muds sivas stole a Ds EA lazo 336 Good Read Beep Duration lt i easing Sen REDE UR Mees Se EHE DE 337 mage Favs rogue xor glo te ord Te RUE n bte SE RU T TE 338 Aimer LED Duration sasra EE DUE C RA AERE PE A oV eed AS 338 Sticky Aimer Duration a ce dota cep OR EEUU RO p PASE 339 Image Dimension a ON talea dead lp E oa Mta mud 340 Lighting Mode steed eae tee o rideo ia os 341 1D OmniDir Decode Enable vex spicy eeu ken oe rr ke eee d eR ET Yd 342 Virtual Wedges Cc 343 Virtual Wedge s ida A AA E a tenta A a as 343 Preamble a las ph Rp p 344 Postamble ects po PRU
132. 3 sprintpcs com You must use a Secure Digital storage card with only the Sprint_Watcher_PPC_2002 03xxx CAB file in the SSDMMC Cabfiles directory Note Other CAB files in the SSDMMC Cabfiles directory may cause problems with testing remove or uninstall these before proceeding You need at least 80 4 of 5 bars CDMA signal strength for a successful over the air activation 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Download and Activate Sprint Watcher Tip 1 Make sure the Registry Restore feature on your 760 Computer is dis abled Select Start gt Settings gt the System tab Tap the Utilities desk Utilities top icon then the Registry Save tab Clear the Enable Registry Save box a ees Q Utilities Registry settings can be saved between cold boots The registry is saved during device resets or when applications use the RegFlushkey function L Enable Registry Storage If enabled the real time clock can be restored on a cold boot Enable RTC Restore Dock Switch Registry Save Wakeup Mad a gt El 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 173 Chapter 4 Network Support 2 Perform a cold boot on your 760 Computer then go through the nor mal Pocket PC set up i e Align Screen etc w Important Set the Date and Time 4 Tap the Sprint_Watcher_PPC_2002 03xxx CAB file to perform the installation 5 Perform a warm b
133. 320 symbologies are not supported Likewise when using a laser scanner the QR Code page 321 Data Matrix page 322 and MaxiCode page 323 symbologies are not supported Note The 730 Computer uses the EV10 APS linear imager which sup ports 1D symbologies The following table shows which bar code symbologies are supported by an imager a laser scanner or the EV10 APS Linear Imager EV10 APS Bar Code Symbology Imager Laser Scanner Linear Imager Code 39 X X Interleaved 2 of 5 X Standard 2 of 5 X Matrix 2 of 5 Code 128 Code 93 Codabar MSI Plessey UPC EAN EAN 128 Code 11 PDF417 Micro PDF417 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X PA 9X 0X o 4 X 4 P4 a 54 v4 4 FX XM Telepen Data Matrix QR Code MaxiCode 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 303 Appendix A 304 Configurable Settings Code 39 Code 39 is a discrete self checking variable length symbology The char acter set is uppercase A Z 0 9 dollar sign period slash per cent 96 space plus and minus Action Tap to expand the Code 39 parameter select the setting to be changed then tap an option to change this setting or select an option from the drop down list SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 1 1 3 1 Options Decoding Not active Active default Standard 43 characters default Full ASCII Not transmitted default Transmitted Format Start Stop Start Stop character
134. 4 hours 740 741 750 751 760 761 X X X 740 741 750 751 760 761 X Client X X 2 Windows Mobile 2003 This chapter introduces Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PC While using your 700 Color Computer keep these key points in mind Tap Start on the navigation bar located at the top of the screen to quickly move to programs files and settings Use the command bar at the bottom of the screen to perform tasks in programs The command bar includes menus icons and the onscreen keyboard Tap and hold an item to see a pop up menu containing a list of actions you can perform Pop up menus give you quick and easy access to the most common actions Z Note 700 Color pertains to 740 741 750 751 760 and 761 Com puters unless otherwise noted Hep a Below is a list of Windows Mobile 2003 components described in this chapter Tap Start gt Help on your 700 Color Computer to find additional information on Windows Mobile components Windows Mobile 2003 Components Microsoft ActiveSync Client page 48 Microsoft Pocket Outlook page 50 Pocket Word page 82 Pocket Excel page 86 MSN Messenger page 87 Windows Media Player for Pocket PC page 92 Microsoft Reader page 93 Pocket Internet Explorer page 96 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 27 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Software Builds Do the following to determine which Intermec build of Windows Mobile
135. 404 METHOD BUFFERED FILE ANY ACCESS define IOCTL NPCP IOCTL CTL CODE FILE DEVICE SERIAL PORT 0x405 METHOD BUFFERED FILE ANY ACCESS define IOCTL_NPCP_PRIVER CTL CODE FILE DEVICE SERIAL PORT 0x406 METHOD BUFFERED FILE ANY ACCESS I OCTL NPCP CANCEL This cancels all printing at the printer It flushes the printer buffers and reinitializes the printer to its default state No parameters are required e IOCTL NPCP BIND This command is required before any data is sent or received by the printer Once the driver is opened the application must bind the com munications session with the printer before any data can be sent or re ceived by the printer If an error occurs during the bind the application may use IOCTL NPCP ERROR to get the current extended error code No parameters are required e IOCTL NPCP CLOSE This command closes the current session with the printer This function always returns TRUE No parameters are required IOCTL NPCP ERROR This command returns the extended NPCP error code in PL N format The word returned will contain the PL N compatible error code in the low byte and completion flags in the high byte If the frame that re turned an error was not received correctly by the printer the FRAME NOT ACKED bit will be set in the high byte This operation always returns TRUE An output buffer of at least 2 bytes is required See NPCP Erro
136. 41 750 751 760 761 20 to 60 C 4 to 140 F 20 to 60 C 4 to 140 F 5 to 95 noncondensing IP64 compliant 5 drop 26 times onto concrete 740 741 750 751 760 761 X X 740 741 750 751 760 761 X X X X 740 741 750 751 760 761 LAN 802 11b g GSM GPRS CDMA IxRTT X 740 741 750 751 760 761 X X 740 741 750 751 760 761 64 MB 128 MB optional 64 MB includes ROM folder for application storage 740 741 750 751 760 761 Intel XScale Processor 400 MHz 740 741 750 751 760 761 X 740 741 750 751 760 761 X 25 Chapter 1 Introduction Physical Dimensions Length Width Height Weight Power Battery Type Battery Capacity Battery Life Recharging Time Regulatory Approvals FCC Part 15 Class B UL Listing CE Mark CB Report Standard Communications RS232 USB IrDA 1 1 115 kbps 10 Base T Ethernet 26 730 178 mm 7 0 in 89 mm 3 5 in 38 mm 1 5 in 420 g 15 oz 730 Lithium Ion Lilon 3 6V 1 x 2400 mAh cells customer replaceable 8 64 Watt hours 6 10 hours application dependent 4 hours 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 740 741 750 751 760 761 191 mm 7 53 in 90 mm 3 5 in 50 mm 1 97 in 483 568 g 17 20 oz depending on options 740 741 750 751 760 761 Lilon 7 2V 2 x 2000 mAh cells customer replaceable 14 4 Watt hours 8 12 hours application dependent
137. 5 Ethernet communications setup 134 ETSI GSM 07 05 interface specifications 184 ETSI GSM 07 07 interface specifications 184 Expansion slot specifications 25 F Favorite links Pocket Internet Explorer 96 File Explorer adding programs to Start menu 47 removing programs 47 Windows Mobile 44 Find feature Windows Mobile 44 Flash File Store migrating applications 128 packaging an application 120 Flash file system control panel applet 367 Folder behavior connected to e mail server ActiveSync 78 IMAP4 78 POP3 78 SMS 78 FRAME NOT ACKED 201 FTP configurable parameters IDNATarget 244 ManifestName 244 Root 244 heartbeat 245 server installing applications 122 FTPDCMDS subdirectory FTP support 247 415 Index Full screen display 241 G GDI approach 198 General Packet Radio Service See GSM GPRS Getting connected directly to an e mail server 116 ISP 100 setting up an e mail account 116 to an ISP 100 creating a modem connection 100 to work 104 creating a modem connection 105 creating a VPN server connection 113 creating a wireless network connection 108 Windows Mobile 100 Gold plane on keypad 292 Good read configuration parameter beep duration 337 beeps 336 Grid data configuration parameter 348 GSM GPRS 142 antenna color code 133 AT command set MC45 184 MC46 184 CORE module 142 phone application 154 159 H Handset phone application 159 volume 161 Headset jack
138. 57 trap threshold 358 421 Index SNMP OIDs 1D OmniDir decode enable 342 aimer LED duration 338 beeper 333 frequency 335 volume 334 codabar 306 user ID 325 code 11 320 user ID 329 code 128 309 FNCI character 311 user ID 325 code 39 304 user ID 325 code 93 308 length 308 user ID 326 datamatrix 322 EAN 13 user ID 328 8 user ID 328 good read beep duration 337 beeps 336 identification contact 359 location 361 name 360 image dimension 340 interleaved 2 of 5 317 user ID 326 lighting mode 341 macro PDF 314 matrix 2 of 5 318 user ID 328 maxicode 323 micro PDF417 316 MSI 313 user ID 326 PDF417 314 user ID 326 plessey 312 user ID 327 prefix 330 QR code 321 security encryption key 356 read encryption 354 read only community string 352 read write community string 353 write encryption 355 security subnet mask 324 standard 2 of 5 305 user ID 327 sticky aimer duration 339 suffix 331 422 telepen 319 user ID 328 trap authentication 357 threshold 358 UPC A user ID 327 E user ID 327 UPC EAN 307 virtual wedge 343 code page 349 grid 348 postamble 346 preamble 344 Software versions 20 362 700 Series Computer 20 unit information control panel applet 364 Speaker 3 Speakerphone phone application 159 volume 161 Specifications 24 Cisco compatible extensions 24 display 24 environmental 25 expansion slots 25 integrated scanner optio
139. 60 and 761 Com puters unless otherwise noted 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 197 Chapter 5 Printer Support Printing ASCII Directly to a Port The following methods for printing using Pocket PC at this time is as fol lows Add port drivers to print ASCII directly to the port Use LinePrinter ActiveX Control from the Printing Resource Kit via the Intermec Developer Library IDL available as a download from the In termec webs site at www intermec com Contact your Intermec repre sentative for more information Via wireless printing see the Wireless Printing Development Guide for more information Printing directly to the port sends RAW data to the printer The format of this data depends upon your application and the printer capabilities You must understand the printer commands available for your specific printer Generally applications just send raw ASCII text to the printer Since you are sending data to the printer from your application directly to the port you are in complete control of the printers operations This allows you to do line printing print one line at a time rather than the page for mat printing offered by the GDI approach It is also much faster since data does not have to be converted from one graphics format to the other dis play to printer Most Intermec printers use Epson Escape Sequences to control print format operations These commands are available in documentat
140. 7 F FTPDCE EXE 245 247 AutoFTP 249 FTP Server 242 FTPDCE TXT 247 INTERMEC MIB 195 ITCADC MIB 195 ITCSNMP MIB 195 ITCTERMINAL MIB 195 M MAKECAB EXE 239 MOD80211 DLL 267 N NETWLAN DLL 267 NLED H 290 NLEDGetDevicelnfo 290 426 NLEDSetDevice 290 NPCPPORT DLL 199 NRINET INI 365 O OEMIOCTL H IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID 265 IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT 260 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE 262 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO 259 IOCTL HAL GET OAL VERINFO 258 IOCTL HAL GET RESET INFO 261 IOCTL HAL ITC READ PARM 251 IOCTL HAL ITC WRITE SYSPARM 255 IOCTL HAL REBOOT 263 IOCTL HAL WARMBOOT 260 ONEIL DLL 204 P PKFUNCS H IOCTL HAL GET DEVICEID 257 IOCTL PROCESSOR INFORMATION 264 PRISMNDS DLL 267 R REBOOTME BIN 247 REGFLUSH CAB 123 RESETMEPLEASE _ TXT 236 RPM EXE 229 RPMCE212 INI 229 S SETUP DLL 228 236 DllMain 236 Sprint Watcher PPC 2002 03xxx CAB 174 T TAHOMA TTE 229 U URODDSVC EXE 267 WwW WCESTART INI 229 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual fatermec Corporate Headquarters 6001 36th Avenue West Everett Washington 98203 U S A telX 425 348 2600 fax 425 355 9551 www intermec com 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual July 2005 P N 961 054 031 REV H
141. A ee ex Laven a Ra Ee 404 General Indec s sat bs A ones E sou vs ero eR eee te It 410 BilessIndexisc soos tue tale sucks M IME Ea ns MER UIN E P IS 426 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual xvii Contents xviii 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Before You Begin Before You Begin Safety Summary This section provides you with safety information technical support information and sources for additional product information Your safety is extremely important Read and follow all warnings and cautions in this document before handling and operating Intermec equipment You can be seriously injured and equipment and data can be damaged if you do not follow the safety warnings and cautions Do not repair or adjust alone Do not repair or adjust energized equipment alone under any circumstances Someone capable of providing first aid must always be present for your safety First aid Always obtain first aid or medical attention immediately after an injury Never neglect an injury no matter how slight it seems Resuscitation Begin resuscitation immediately if someone is injured and stops breathing Any delay could result in death To work on or near high voltage you should be familiar with approved industrial first aid methods Energized equipment Never work on energized equipment unless authorized by a responsible authority Energized electrical equipment is dangerous Electrical shock from energized equi
142. AL_GET_DEVICEID 257 IOCTL HAL GET OAL VERINFO 258 IOCTL HAL GET RESET INFO 261 IOCTL HAL ITC READ PARM 251 IOCTL HAL ITC WRITE SYSPARM 255 IOCTL HAL REBOOT 263 IOCTL HAL WARMBOOT 260 IOCTL PROCESSOR INFORMATION 264 IpInBufSize IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID 265 IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT 260 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE 262 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO 250 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID 257 IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO 258 IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO 261 IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT 263 IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT 260 IpOutBuf IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID 265 IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT 260 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE 262 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO 259 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO 250 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID 257 IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO 258 IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO 261 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM 251 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM 255 IOCTL HAL REBOOT 263 IOCTL HAL WARMBOOT 260 IOCTL PROCESSOR INFORMATION 264 M ManifestName FTP Server 244 N nDeviceld NLEDGetDeviceInfo 290 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Index NDIS ENCRYPTION 1 ENABLED EncryptionStatus 279 GetWepStatus 276 NDIS ENCRYPTION 1 KEY ABSENT EncryptionStatus 279 GetWepStatus 276 NDIS ENCRYPTION 2 ENABLED EncryptionStatus 279 GetWepStatus 276 NDIS ENCRYPTION 2 KEY ABSENT EncryptionStatus 279 GetWepStatus 276 NDIS ENCRYPTION 3 ENABLED EncryptionStatus 279 GetWepStatus 276 NDIS_ENCRYPTION_3_KEY_ABSENT Encry
143. AP as an association mode To Enable PEAP with an Open Association 1 Set 8021x Security as PEAP 2 Set Association to Open 3 Skip Encryption as it is automatically set to WEP See page 372 for information about WEP encryption 4 Enter your unique user name and password to use this protocol Select Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each time to access the protocol or leave Use following password as selected to auto matically use the protocol without entering a password 5 Tap Get Certificates to obtain or import server certificates See page 388 for more information 6 Tap Additional Settings to assign an inner PEAP authentication and set options for server certificate validation and trust See page 381 for more information Tr EF Profile Wizard En d 1 29 ok Basic Security advanced GO02Z1x Security Pear Association Encryption open wer T Password O Prompt For password a Use following password Get Certificates Additional Settings E 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings To Enable PEAP with WPA Encryption 1 Set 8021x Security as PEAP 2 Set Association to WPA See page 372 for information about WPA encryption 3 Skip Encryption as it is automatically set to TKIP See page 372 for more information about TKIP 4 Enter your
144. ASCII characters Embedded null lt NUL characters are not allowed Default is no characters disabled Settings a 46123 Q Data Collection Symbology ID lt Disable gt E Prefix lt gt Change Suffix Setting Symbologies Symbology Options Beepel 4 gt New Tools Accounts 1 mlj 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 331 Appendix A Configurable Settings Beeper LED Il To access the settings from the 700 Color Computer tap Start gt Settings le alius the System tab the Data Collection icon to access its control panel Data applet Collection PP Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Beeper LED tab then tap this tab to access its parameters Most of these functions are not available when using an imager The following table shows which functions are supported either by an imager or by a laser scanner Beeper Function Imager Laser Scanner Beeper X Beeper Volume Beeper Frequency Good Read Beeps Good Read Beep Duration The following are parameters for features on the 700 Color Computer Note that these are listed in the order of their appearance 332 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Beeper Sets the volume for the good read beep Note that this is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Color Computer Action Tap the Beeper parameter then select an option to change
145. AutoHide 0x00010001 1 Autohide the taskbar HKLM SOFTWAREMMicrosoftNShellNOnTop 0x00010001 0 Shell is not on top HKLM SOFTWAREMMicrosoftNClock SHOW CLOCK 0x00010001 0 Clock is not on taskbar 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 235 Chapter 7 Programming Using Installation Functions in SETUP DLL SETUP DLL is an optional file that enables you to perform custom opera tions during installation and removal of your application The following list shows the functions that are exported by SETUP DLL Install_ Init Called before installation begins Use this function to check the application version when reinstal ling an application and to determine if a dependent application is present Install_Exit Called after installation is complete Use this function to handle errors that occur during applica tion installation Uninstall Init Called before the removal process begins Use this function to close the application if the applica tion is running Uninstall_Exit Called after the removal process is complete Use this function to save database information to a file and delete the database and to tell the user where the user data files are stored and how to rein stall the application Z Note Use DefaultInstall gt CESelfRegister page 228 in the INF file to point to SETUP DLL After the CAB File Extraction Cab files that need to cause a warm reset after cab extraction will need to c
146. Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL HAL ITC READ PARM Usage Zinclude oemioctl h Syntax BOOL KernelloControl IOCTL HAL ITC READ PARM LPVOID lpInBuf DWORD nInBufSize LPVOID lpOutBuf DWORD nOutBufSize LPDWORD lpBytesReturned Parameters Points to this structure See ID Field Values below struct PARMS BYTE id BYTE ClassId y nInBufSize Must be set to the size of the PARMS structure IpOutBuf Must point to a buffer large enough to hold the return data of the function If this field is set to NULL and nOutBufSize is set to zero when the function is called the function will return the number bytes required by the buffer nOutBufSize The size of pOurBuf in bytes IpBytesReturned Number of bytes returned by the function for the data requested Return Values Returns TRUE if function succeeds Returns FALSE if the function fails GetLastError may be used to get the error value Either ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER or ERROR_INSUFFICIENT_BUFFER may be returned when this function is used to get the error ID Field Values The id field of the PARMS structure may be one of the following values ID Field Values ITC_NVPARM_ETHERNET_ID This IOCTL returns the Ethernet 802 11b or 802 11b g MAC Address Six bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the pOutBuffer parameter ITC_NVPARM_SERIAL_NUM This IOCTL returns the serial number of the device in BCD format Six bytes are returned in the buffer pointe
147. Collection icon to access its control panel applet Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Symbology Options tab then tap this tab to access its parameters The following are parameters for bar code symbology options Note that these are listed in the order of their appearance within the Symbology Options tab Symbology ID Identifies the bar code symbology in which data is encoded by prepending a user specified symbology identifier to the data You can prepend one of these types of character strings to identify the symbology User defined ASCII Character Option 1 A user defined symbology identifier is a single ASCII character You can assign a custom identifier character to each bar code symbology Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer AIM ISO IEC Standard Option 2 Required to define symbology IDs The AIM Standard has a three character structure which indicates the symbology and optional features See the AJM ISO IEC Standard for information Action Select Symbology ID then select an option to change this parameter set ting Tap to expand the Symbology ID parameter then select any of the user ID parameters listed See the top of the next page for a sample screen of the Code 39 user ID SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 4 1 22 1 Options 0 Disable default 1 User defined disabled when using an imager 2 ISO IEC Standard Settings Data Collection eu
148. Color Computer The books appear in the Reader Library where you can tap them in the list to open them Each book consists of a cover page an op tional table of contents and the pages of the book You can Page through the book by using the Up Down control on your 700 Color Computer or by tapping the page number on each page Annotate the book with highlighting bookmarks notes and drawings Search for text and look up definitions for words The Guidebook contains all the information needed to use the software To open the Guidebook tap Help on the Reader command bar Or on a book page tap and hold on the book title and then tap Help on the pop up menu uds To switch to Microsoft Reader tap Start gt Programs gt Microsoft Reader Microsoft Getting Books on Your 700 Color Computer Reader you can download book files from the Web Just visit your favorite eBook retailer and follow the instructions to download the book files Sample books and a dictionary are also included in the MSReader folder in the Extras folder on the Windows Mobile Companion CD Use ActiveSync to download the files from your desktop to your activated mobile computer as described in the Read Me file in the MSReader folder Using the Library The Library is your Reader home page it displays a list of all books stored on your 700 Color Computer or storage card To open the Library 1 On the Reader command bar tap Library 2 On a book page tap t
149. Company view Deleting a Contact 1 In the contact list tap and hold the contact To select multiple contacts tap and drag Then tap and hold the selected contacts 2 On the pop up menu tap Delete Contact The next time you synchro nize the contact is deleted from the desktop also 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 71 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Adding a Contact to Speed Dial You can create speed dials to call frequently called numbers with a single tap Before you can create a speed dial entry for a phone number that number must already exist in Contacts 1 From the Phone keypad tap Speed Dial gt New 2 Tap the desired contact name and number 3 In the Location field tap the Up Down arrows to select an available location to assign as the new speed dial entry The first speed dial loca tion is reserved for your voice mail To delete a speed dial entry go to the Speed Dial list tap and hold the contact name in the box to the right of the assigned speed dial number then tap Delete Changing Contacts Options In the contact list tap Tools gt Options The area code and country region for new contacts are automatically entered based on the information in Country Region settings f you are having trouble reading the contacts in the contact list select Use large font To increase the available space for displaying contacts in the list clear Show ABC tabs AF contacts dico Opt
150. Configure Network Authentication O The Key is provided for me automatically Key index i General Network Key 802 1 Ej 110 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 4 Note The following information applies when you have Enable Microsoft s Wireless Zero Config checked via the Wireless Network control panel applet see Appendix A Configurable Settings To Enable WPA Authentication 730 751 751 761 Computers a Set Authentication to WPA See page 372 for information about WPA encryption b Set Data Encryption to either WEP or TKIP See page 372 for information about WEP and TKIP encryption 3 Settings DES Configure Network Authentication o Authentication WPA Data Encryption TKIP The Key is provided For me automatically Network key HOR ok oc ROK CK Key index 1 General Network Key Ej 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 To Enable WPA Authentication Using a Preshared Key 730 741 751 761 Computers a Set Authentication to WPA PSK See page 372 for information about WPA encryption b Set Data Encryption to either WEP or TKIP See page 372 for information about WEP and TKIP encryption Enter the new Network key settings eis e Configure Network Authentication eo Authentication WPAPSK Data Encryption a The K
151. Controls This describes the KernelloControl functions available to application programmers Most C applications will need to prototype the function as the following to avoid link and compile errors extern C BOOL KernelloControl DWORD dwloControlCode LPVOID lpInBuf DWORD nlInBufSize LPVOID lpOutBuf DWORD nOutBufSize LPDWORD lpBytesReturned IOCTL HAL GET DEVICE INFO This IOCTL returns either the platform type or the OEMPLATFORM name based on an input value Syntax BOOL KernelloControl IOCTL HAL GET DEVICE INFO LPVOID lpInBuf DWORD nInBufSize LPVOID lpOutBuf DWORD nOutBufSize LPDWORD lpBytesReturned Parameters Points toa DWORD containing either the SPI GETPLAT FORMTYPE or SPI GETOEMINTFO value Must be set to sizeofiDWORD Must point to a buffer large enough to hold the return data of the function If SPI GETPLATFORMTYTE is specified in plnBuf then the PocketPC 0 Unicode string is returned If SPI GE TOEMINFO is specified in pInBuf then the Intermec 70010 Unicode string is returned nOutBufSize The size of pOurBuf in bytes Must be large enough to hold the string returned IpBytesReturned The actual number of bytes returned by the function for the data requested Return Values Returns TRUE if function succeeds Returns FALSE if the function fails GetLastError may be used to get the extended error value 250 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual
152. D 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 1 1 24 1 Options Decoding Not active default Active Bar code length Any length Minimum length default Minimum length 001 254 Minimum length 1 254 default is 6 Z Note If Bar code length 1 then Minimum length is entered Emm cis Q Data Collection amp Matrix 2 of 5 lt 01006 gt Decoding Not active gt i i Bar code length Minimum length i Minimum length lt 6 gt ES Telepen lt 00 gt Symbologies Symbology Options Beepel 4 gt mj 318 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Telepen Telepen is an alphanumeric case sensitive full ASCII symbology Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Com puter Action Tap to expand the Telepen parameter select the setting to be changed then tap an option to change this setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 1 1 25 1 Options Decoding Not active default Active Format ASCII default Numeric Emm PHETZI Mol Data Collection amp Matrix 2 of 5 010067 B I Decoding Not active gt i Format lt ASCII gt amp Code 11 lt 011 gt Symbologies Symbology Options Beepel 4 gt a 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 319 Appendix A Configurable Settings Code 11 Code 11 is a high density discrete numeric symbology that is extensively used in labeling
153. D OmniDir Decode Enable The 1D OmniDir Decode Enable affects the scanning abilities of the IT4000 Imager With 1D omni directional enabled the imager is able to decode images and bar code labels regardless of the orientation of the label With 1D omni directional disabled the imager only decodes labels in the direction of the aimer LED Note that this is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Color Computer Action Tap the 1D OmniDir Decode Enable parameter then select an option to change this parameter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 3 1 1 25 1 Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled default Settings nc Q Data Collection Aimer LED Duration msecs Sticky Aimer Duration msecs lt 1000 gt de Image Dimension lt 000639000479 gt Lighting Made LED Priority 1D OmniDir Decode Enable Mot Available Beeper LED Imager Virtual Wedge ale New Tools Accounts E mj 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Virtual Wedge Ig 3145 Dat olere Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Virtual Wedge tab then tap this tab to access its parameters To access the settings from the 700 Color Computer tap Start gt Settings gt the System tab gt Data Collection to access its control panel applet The following are parameters for the virtual wedge scanner Note that these are listed in the order of their
154. DE 252 ITC NVPARM RTC RESTORE 253 ITC NVPARM SERIAL NUM 251 ITC NVPARM SERIAL2 INSTALLED 254 ITC NVPARM SERVICE DATE 251 ITC NVPARM SIM PROTECT HW INSTALLED 254 ITC NVPARM SIM PROTECT SW INSTALLED 254 ITC NVPARM VERSION NUMBER 252 ITC NVPARM VIBRATE INSTALLED 254 ITC NVPARM WAN FREQUENCY 253 ITC NVPARM WAN INSTALLED 253 ITC NVPARM WAN RADIOTYPE 253 ITC NVPARM WAN RI 252 ITC REGISTRY SAVE ENABLE 256 K KernelloControl IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID 265 IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT 260 291 IOCTL HAL GET BOOT DEVICE 262 IOCTL HAL GET BOOTLOADER VERINFO 259 IOCTL HAL GET DEVICE INFO 250 IOCTL HAL GET DEVICEID 257 IOCTL HAL GET OAL VERINFO 258 IOCTL HAL GET RESET INFO 261 IOCTL HAL ITC READ PARM 251 IOCTL HAL ITC WRITE SYSPARM 255 IOCTL HAL REBOOT 263 291 IOCTL HAL WARMBOOT 260 291 IOCTL PROCESSOR INFORMATION 264 KernelloControl 250 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual L IpBytesReturned IOCTL GET CPU ID 265 IOCTL HAL GET BOOT DEVICE 262 IOCTL HAL GET BOOTLOADER VERINFO 259 IOCTL HAL GET DEVICE INFO 250 IOCTL HAL GET DEVICEID 257 IOCTL HAL GET OAL VERINFO 258 IOCTL HAL GET RESET INFO 261 IOCTL HAL ITC READ PARM 251 IOCTL HAL ITC WRITE SYSPARM 255 IOCTL PROCESSOR INFORMATION 264 IpInBuf IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID 265 IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT 260 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE 262 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO 259 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO 250 IOCTL_H
155. DISABLED Definitions ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN EnableWep BOOL else UINT EnableWep BOO endif 278 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 7 Programming EncryptionStatus Call this function to set the desired encryption status Syntax UINT EncryptionStatus UINT mode Parameters NDIS ENCRYPTION 1 ENABLED WEP is enabled TKIP and AES are not enabled and a transmit key may or may not be available same as NDIS_RADIO_WEP_ENABLED NDIS_ENCRYPTION_DISABLED Indicates that AES TKIP and WEP are disabled and a transmit key is available Same as NDIS_RADIO_WEP_DISABLED NDIS ENCRYPTION NOT SUPPORTED Indicates that encryption WEP TKIP and AES is not supported Same as NDIS RADIO WEP NOT SUPPORTED NDIS ENCRYPTION 1 KEY ABSENT Indicates that AES TKIP and WEP are disabled and a transmit key is not available Same as NDIS_RADIO_WEP_ABSENT NDIS_ENCRYPTION_2_ ENABLED Indicates that TKIP and WEP are enabled AES is not enabled and a transmit key is available NDIS ENCRYPTION 2 KEY ABSENT Indicates that there are no transmit keys available for use by TKIP or WEP TKIP and WEP are enabled and AES is not enabled NDIS ENCRYPTION 3 ENABLED Indicates that AES TKIP and WEP are enabled and a transmit key is available NDIS ENCRYPTION 3 KEY ABSENT Indicates that there are no transmit keys available for use by AES
156. E indicates that no serial 2 device is installed ITC NVPARM VIBRATE INSTALLED This IOCTL reads the state of the vibrate device installed flag A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by pOutBuffer TRUE indicates that the vibrate device is installed FALSE indicates that no vibrate device is installed ITC NVPARM LAN9000 INSTALLED This IOCTL reads the state of the Ethernet device installed flag A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by pOutBuffer TRUE indicates that the Ethernet device is installed FALSE indicates that no Ethernet device is installed ITC NVPARM SIM PROTECT HW INSTALLED This IOCTL reads the state of the SIM card protection hardware installed flag A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by pOutBuffer TRUE indicates that the SIM card protection hardware is installed FALSE indicates that no SIM card protection hardware is installed ITC NVPARM SIM PROTECT SW INSTALLED This IOCTL reads the state of the SIM card protection software installed flag A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by pOutBuffer TRUE indicates that the SIM card protection software is installed FALSE indicates that no SIM card protection software is installed ITC NVPARM SIM PROTECT SW INSTALLED This IOCTL reads the state of the SIM card protection software installed flag A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by pOutBuffer TRUE indicates that the SIM card protection software
157. EE e Senne Rap ede dui aad 244 ROE oue og sen ear ne ade eee PEU e aed c Mo da 244 Transferring Files Over TCP IP Networks ice a da ra 245 Stopping the E TP Server from Your Application e Feat ke 248 Autostart dur eds ee ode hoan rec reque ences Rus cia Vaca ri acne Womble 248 xii 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Contents Kernel YO Controls oet o ree ert cie te lute ee eir Lage cbe ipei toe rois 250 IOCTL HAL GET DEVICE INFO arane eoa euran oai aiaa N e s 250 IOCTLE FAL ITG READ PARM 0 te er ERE CER RR EY RS 251 IOCTL HAL ITC WRITE SYSPARM seeeeee RR 255 IOCTL HAL GET DEVICEID eeeee RR IRR RR 257 IOCTL HAL GET OAL VERINFO eeeee cee eee 258 IOCTL HAL GET BOOTLOADER VERINFO ees 259 IOCTL HAL WARMBOOT o 260 IOCTIAHAL GOLDBOOT fide cians tad EEG eben A ee a 260 IOCTL HAL GET RESET INFO eeee RR e Res 261 IOCTL HAL GET BOOT DEVICE sert elet merere RR s 262 IOGTLLEIAE REBOOCT vene EP DUET URP EP EE PLU 263 IOCTL PROCESSOR INFORMATION sseeeeee e e 264 IOGTE GEIS CRUDA a ada DC NUR TIE 265 Network Selection APIs 0 ccc ccc cece cence nent nee eens 266 Basic Connect Disconnect Functions ss agare ot rike cece cence nee e 268 Radio Connect A odes ede ee ee pr Ie E 268 Radio Disconnect zt eere ree pr i be aps rg gd 268 RadioDisassoclate 12e nee e bee e entere exe 269 Query Information Functions s sas Grab eau ea REPORT ora B ROMS RE aq Pack s 269 GetAssoci
158. Edit gt Password Ev ery time you open the workbook enter a password preferably one that is easy for you to remember but hard for others to guess Tips for Working in Pocket Excel Note the following when working in large worksheets in Pocket Excel View in full screen mode to see as much of your worksheet as possible Tap View Full Screen To exit full screen mode tap Restore Tap View Zoom and select a percentage so that you can easily read the worksheet Show and hide window elements Tap View and then tap the elements you want to show or hide Freeze panes on a worksheet First select the cell where you want to freeze panes Tap View Freeze Panes You might want to freeze the top and leftmost panes in a worksheet to keep row and column labels visible as you scroll through a sheet Tap View Unfreeze Panes to undo this process e Split panes to view different areas of a large worksheet Tap View gt Split Then drag the split bar to where you want it To remove the split tap View Remove Split Show and hide rows To hide a row select a cell in the row you want to hide Then tap Format gt Row gt Hide To show a hidden row tap Tools gt Go To and then type a reference that is in the hidden row Then tap Format gt Row gt Unhide Do the same to show and hide columns To hide a column select a cell in the column you want to hide Then tap Format gt Column gt Hide To show a hidden column
159. F417 user ID 326 plessey 312 plessey user ID 327 prefix 330 standard 2 of 5 305 standard 2 of 5 user ID 327 suffix 331 telepen 319 telepen user ID 328 UPC E user ID 327 UPC A user ID 327 UPC EAN 307 virtual wedge 343 417 Index virtual wedge code page 349 virtual wedge grid 348 virtual wedge postamble 346 virtual wedge preamble 344 SNMP configuration parameters identification contact 359 identification location 361 identification name 360 security encryption key 356 security read encryption 354 security read only community string 352 security read write community string 353 security subnet mask 324 security write encryption 355 trap authentication 357 trap threshold 358 supported beeper functions 332 symbologies 303 symbologies not available Datamatrix 321 datamatrix 322 maxicode 323 LEAP 802 11 radio module network EAP 391 WPA encryption 390 profile security information 389 WEP encryption 389 LED status 17 battery 17 scanning keypad shift and notification 17 Letter recognizer Windows Mobile input panel 37 Letting your location be visible CDMA radios 151 Library Microsoft Reader 93 Lighting Mode configuration parameter 341 Line printing 198 Location Phone application CDMA radios 151 LPT9 printer device 199 M Macro PDF configuration parameter 314 Managing e mail messages and folders via Inbox 78 Matrix 2 of 5 configuration parameter 318 user ID 328 Ma
160. Friday February 11 2005 Tap here to set owner information No unread rr 3 Active tasks 1 High priority 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 135 Chapter 4 Network Support Network Selection APIs The Network Selection APIs change the network adapter configuration programmatically Both drivers support the same IOCTL function num bers for loading and unloading the drivers Go to Chapter 7 Program ming to see the APIs Network Connections TA From the 700 Color Computer tap Start gt Settings gt the Connections tab gt the Connections icon gt the Advanced tab gt Network Card or the Connections Network Adapters tab to access the network connections for this unit Make the changes necessary for your network then tap ok when finished Consider the following before making your selection For a work connection or an internet connection select the Built In Ethernet 10 Mbps option The 802 11b Wireless LAN option is for 750 and 760 Computers with legacy 802 11b radios The 802 11b PRISM Wireless LAN option is for 750 751 760 and 761 Computers with standard 802 11b radios The 802 11b g Wireless LAN option is for 751 and 761 Computers with the latest 802 11b g radios J AJ Settings erizos Q Configure Network Adapters Configure Network Adapters o My network card connects to Werk Tap an adapter to modify settings 802 116 PRISM Wireless LAN
161. IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO 258 IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO 261 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM 251 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM 255 IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT 263 IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT 260 IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION 264 O Object store IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT 260 IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT 263 IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT 260 Oldstyle device ID 257 OSVERSIONINFO dwBuildNumber 226 OSVERSIONINFO dwVersionMajor 226 OSVERSIONINFO dwVersionMinor 226 P PauseAtStartup FTP Server 244 pInput NLEDSetDevice 290 Pocket PC IOCTL HAL GET BOOTLOADER VERINFO 259 IOCTL HAL GET OAL VERINFO 258 pOutput NLEDGetDevicelnfo 290 Processor information IOCTL_PROCESSOR_IN FORMATION 264 ProcessorType CEDevice 226 Provider Version 224 Q Query Information functions 269 R RadioConnect 268 RadioDisassociate 269 RadioDisconnect 268 ReadFile NPCP printing 199 Reboot methods IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT 291 IOCTL_HAL_ REBOOT 291 IOCTL HAL WARMBOOT 291 RegFlushKey 129 241 RegisterDevice 199 DTR printing 204 Registry FTP Server parameters 243 save location IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM 255 RegOpenKeyEx 293 RegQueryValueEx 293 RegSetValueEx 293 Remove Wep 283 RenewDHCP 286 ResetRadioToSystemSave 287 RFC 959 247 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Root FTP Server 244 S Set information functions 278 SetAuthenticationMode 280 SetCCXStatus 282 SetChannel 280 SetDiversity Deprecated
162. ITC NVPARM INTERMEC DATACOLLEC TION HW 253 ITC NVPARM INTERMEC DATACOLLEC TION SW 253 ITC NVPARM INTERMEC SOFT WARE CONTENT 252 ITC NVPARM LAN9000 INSTALLED 254 ITC NVPARM MANF DATE 251 ITC NVPARM MCODE 252 ITC NVPARM RTC RESTORE 253 ITC NVPARM SERIAL NUM 251 ITC NVPARM SERIAL2 INSTALLED 254 ITC NVPARM SERVICE DATE 251 ITC NVPARM SIM PRO TECT HW INSTALLED 254 ITC NVPARM SIM PRO TECT SW INSTALLED 254 ITC NVPARM VERSION NUMBER 252 ITC NVPARM VIBRATE INSTALLED 254 ITC NVPARM WAN FREQUENCY 253 ITC NVPARM WAN INSTALLED 253 ITC NVPARM WAN RADIOTYDPE 253 405 Index ITC_NVPARM_WAN_RI 252 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM ITC DOCK SWITCH 256 ITC_ WAKEUP MASK 256 ITC AMBIENT FRONTLIGHT 256 ITC AMBIENT KEYBOARD 256 ITC REGISTRY SAVE ENABLE 256 IDNA DeviceName 243 DeviceURL 243 IDNATarget FTP Server 244 InstallDir CEStrings 225 Intermec Device Network Announcement See IDNA IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID 265 IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT 260 291 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE 262 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO 259 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO 250 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID 257 IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO 258 IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO 261 IOCTL HAL ITC READ PARM 251 IOCTL HAL ITC WRITE SYSPARM 255 IOCTL HAL REBOOT 263 291 IOCTL HAL WARMBOOT 260 291 IOCTL LOAD NDIS MINIPORT 266 IOCTL PROCESSOR INFORMATION 264 IOCTL UNLOAD NDIS MINIPORT 266 isDHCPEnabled 286 isOrinoco 284 isSupplicantRun
163. KIP and WEP are disabled and a transmit key is not available Same as NDIS RADIO WEP ABSENT Indicates that TKIP and WEP are enabled AES is not enabled and a transmit key is available Indicates that there are no transmit keys available for use by TKIP or WEP TKIP and WEP are enabled and AES is not enabled Indicates that AES TKIP and WEP are enabled and a transmit key is available Indicates that there are no transmit keys available for use by AES TKIP or WEP and AES TKIP and WEP are enabled ERROR_SUCCESS when successful ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed or ERR CONNECT FAILED if a connection with the radio failed If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned your ULONG reference is populated with one of the parameters listed above ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT PFN GetWepStatus ULONG amp else UINT GetWepStatus ULONG amp endif 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions Chapter 7 Programming GetRadiolpAddress Call this function to obtain a formatted string indicating whether DHCP is enabled and what is the current adapters IP address UINT GetRadioIpAddress TCHAR Pointer to a character array that contains the formatted string of the IP address and static DHCP information ERROR SUCCESS when successful ERR QUERY FAILED whe
164. LD A2 Application 2 Press Gold O Press Gold White 89 5 368 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings App Launch ep From the 700 Color Computer tap Start gt Settings gt the System tab gt Utilities then scroll to the right to tap the App Launch tab to access the Utilities Application Launch control panel applet This applet programs or maps two scanner buttons and four application keys to start up to six applications Note that the left scanner button also acts as the record button For 700 Color Computers with either a laser scanner or an imager default mappings are shown in the following illustration g eis Q Utilities Buttons Applications Right Scan Right Scanner Trigger Set default values For application launch buttons Dess Wakeup Mask App Launch alo For 700 Color Computers without either a laser scanner or an imager the default maps the Record Calendar Contacts and Tasks applications the top four and the A3 and A4 buttons are unassigned or available for two more applications L4 Note Record Calendar Contacts and Tasks are Pocket PC applications See Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 for more information about these applications To assign an application to a button select an application from the ap plicable drop down list box To assign a new application select the Add new application option which bri
165. M4 Do the following to initiate this con nection and test these commands to your radio TA 1 From the 760 Computer select Start gt Settings gt the Connections tab gt Connections Under My ISP tap Add a new modem connection Connections E Settings etc 1 07 GD Connections o To set up ar change connection information tap one of the Following links My ISP Add a new modem connection My Work Network Add a new modem connection Add a new YPN server connection Set up my proxy server 2 Enter a name for the connection select WANA on COM4 from the Select a modem drop down list then tap Next to continue Ky settings a d 12 34 Make New Connection Enter a name for the connection uy Connection Select a modem Ej 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 185 Chapter 4 Network Support 3 Enter a phone number as it should be dialed then tap Next to continue Select Start gt Help for more information or tap use dialing rules to make modifications Note that this screen may vary based on dialing rules ag Settings en d 12 37 My Connection o9 Enter the number exactly as it should be dialed Include any extra numbers such as an outside line or credit card TF you travel or change area codes often use dialing rules aj 4 Tap Advanced to adjust the baud rate 9 settings E 4 12 40 My Connection Q Password If provided by I
166. OR SUCCESS when successful ERR QUERY FAILED when the query failed or ERR CONNECT FAILED if a connection with the radio failed If ERROR SUCCESS is returned your ULONG reference is populated with one of the parame ters listed above ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN GetNetworkType ULONG amp else UINT GetNetworkType ULONG amp fendif GetSSID Call this function to get the desired SSID of the 802 11b or 802 11b g radio UINT GetSSID TCHAR Pointer to a character array which is populated with the current SSID when successful ERROR SUCCESS when successful ERR QUERY FAILED when the query failed or ERR CONNECT FAILED ifa connection with the radio failed If ERROR SUCCESS is returned your TCHAR array is populated with the desired SSID ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN GetSSID ICHAR else UINT GetSSID TCHAR endif x Note Call RadioConnect before this function for this function to work properly 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 273 Chapter 7 Programming Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions 274 GetPowerMode Call this function to get the current power savings mode of the radio UINT GetPowerMode ULONG NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_CAM Continuous Access Mode ie always on NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_PSP Power Saving Mode NDIS_RADIO_POWER_UNKN
167. OWN Unknown power mode NDIS_RADIO_POWER_AUTO Auto Available for 730 Mobile Computers NDIS RADIO POWER MODE FAST PSP Fast PSP good savings fast ERROR SUCCESS when successful ERR QUERY FAILED when the query failed or ERR CONNECT FAILED ifa connection with the radio failed If ERROR SUCCESS is returned your ULONG reference is populated with one of the parame ters listed above ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN GetPowerMode ULONG amp else UINT GetPowerMode ULONG amp fendif Z Note Do not use Automatic Switching mode at this time GetRSSI Call this function to get the current RSSI Radio Signal Strength Indica tor in Dbm UINT GetRSSI ULONG amp References a ULONG that is populated with the current RSSI after a successful call ERROR SUCCESS when successful ERR QUERY FAILED when the query failed or ERR CONNECT FAILED ifa connection with the radio failed If ERROR SUCCESS is returned your ULONG reference contains the RSSI Valid RSSI range is from 2100 Dbm to 30 Dbm ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN GetRSSI ULONG amp else UINT GetRSSI ULONG amp endif 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions Chapter 7 Programming GetTXPower Call this function to get the current transmit power of the radio UINT GetTXPower ULONG amp NDIS POWER LEVEL 63 63 mW NDIS
168. PC image Usage Zinclude oemioctl h Syntax BOOL KernelloControl IOCTL HAL GET OAL VERINFO LPVOID lpInBuf DWORD nInBufSize LPVOID lpOutBuf DWORD nOutBufSize LPDWORD lpBytesReturned Parameters IpInBuf Should be set to NULL nInBufSize Should be set to zero IpOutBuf Must point to a VERSIONINEO structure as defined by OEMIOCTL H The fields should have these values cboemverinfo Sizeof tagOemVerInfo verinfover 1 sig ITC 0 eid B e tgtcustomer p e tgtplat SeaRay tgtplatversion Current build version number of the bootstrap loader tgtcputype 8 Intel 0 e tgtcpu PXA255 0 tgtcoreversion C date Build time e time Build date nOutBufSize The size of VERSIONINFO in bytes IpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned to pOutBuf Return Values Returns TRUE if function succeeds Returns FALSE if the function fails GetLastError may be used to get the extended error value 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 259 Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL HAL WARMBOOT Causes the system to perform a warm boot The object store is retained Usage Zinclude oemioctl h Syntax BOOL KernelloControl IOCTL HAL WARMBOOT LPVOID lpInBuf DWORD nInBufSize LPVOID lpOutBuf DWORD nOutBufSize LPDWORD lpBytesReturned Parameters IpInBuf Should be set to NULL IpInBufSize Should be set to zero IpOutBuf Should be NULL nOutBufSize Should be
169. PI calls that talk directly to the radio Note that the 802 11b or 802 11b g radio must be enabled via NDISTRAY before you can connect to t Syntax UINT RadioConnect Parameters None Return Values ERROR SUCCESS when successful otherwise ERR CONNECT FAILED Remarks Call this function before you call any other function found within this API It hunts out and connects to the 802 11b or 802 11b g radio available on the system Check extended error codes if it re turns anything else for information Definitions ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN RadioConnect else UINT RadioConnect fendif RadioDisconnect Call this function when done using the 802 11 API to clean up a connection from a previous RadioConnect call If you do not call this function you may leave memory allocated Syntax UINT RadioDisconnect Parameters None Return Values ERROR SUCCESS when successful otherwise ERR CONNECT FAILED Remarks None Definitions ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN RadioDisconnect else UINT RadioDisconnect fendif 268 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 7 Programming RadioDisassociate Call this function to have the 802 11b or 802 11b g radio disassociate from the current service set The radio then enters an off mode until it is woken again by setting the Service Set Identifier SSID Also the NDIS driver generates an NDIS media disc
170. PY source destination Example QUOTE SITE COPY Storage Card one dat Stor age CardNtwo dat Exits the FTP Server This command will shut down the FTP Server thus termina ting all client connections SITE EXIT Usage QUOTE SITE EXIT Gives site command help information SITE HELP Usage QUOTE SITE HELP command Terminates a running program SITE KILL Usage QUOTE SITE KILL program pid Opens or closes the program log SITE LOG Usage QUOTE SITE LOG open filename close Lists the running processes SITE PLIST Usage QUOTE SITE PLIST Starts a program running If the program to run has spaces in path or filename wrapping the name with single quotes is required Usage QUOTE SITE RUN program Example QUOTE SITE RUN AStorage Card app exe 246 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 7 Programming STATUS Returns the current settings of the FTP Server MAC serial number model IP ad dress network announcement information as well as OS memory usage are returned SITE STATUS Usage QUOTE SITE STATUS TIMEOUT Toggles idle timeout between 120 to 1200 seconds 2 to 20 minutes If this timer expires with no activity between the client and the server the client connection will be disconnected If the optional seconds argument is supplied the server will set the connection timeout to the number of seconds specified Default is 120 seconds or 2
171. Parameters None Return Values ERROR SUCCESS when successful Remarks None Definitions ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN_StopSupplicant else UINT StopSupplicant endif isDHCPEnabled Call this function to determine whether DHCP is enabled on the current adapter Syntax UINT isDHCPEnabled Parameters None Return Values TRUE if DHCP is enabled FALSE if it is not Remarks None Definitions ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN_isDHCPEnabled else UINT isDHCPEnabled endif RenewDHCP Call this function to force a DHCP renewal on the current network adap ter Syntax UINT RenewDHCP Parameters None Return Values ERROR SUCCESS when successful Remarks You should not have to call this function on Microsoft PocketPC 2003 or Microsoft Windows CE 4 2 NET and later devices Definitions ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT PEN_RenewDHCP else UINT RenewDHCP fendif 286 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 7 Programming GetCurrentDriverName Call this function to populate the TCHAR array with the driver name UINT GetCurrentDriverName TCHAR Pointer to a TCHAR array whi
172. ProcessorRevision 0 szCatalogNumber 100 0 szVendor 100 Intel Corporation 0 dwlnstructionSet 0 dwClockSpeed 400 H R H R nOutBufSize Should be set to sizeof PROCESSOR_INFO in bytes IpBytesReturned Returns sizeof PROCESSOR_INFO Return Values Returns TRUE if function succeeds Returns FALSE if the function fails GetLastError may be used to get the extended error value 264 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL GET CPU ID Returns Xscale processor ID Usage Zinclude oemioctl h Syntax BOOL KernelloControl IOCTL GET CPU ID LPVOID IpInBuf DWORD nInBufSize LPVOID lpOutBuf DWORD nOutBufSize LPDWORD lpBytesReturned Parameters IpInBuf Should point to a CPUIdInfo structure defined in OEMIOCTL H IpInBufSize Should be sizeof CPUIdInfo IpOutBuf Should be NULL nOutBufSize Should be set to 0 IpBytesReturned Returns sizeof PROCESSOR_INFO Return Values Returns TRUE if function succeeds Returns FALSE if the function fails GetLastError may be used to get the extended error value 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 265 Chapter 7 Programming Network Selection APIs The Network Selection APIs change the network adapter configuration programmatically Both drivers support the same IOCTL function num bers for loading and unloading the drivers Loading and unloading of the 802 11b or 802 11b g driver is
173. RS Siemens radio e ITC DEVID WANRADIO SIEMENS MC46 GSM GPRS Siemens radio ITC NVPARM 80211 INSTALLED This IOCTL reads the state of the 802 11b or 802 11b g radio installed flag A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by pOutBuffer TRUE indicates that the 802 11b or 802 11b g radio is installed FALSE indicates that no 802 11b or 802 11b g radio is installed ITC NVPARM 80211 RADIOTYPE This IOCTL reads the 802 11b or 802 11b g radio ID installed by manufacturing A BYTE is returned in the buffer pointer to by OurBuffer that indicates the type of 802 11b or 802 11b g radio hardware installed The maximum possible value returned is ITC DEVID 8021 IRADIO MAX The current definitions are e ITC DEVID 80211RADIO NONE No 802 11b or 802 11b g radio installed e TC DEVID 80211RADIO INTEL 2011B Intel 2011B radio installed 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 253 Chapter 7 Programming ID Field Values continued ITC_NVPARM_BLUETOOTH_INSTALLED This IOCTL reads the state of the Bluetooth radio installed flag A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by pOutBuffer TRUE indicates that the Bluetooth radio is installed FALSE indicates that no Bluetooth radio is installed ITC_NVPARM_SERIAL2_INSTALLED This IOCTL reads the state of the serial 2 COM2 device installed flag A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by pOutBuffer TRUE indicates that the serial 2 device is installed FALS
174. SP or network administrator Cancel Back Finish Ej 186 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 4 Network Support 5 Select 115200 from the Baud rate drop down list via the General page EF Settings ae 2 12 38 ok Advanced Baud rate Wait For dial tone before dialing Wait For credit card o sec Extra dial string modem commands Cancel if not connected in sec General Port Settings TCP IP Ej 6 Tap the Port Settings tab check Enter dialing commands manually tap ok then tap Finish to return to the Connections screen AJ settings ef dz EATE ok Advanced Connection preferences Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow control Terminal O Use terminal before connecting O Use terminal after connecting Enter dialing commands manually Port Settings TCP IP 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 187 Chapter 4 Network Support 7 Tap Manage existing connections from the Connections page press and hold the new connection for a pop up menu then tap Connect to initiate the connection 4 421240 ok My ISP To create a connection tap Mew Tap and hold on an existing connection for more options Name Number nnnertian 319 369 3828 Todes D 1 Connect Edit New General Modem Ej 8 Wait about ten seconds for the Network Log On screen then tap OK Note You do not need to enter any informat
175. Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings TTLS EAP Tunneled TLS This protocol provides authentication like EAP TLS see page 382 but does not require certificates for every user Instead authentication servers are issued certificates User authentication is done using a password or oth er credentials that are transported in a securely encrypted tunnel estab lished using server certificates EAP TTLS works by creating a secure encrypted tunnel through which you present your credentials to the authentication server Thus inside EAP TTLS there is another inner authentication protocol that you must configure via Additional Settings Use TTLS to configure the use of EAP TTLS as an authentication pro tocol and select either Open or WPA as an association mode To Enable TTLS with an Open Association default configuration 1 Set 8021x Security as TTLS 2 Set Association to Open 3 Skip Encryption as it is automatically set to WEP See page 372 for information about WEP encryption 4 Enter your unique user name and password to use this protocol Select Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each time to access the protocol or leave Use following password as selected to auto matically use the protocol without entering a password 5 Tap Get Certificates to obtain or import server certificates See page 388 for more information 6 Ta
176. Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Mobile Favorites Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 If you are using Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 0 or later on your desktop you can download mobile favorites to your 700 Color Computer Syn chronizing mobile favorites downloads Web content to your 700 Color Computer so that you can view pages while you are disconnected from your ISP and desktop Use the Internet Explorer plug in installed with ActiveSync to create mo bile favorites quickly To create a mobile favorite 1 In ActiveSync on your desktop click Tools gt Options and select Favorites from the Mobile Device list For more information on using ActiveSync see ActiveSync Help on the desktop In Internet Explorer 5 0 or greater on your desktop browse to the page you want to view offline then click Tools gt Create Mobile Favorite To change the link name enter a new name in the Name box In the Update box select a desired update schedule to keep the page in the Mobile Favorites folder up to date You can also update content by clicking Tools gt Synchronize in Internet Explorer To save the link in a subfolder of Mobile Favorites click Create In and select the desired subfolder Click OK Internet Explorer downloads the latest version of the page to your desktop To download the pages that are linked to the mobile favorite you just created in Internet Explorer on the desktop right click the mobile favorite
177. Server on page 79 Synchronizing E mail Messages After selecting Inbox for synchronization in ActiveSync e mail messages are synchronized as part of the general synchronization process During synchronization e Messages are copied from the Inbox folder on your desktop or the Microsoft Exchange server to the Inbox folder on your 700 Color Com puter Note that you can only synchronize information directly with an Exchange Server if your company is running Microsoft Mobile Infor mation Server 2002 or later By default you receive messages from the last three days only the first 100 lines of each new message and file at tachments of less than 100 KB in size Messages in the Outbox folder on your device are transferred to Ex change or Outlook and then sent from those programs The messages on the two computers are linked When you delete a mes sage on your 700 Color Computer it is deleted from your desktop the next time you synchronize Messages in subfolders in other e mail folders in Outlook are synchro nized only if they were selected for synchronization in ActiveSync For information on initiating Inbox synchronization or changing synchro nization settings see ActiveSync Help on your desktop or select Start gt Help Connections to see Connections Help 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 77 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Managing E mail Messages and Folders Each e mail account and SMS ac
178. SourceDisksNames SH3 identification of 2 SourceDisksFiles MIPS sample exe 2 Uses the SourceDisksNames MIPS identification of 2 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 229 Chapter 7 Programming DestinationDirs 0 SCE1 My Subdir Program Files My Subdir Fil Required les Common Fil les Shared 230 DestinationDirs This describes the names and paths of the destination directories for the application on the target device Note Windows CE does not support directo ry identifiers Yes file list section O subdir String that identifies the destination directory The following list shows the string substitutions supported by Windows CE Use these only for the beginning of the path V CE1 VProgram Files CE2 Windows CE3 My Documents CE4 Windows Startup CE5 My Documents CE6 Program Files Accessories CE7 VProgram Files Communication CE8 Program Files Games CEI Program Files Pocket Outlook CE10 Program Files Office CE11 Windows Start Menu Programs CE12 Windows Start Menu Programs Accessories CE13 Windows Start Menu Programs Communications CE14 Windows Start Menu Programs Games CE15 Windows Fonts CE16 Windows Recent CE17 Windows Start Menu 9oInstallDir96 Contains the path to the target directory selected during installation It is declared in the CEStrings section AppName Contains the application name defined in the CEStrings secti
179. TKIP or WEP and AES TKIP and WEP are enabled Return Values ERROR SUCCESS when successful ERR QUERY FAILED when the query failed or ERR CONNECT FAILED ifa connection with the radio failed Remarks None Definitions ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN EncryptionStatus UINT mode felse UINT EncryptionStatus UINT mode fendif 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 279 Chapter 7 Programming Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions 280 SetAuthenticationMode Call this function to set the desired authentication mode SetAuthenticationMode ULONG RADIO AUTH MODE OPEN 802 11 Open Authentication Indicates that the radio is using an open system RADIO AUTH MODE SHARED 802 11 Shared Authentication Indicates that the radio is using a shared key RADIO AUTH MODE AUTO Auto switch between Open Shared Indicates automatic detection is used when available RADIO AUTH MODE ERROR Defined as error value Indicates the authenti cation mode was not determined at this time or is unknown NDIS RADIO AUTH MODE WPA WPA Authentication NDIS RADIO AUTH MODE WLPA PSK WPA Preshared Key Authentication NDIS RADIO AUTH MODE WPA NONE WPA None ERROR SUCCESS when successful ERR QUERY FAILED when the query failed or ERR CONNECT FAILED if a connection with the radio failed None
180. TP If you are not sure which option to choose ask your network administrator Tap Next to continue Make New Connection Name My VPN 8 IPSec L2TP C PPTP VPN type 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 3 Select the type of authentication If you select A pre shared key enter the key provided by your network administrator e ESI My VPN 9o Authenticate IPSec L2TP connections using O A certificate on this device 8 4 pre shared key 4 Enter your user name password and domain name as provided by your ISP or network administrator If a domain name was not provided try the connection without entering a domain name My VPN o User name no Password Po TF provided by ISP or network administrator Ej 5 You should not need to change any Advanced settings Instances where to change advanced settings include the server to which you are con necting does not use dynamically assigned addresses and you need to enter your TCP IP settings or to change server DNS or WINS settings To change advanced settings tap Advanced Otherwise tap Finish In sert necessary equipment such as a network Ethernet card into the device and use a desired program to automatically begin connecting 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 115 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Ending a Connection To disconnect do one of
181. There are four ways to find a contact Tap Start gt Find enter the contact name first last or middle phone number or address select Contacts for the type then tap Go From Contacts start typing a contact name until you see it displayed on the screen To show all contacts again tap the text box at the top of the screen and clear the text or tap the arrow to the right of the text box In the contact list tap the category list labeled All Contacts by default and tap the category to which you have assigned a contact To show all contacts again select All Contacts To view the names of companies for which your contacts work in the contact list tap View gt By Company The number of contacts that work for that company is displayed to the right of the company name 6 Note To quickly move through a long list of contacts tap one of the sets of letters displayed at the top of the contact list This takes you to the con tact names beginning with those letters t 8 f contacts Sas Q Enter the first few letters of Business the contact in question here abl cde foh ijk Imn opa rst uw Xy Tap to jump to that por Great Nor tion of the contacts list Gruber Jim gnc integraonline e Kurth Judy heyjude08260yah Mayer Jen JLMayer5805 aol e Peanuts 2 Gruber Bah bahr linda mayo e e Gruber Bo 319 294 5312 w New Yiew Tools E Tap to toggle to By Name note the
182. Username anonymous Password Q Prompt For password ee Use m assword Ej 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 389 Appendix A Configurable Settings To Enable LEAP with WPA Encryption 1 Set 8021x Security as LEAP 2 Set Association to WPA See page 372 for information about WPA encryption 3 Skip Encryption as it is automatically set to TKIP See page 372 for more information about TKIP 4 Enter your unique User Name to use this protocol 5 Select Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each time to access the protocol or leave Use following password as selected to automatically use the protocol without entering a password ES Protie Wizard er di2a9 ok Base Securty advenced 8021x Securit LEAP Y Association Encryption Password Q Prompt for password I Use following password Ej 390 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings To Enable LEAP with Network EAP 1 Set 8021x Security as LEAP 2 Set Association to Network EAP an EAP protocol for the network See page 371 for information about EAP 3 Set Encryption to either WEP or CKIP See page 371 for informa tion about CKIP and page 372 for information about WEP encryption 4 Enter your unique User Name to use this protocol 5 Select Prompt for password to have the user enter this passwor
183. X Ej 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 3 Enter the Your name and Password information then tap Next Inbox il d 2 16 E mail Setup 3 5 User information Your name Adam Barr User name Ada MRE ek RE Password L Save password Enca Ca en Ej Edit 7X 4 Select the appropriate service type from the Account type drop down list either POP3 or IMAP4 or enter a new account type then tap Next Inbox 4 E 2 18 E mail Setup 4 5 Account information Account type POP3 X Name POP3 Edit 7X 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 5 In Incoming mail enter the name of your e mail server In Outgoing mail enter the name of your Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP host If you are using a network connection enter your domain name in Domain Tap Options to do additional configurations Tap Finish to assign this service EE EIU E mail Setup 5 5 Server information Incoming mail Out Outgoing mail In Domain il Edit X E When finished to connect to your e mail server from the Inbox applica tion tap Accounts gt Connect For more information on using the Inbox application see Inbox Sending and Receiving E mail Messages on page 77 118 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 3 Installing Appl
184. a document First make sure that no drawings are selected tap and hold anywhere on the document then tap Insert Date from the pop up menu Typing Mode Using the input panel enter typed text into the document For more in formation on entering typed text see Basic Skills on page 30 To format existing text and to edit text first select the text You can select text as you do in a Word document using your stylus instead of the mouse to drag through the text you want to select You can search a document to find text by tapping Edit gt Find Replace Tap and hold to see a pop up menu of actions Tap to return to the document list changes are saved automatically Format Paragraph Recognize Tap to change Alternates format options spell Check Tap to format text Tap to show or hide the toolbar 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 83 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 84 Writing Mode In writing mode use your stylus to write directly on the screen Ruled lines are displayed as a guide and the zoom magnification is greater than in typing mode to allow you to write more easily For more information on writing and selecting writing see Basic Skills on page 30 EF Pocket word a ETE With Space icon selected drag to insert space An arrow appears showing the space direction and size Tap to highlight selected text ap to s
185. a general UDP broadcast This parame ter is useful on networks that do not allow UDP broadcasts to be routed between subnets The use of this parameter restricts the reception of the IDNA to the target destination only Key HKLM Software Intermec IFTP Value Type REG_SZ Valid Range None Default None ManifestName This parameter configures the Intermec FTP Server to transmit the speci fied manifest name in the IDNA This parameter is used by the Intermec 6920 Communications Server for communication transactions See the 6920 Communications Server documentation for proper use of this pa rameter Key HKLM Software Intermec IFTP Value Type REG_SZ Valid Range None Default iftp ini PauseAtStartup This parameter configures the Intermec FTP Server to sleep for the speci fied number of seconds before making the FTP service available on the device Key HKLM Software Intermec IFTP Value Type REG DWORD stored in seconds Valid Range None Default 0 Root This parameter configures the Intermec FTP Server to set the root of the FTP mount point to the specified value Note that this must map to an ex isting directory or you will not be able to log into the FTP Server Key HKLM Software Intermec IFTP Value Type REG_SZ Valid Range None Default 244 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 7 Programming Transferring Files Over TCP IP Networks The File Transfer Protocol FTP server
186. actFlash card from your desktop and reinstall it into the 700 Color Computer 8 Warm boot the 700 Color Computer to add these files to the Compact Flash storage card If the AUTOUSER DAT file is found and the RUN statement is cor rect the task manager launches and executes your program on startup Copying to a Secure Digital Storage Card 1 Suspend the 700 Color Computer and remove its Secure Digital drive which holds a Secure Digital storage card 2 Using a Secure Digital Adapter card place the Secure Digital drive in your desktop PC card drive 3 Create a subdirectory on the PCMCIA Secure Digital drive in which to store your application 4 Use the CEImager application to add the autorun system to the storage card See the Software Tools Users Manual to learn about CElmager 5 Copy your application data files and all required DLLs and drivers to the subdirectory created on the Secure Digital drive 6 Add your application to the AUTOUSER DAT file on the ASDMMC Disk 2577 directory with the following statement RUN lt your directory gt lt yourapp exe gt where your directory is the directory on the Secure Digital storage card where the application was installed and yourapp exe is the name of your application Finish the RUN statement with a carriage return line feed combination There may be multiple run statements in the file 7 Remove the Secure Digital card from your desktop and reinstall it into the
187. ademarked name we state that we are using the names only in an editorial fashion and to the benefit of the trademark owner with no intention of infringement There are U S and foreign patents pending Microsoft Windows and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG Inc U S A This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit www opensssl org This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young EAY cryptsoft com Wi Fi is a registered certification mark of the Wi Fi Alliance CERTIFIED ii 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Document Change Record This page records changes to this document The document was originally released as Revision A Revision B Date 11 2002 04 2003 08 2003 01 2004 04 2004 01 2005 07 2005 Description of Change Added information about the Siemens MC45 radio module the tethered scanner CAB extraction FTP Server parameters and Data Collection control panel applet imager op tions Added information about the ambient light sensor the beeper keypad sequences the alphanumeric keypad the vibrator an accessories list programming notifications the MaxiCode symbology the Utilities control panel applet and the Wireless Network con trol panel applet Upgraded Pocket PC 2002 informatio
188. al 5 Chapter 1 Introduction Power If your computer shuts down because of low battery conditions your com puter does not operate This is done to ensure that data is protected Al though the battery does protect the data against loss for several hours you should connect your computer to a power source when you first detect a low battery condition Your computer contains an internal super capacitor a temporary power storage device that protects data for up to ten minutes This is to give you time to replace the main battery pack before that data is lost Be sure to put the computer in a suspend mode before doing so If you have at least one device in your 700 Color Computer radio scan ner imager or Ethernet the battery power fail level is set so that after the system shuts down in a low battery condition there is still sufficient charge to allow the unit to remain configured keep proper time and maintain DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory for at least 23 to 32 hours at room temperature f the main battery remains in the mobile computer The configuration and time are lost if The battery discharges beyond this level The battery is removed when the computer is not in suspend mode A cold reset is performed on the computer You can modify RAM maintenance in a limited way On the 700 Color Computer tap Start Settings the System tab the Power icon the Battery tab Drag the top slider bar to the right to
189. ale processor ID IOCTL GET CPU ID 265 409 Index General Index Numbers 1470 Imager See Imager 1551 1553 Tethered Scanner See also Tethered scanner configuring 218 reset to factory defaults 221 troubleshooting 221 1D laser scanner about 207 1D OmniDir Decode Enable configuration parameter 342 2D Imager about 207 4820 printer NPCP driver 199 6804DM printer DTR driver 204 IrDA driver 198 6804T printer DTR driver 204 IrDA driver 198 6805A printer DTR driver 204 IrDA driver 198 6806 printer DTR driver 204 IrDA driver 198 6808 printer DTR driver 204 IrDA driver 198 printer support 197 681T printer DTR driver 204 6820 printer IrDA driver 198 NPCP driver 199 printer support 197 6920 Communications Server ManifestName parameter 244 740 Color Computer 292 781 printers DTR driver 204 782T printer printer support 197 802 11 antenna color code 133 API 267 channel 374 communications setup 135 373 configuration profiles 267 CORE module 138 LEAP network EAP 391 WPA encryption 390 network type 374 PEAP network EAP 380 WPA encryption 379 profile label 374 410 profile security information WEP encryption 376 profiles 373 advanced settings 392 basic information 374 security information 375 SSID network name 374 TTLS WPA encryption 386 WPA authentication Zero Configuration 111 WPA authentication with pre shared key Zero Config uration 112 WPA encryptio
190. all CEDevice settings This will create a CAB file specific to MIPS devices ProcessorType 4000 MIPS CAB file is valid for MIPS microprocessor UnsupportedPlatforms pltfrm2 pltfrml pltfrm2 unsupported for MIPs CAB file L4 Note To create the two CPU specific CAB files for the SETUP INF file in the previous example run the CAB Wizard with the cpu arm mips parameter 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 227 Chapter 7 Programming Defaultinstall This describes the default installation of your application Note that under this section you will list items expanded upon later in this description Required Yes e Copyfiles copyfile list section Maps to files defined later in the INF file such as Files App Files Font and Files Bitmaps AddReg add registry section Example RegSettings All CEShortcuts shortcut list section String that identifies one more section that defines shortcuts to a file as defined in the CEShortcuts section e CESetupDLL setup DLL Optimal string that specifies a SETUP DLL file It is written by the In dependent Software Vendor ISV and contains customized functions for operations during installation and removal of the application The file must be specified in the SourceDisksFiles section CESelfRegister self reg DLL filename String that identifies files that self register by exporting the DllRegister Server and DllUnregisterServer
191. and to offer forward compatibility with 802 111 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Configuring Your Wireless Network D d Wireless Network To start 802 11b or 802 11b g communications on the 700 Color Computer tap Start gt Settings gt the System tab gt Wireless Network to access the Profile Wizard for the 802 11b or 802 11b g radio module A profile contains all the information necessary to authenticate you to the network such as login name password or certificate and protocols by which you are authenticated You can have up to four profiles for different networks For example you may have different login names or passwords on different networks or you may use a password on one network and a certificate on another Use the Profiles page to select and configure between the networking envi ronments assigned to this 802 11b or 802 11b g radio y Profile Wizard Ped 1 20 ok Profiles Import Export Profile Poe E Edit Selected Profile _ Enable Microsoft s Wireless Zero Config Security powered by Odyssey Ej Profile Tap the drop down list to choose between four different profiles as signed to this unit then tap Edit Select Profile make the changes need ed for this profile starting on the next page then tap OK to return to the Profiles page Enable Microsoft s Wireless Zero Config Check this box to enable Mi
192. anning IP DHCP Enabled 0 0 0 0 Watchdog Status Not Running Last 5 Supp Msgs State Idle 08 12 50 Authenticated 08 11 35 Auth key Wait 08 11 35 Success 08 11 35 Encryption WEP Power Auto Authenticating 08 11 35 Open Link 11 Mbps Supplicant Status Running meets F Ru Ame Signal 93 dem History esre i General Detals General Detail CORE Modules Configure Ej CORE Modules Configure E 802 11 CF CORE General 802 11 CR CORE Details Details Below are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information pro vided via the Details tab Note the information is listed alphabetically Attach Roam Cnt Includes the number of new associations made during the current session due to roaming The number is reset on suspend resume cycles CCX Status States the status of the CCX features either enabled or disabled Desired SSID Identifies the preferred Service Set Identifier SSID Driver Name Identifies the 802 11b or 802 11b g driver installed on this 700 Color Computer Last 5 Supp Msgs Monitors and reports the 802 11 Security Supplicant activity Scanlist Indicates whether the Scan List option was enabled or disabled Supplicant Status Monitors the 802 11 security activity on the client Running or Stopped 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 139 Chapter 4 Network Support CDMA 1xRTT CORE Module 760 Computers with WAN Radios
193. ant For example you can easily share your device with another by assigning your appointments to a category with a special project s name You can then use this category to filter Calendar and only display appointments for that project 6 Note In Month View the day of an appointment assigned to the Holiday category appears in red ES catendar 4 21 23 9 March 2005 Sa gt 5 M T wW T F 5 This day was assigned the Holiday category Tap to access the Month view 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 51 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 52 What s an All Day Event An appointment can either be a normal appointment or an all day event which lasts the full day or spans many days Examples include a trade show a vacation or a seminar You can also use all day events to schedule an annual event such as a birthday or anniversary In this case change the Status box to Free you may need to scroll to see it so that it does not show time as busy in your calendar All day events do not occupy blocks of time in Calendar they appear in banners at the top of the calendar Note You cannot modify or create all day events with attendees on the device If you create all day events with attendees on your desktop use Ac tiveSync to copy such events to the device Then view them in Calendar For more information on copying files see ActiveSync Help To use the device to schedule an appointment with attendees lastin
194. arameters ULONG Specifies the key index to be set Valid values are 0 3 BOOL When set to TRUE specifies that this key is the default transmit key TCHAR Pointer to a character array that specifies the key data in either HEX length of 10 or 26 or ASCII length of 5 or 13 This string must be null terminated Return Values ERROR SUCCESS when successful ERR QUERY FAILED when the query failed or ERR CONNECT FAILED if a connection with the radio failed Remarks When adding WEP keys to the radio turn off encryption before you add the keys then turn en cryption back on afterwards Also be sure to add the TRANSMIT KEY last Definitions ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT PFN_AddWep ULONG BOOL TCHAR else UINT AddWep ULONG BOOL TCHAR endif EnableWep Enables or disables WEP encryption on the radio TRUE FALSE Syntax UINT EnableWep BOOL Parameters Set BOOL to TRUE to enable WEP encryption or FALSE to disable WEP encryption Return Values ERROR SUCCESS when successful ERR QUERY FAILED when the query failed or ERR CONNECT FAILED ifa connection with the radio failed Remarks Call this function with TRUE as the parameter to enable WEP encryption Call this function with the FALSE parameter to disable WEP encryption This call is an alias for EncryptionStatus See the following EnableWEP TRUE EncryptionStatus NDIS ENCRYPTION 1 ENABLED EnableWEP FALSE EncryptionStatus NDIS ENCRYPTION
195. ata Matrix QR Code RSS 14 RSS Limited RSS Expanded Codablock A Codablock F UCC Composite 222 The user interface may allow configuration of PDF417 Micro PDF417 RSS and Codablock bar code symbologies However these symbologies are dependant on what scanner models and firmware versions are in use See the following table for a guideline and Appendix B Bar Code Symbol ogies for more information on each supported symbology You can use a generic ASCII scanner with the 700 Color Computer Pending on the scanner linear symbologies such as Code39 should de code correctly However 2D symbologies such as PDF417 may not de code correctly gt gt PA PX 9X A pA pA KKM X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Available in 1551 0808 PDF Available in 1551 0808 PDF Sxxp217_ or later F w version 2 15 or later F w version 2 15 or later F w version 2 15 or later F w version 2 15 or later F w version 2 15 or later F w version 2 15 or later Available in 1551 0808 PDF Available in 1551 0808 PDF 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 7 Programming The following programming information pertains to the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Creating CAB Files page 224 Customization and Lockdown page 24 I FTP Server page 242 Kernel I O Control Functions page 250 Network Selection APIs page 266 Notifications page 289 Reboot Functions page 291 Remapping the Keypad page 292 L4 Note 700 C
196. ategory 2 eee cece eee 69 Copying n Contact qo ny Coat aa eee ee E nr 69 Sending a Message to a Contact ves Foe deci od xa pue cob ae cie x a Ve paid 70 E MT Er EAE A E nia Eie 71 Deleting 3 Contact reie A A 71 Adding a Contact to Speed Dial cians ches Maa awe elie Ces 72 Changing Contacts Options vis aaa EET DER Pee ERE Pa 72 Tasks Keeping a To Do List Lis acne tii beatae a Rew oe Ta eo Mw WE eee 73 Creatina ET E Ee 74 Synchronizing Tasks sci sue ch ed eer e OR E TAE De abs 74 Notes Capturing Thoughts and Ideas untar e RE EE 75 Greating aNoie ict ida A ey See IS 75 Synchronizing Notes ini o iS 76 Inbox Sending and Receiving E mail Messages secocisineia eed ee ere 77 Synchronizing E mail Messages 41 411 arde es aa 77 Managing E mail Messages and Folders o oo nunuhun naear 78 Connecting toa Mall Severa pu de ee aea a 79 Composing and Sending Messages 00 cece eect ete eens 81 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual vii Contents Companion Programs cirio aj Di ale ck irc i ovine th site teer bia 82 Pocket Word atie taa cu et aid psa Rs Paci Guth A yee RA eti Pp S oia 82 Creating a Document e dave hea pain cr RUP Sais Seas ia n 82 Typing Mod s hat ale rs obe hei cuan Ran avant nd ei 83 Watne MOS ameter arene Cte cto ar ren LU Oe are mene ip Qa rare ee rer ee t 84 R cotditig Mode esee aene nina orbe d da Sect a ins MESI ave 84 Drawing Mode iia ele As 85 Synchronizing Pocket Word Documents
197. ationStatus cesses ee 269 GetAuthenticationMode 1 0 cc ccc cece eee eee eas 270 GEABSSIDO 4 3 eui e epe sna saeta alargarse 270 GetDiversity ise been ete eem recedens 271 GetbinkSp ed odes os EROR Se Na Sb A 271 GetMac v E E Ere prre e eri mu RR RAMS 272 GetNetworkMode lee rh hes 272 GetNetwork D ypel uc gcc e tero ew poke ET eb e ped P DB UP 273 GetSSID ie dee iua Gann ven bI Gaus VU ka oe Ends 273 GetPowerMode o wits eet eee a alte ee eA e OR TN 274 GEER SST Os aes tives vetere eate e mare tete Qa to tite e t tds 274 GetIXPower o eeen enaa ag ce eee e es 275 GetWepStatus O dd daa when dns Rt dca dl e A a ud 276 GerRadiolpAddres srta ipt eb et Ce s 277 Get EX Status 2 eee PO DERE CPG CERE EE rei e ner ed 277 Set Information Functions 1 0 0 0 ccc cece eee teen s 278 Seb WepLk uti 3 084 aoc pe ebd ala tea indir ed dod Sala th beer 278 Enable W eB ui ed doe oi e ceri d eod dos de pd de e ta ond 278 Encre LION SALMO o a E qas ad Sue Nares t 279 SetAuthenticationMode enre nirea eia a a eee eee eens 280 SetChannel 12i toto a ii ie eru euis qs 280 S tNetwork Mode ui eR esteem eres 281 SetPowerMode 2 525 er ii dt MEI PER 281 SES SID Weisser PIDE 282 SetGGXStatus Goes tears at ee see esu p ers tpe so Rte pe A 282 SetMixedCellMode sseeeeeeee RR RII RI e 282 Remove Web ud saca ice aime octo oos ice bandh EO E pete e te aa on pod 283 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual
198. ave Application 1 On the 700 Color Computer double click the REGFLUSH CAB file to load the Registry Save application 2 Set up the 700 Color Computer to your specifications using the Inter mec Settings applet and other control panel applets s 3 Select Start Settings the System tab the Utilities icon the Regis try Save tab then check both Enable Registry Storage and Enable RTC Utilities Restore to enable the registry save flag Tap ok to close then close the Settings EF des3s QD Utilities Registry sektings can be saved between cold boots The registry is saved during device resets or when applications use the ReaFlushkey Function Enable Registry Storage If enabled the real time clock can be restored on a cold boot Enable RTC Restore Dock Switch Registry Save Wakeup Mad 4 gt Ej 4 Select Start gt Programs gt the Registry Save icon to run the Registry Save application then tap ok when told the registry has been saved Registry Save Registry Save ok The Registry has been saved 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 125 Chapter 3 Installing Applications Confirming the New Registry File To confirm whether the new registry file exists do the following ES 1 On the 700 Color Computer select Start gt Programs gt the File Ex plorer icon then tap My Device gt Flash File Store Press and hold your File Explorer stylus in the white area fo
199. b Clear the Enable Registry Save box s e Utilities Registry settings can be saved between cold boots The registry is saved during device resets or when applications use the RegFlushkey Function Ol Enable Registry Storage If enabled the real time clock can be restored on a cold boot Enable RTC Restore Dock Switch Registry Save Wakeup Mad a gt E 2 Copy the CAB files for your carrier to your CompactFlash or Secure Digital storage card after downloading it from the web site 3 Cold boot your 760 Computer Remove the battery pack and press the reset button in the bottom of the battery compartment 4 Go through the normal getting started steps detailed in your 700 Color CDMA Radio Setup Quick Start Guide 5 Install the CompactFlash or Secure Digital memory card into the card slot in your 760 Computer Note that if you do not want the CAB files erased after installation set the CAB file attributes to read only afier copy ing them to the storage card 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 163 Chapter 4 Network Support pe 6 Tap Start gt Programs gt the File Explorer icon on the 760 Computer 7 Tap the pull down menu for My Documents and tap the My Device File Explorer root location 8 If you are using a CompactFlash storage card tap Storage Card Ifyou are using an Secure Digital storage card tap SDMMC Disk 9 Scroll down then tap the Sprint Watcher CAB file to instal
200. be able to ship devices with the Pocket PC logo Although many customers want a Pocket PC device some customers would prefer that their users not have access to all of the Pocket PC featu res Intermec cannot customize the operating system in any way but a cus tom application can Delete items from the Start menu and Programs folder These items are just shortcuts in the file system so the ap plication is not really being deleted Cold booting the device will bring these items back so the application will need to be run on every cold boot Use the RegFlushKey API to save a copy of the registry to a storage device See the 700 Color Management Tools portion for more information on how to do this Saving a copy of the registry restores most system settings in a cold boot situation Use the SHFullScreen API in conjunction with other APIs to make the application take up the entire display and prevent the start menu from being available Remap keys and disable keys on the keypad Create a custom SIP Make changes to the registry to configure the device Should you want your 700 Color Computer to display a full screen keep in mind that your computer is Pocket PC certified by Microsoft Corpora tion Check out resources on programming for the Pocket PC using the following links These give full instructions on how to display full screen Instructions on how to create a full screen application for eVC ap plications using an SHF
201. bilities i ene und ero ll dd Barack labs 216 For Units With PSM Build 3 00 or Newer i lese Rhe hn 218 Configuring the Tethered Scanner i einai p RR RR EROR uae pad es 218 Troubleshooting the 1551E 1553 Tethered Scanner 000 221 Res t Factory D faulis A SNe a Ve pte iid dta 221 Tethered Scanner Supported Symbologies iesvpekebracbTy rr vp twee ete XA 222 7 Programming 3245 pigs Ao cds mb AE tede opuesto AO ed ae 223 Creatine CAB Piles MEC HR PI C 224 Creating Device Specific CAB Files 205 eos A EDU Rr Fed 224 Creatine an INE Pilea rd etude Ret gud Qd 224 Sample INFE File 143 2 5 ppp Eon Rr aet ao bet eor pe 233 Using Installation Functions in SETUP DLL 12 eek rmn RR em 236 After the CAB File EXT Leo doce bI alee redet pa bs Samay 236 Creating CAB Files with CAB Wizard a sun a d heus Fx RUE ees 239 Troubleshooting the CAB Wizard iu c3 vea sa ea o dos aca cR 240 Customization and Lockdown iocis Ver RR e EY TER RR REX IRAN NE ERE EE 241 ETP SErvera id dar os O VO dolar Grape vo A alc ioa ulti de dcn 242 Configurable Parameters Via the Registry Editor a eet tanh x EX he 243 Dock ize Seo a bonc qot ege eda Face tp bab a Aur ect E 243 DeviceName opo ete e beef ro eee ates Govt ep Qo pa rp reete cauta 243 DeviceURL 50004 estem ee ie da ka mita t Nes RSA ERROR bs 243 I NA Target a nsi P einen BAe eh Sonal when dn DA PET 244 ManifestName syiar ioc ele lactic the ae coa leat ope aia 244 PauseAtStartups orice p tup P
202. c TEXT LPT 9 TEXT STORAGE CARD WINDOWS NPCPPORT d11 DWORD port 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 199 Chapter 5 Printer Support Opening the NPCP Driver The application opens the NPCP driver by using the CreateFile function The call can be implemented as follows The first parameter LPT9 must reflect the device name and index used in the RegisterDevice function call and will fail for any of the following reasons hFile CreateFile T LPT9 GENERIC WRITE GENERIC READ 0 NULL OPEN ALWAYS FILE ATTRIBUTE NORMAL NULL The port associated with the device during RegisterDevice is in use The NPCP device is already open The share mode is not set to zero The device cannot be shared Access permissions are not set to GENERIC WRITE GENERIC READ Both modes must be specified Closing the NPCP Driver Using the CloseHandle hFile function closes the NPCP driver Where hFile is the handle returned by the CreateFile function call TRUE the device is successfully closed FALSE an attempt to close NULL HANDLE or an already closed de vice Reading from the NPCP Driver Reading of the NPCP printers is not supported since all responses from the printer are the result of commands sent to the printer DeviceloControl functions are provided where data is to be received from the printer W
203. c Technologies recommends that you use the Wireless Network control panel applet instead as it offers more security choices and exhibit better roaming behavior Information about the Wire less Network control panel applet is in Appendix A Networks already configured are preferred networks and are listed in Wireless networks You can connect to only preferred networks or search for and connect to any available network A wireless network can be added either when the network is detected or manually by entering settings information To determine if authentication information is needed see your network administrator 1 Tap Start gt Settings gt the Connections tab gt the Connections icon Pd iio Q Connections o To set up or change connection information tap one of the Following links My ISP Add a new modem connection My Work Network Add a new modem connection Add a new YPN server connection Set up my proxy server Ej 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 2 Tap the Advanced tab gt Network Card gt the Wireless tab gt Add New E settings Configure Wireless Nebworks o Add New 4 335 Unavailable A No SSID Unavailable Networks to access All Available X O Automatically connect ta non preferred networks Wireless Network Adapters Adapters Ej 3 Tap the General tab then enter a network name If the network was detected the network
204. cations use the RegFlushkey Function Enable Registry Storage Registry settings can be saved between cold boots The registry is saved during device resets or when applications use the ReaFlushkey Function Enable Registry Storage If enabled the real time clock can be restored on a cold boot Enable RTC Restore Dock Switch Registry Save Wakeup Mad 4 gt Ej Dock Switch Registry Save Wakeup mag 4 gt Ej 700 Color Screen 730 Screen 8 Remove the storage card from the desktop PC and install the card into the 700 Series Computer 9 Perform a cold boot on the 700 Series Computer Files automatically install from the storage card upon reboot Any calls to the RegFlushKey API automatically writes the registry to the appropriate location x Note Both the warm boot and the cold boot procedures via the software API also flushes the registry 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 129 Chapter 3 Installing Applications Migrating from a 700 Monochrome Computer As you migrate from a 700 Monochrome Computer to a 700 Color Com puter you need to consider the following When converting a 700 Mono chrome Computer application to run on the 700 Color Computer most APIs should work without changes Below are a few exceptions e The 700 Monochrome Computer uses the Storage Card folder for nonvolatile storage You may need to change the application to store data onto the SDMMC Disk f
205. ch contains the name of the driver when successful ERROR_SUCCESS when successful This function is called with a pointer to a TCHAR array that is large enough to hold the name of the driver PLUS the null terminator ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT PFN_GetCurrentDriverName TCHAR else UINT GetCurrentDriverName TCHAR fendif ResetRadioToSystemSave Call this function to force the radio to reset to the last desired active pro file UINT ResetRadioToSystemSave None ERROR SUCCESS when successful None ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN ResetRadioToSystemSave else UINT ResetRadioToSystemSave endif EnableSuppLogging Call this function to set the desired supplicant logging mode UINT EnableSuppLogging ULONG NDIS SUPP LOGGING ON NDIS SUPP LOGGING OFF ERROR SUCCESS when successful None Supplicant Logging Enabled Supplicant Logging Disabled ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN EnableSuppLogging ULONG else UINT EnableSuppLogging ULONG endif 287 Chapter 7 Programming Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions SwitchPacketDriver Call this function to switch between available packet drivers on the system UINT SwitchPacketDriver USHORT INTERMEC_PACKET_DRIVER Intermec Packet Driver ZNICZIO NDISUIO_PACKET_DRIVER Microsoft Packet Driver NDISUIO ERROR_SUCCESS when successful
206. col This protocol is part of the IEEE 802 11i encryption standard for wire less LANs which provides per packet key mixing a message integrity check and a re keying mechanism thus overcoming most of the weak points of WEP This encryption is more difficult to crack than the stan dard WEP Weak points of WEP include Z o Installation Vector IV reuse protection Weak keys No protection against message replay Z o detection of message tampering Z o key updates WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy encryption With preconfigured WEP both the client 700 Color Computer and access point are assigned the same key which can encrypt all data be tween the two devices WEP keys also authenticate the 700 Color Com puter to the access point unless the 700 Color Computer can prove it knows the WEP key it is not allowed onto the network WEP keys are only needed if they are expected by your clients There are two types available 64 bit 5 character strings 12345 default and 128 bit 13 character strings 1234567890123 Enter these as either ASCII 12345 or Hex 0x3132333435 WPA Wi Fi Protected Access This is an enhanced version of WEP that does not rely on a static shared key It encompasses a number of security enhancements over WEP including improved data encryption via TKIP and 802 11b or 802 11b g authentication with EAP WiFi Alliance security standard is designed to work with existing 802 11 products
207. count has its own folder hierarchy with five default folders Inbox Outbox Deleted Items Drafts and Sent Items The messages you receive and send through the mail account are stored in these folders You can also create additional folders within each hierarchy The Deleted Items folder contains messages that were deleted on the de vice The behavior of the Deleted Items and Sent Items folders depends on the Inbox options you have chosen The behavior of the folders you create depends on whether you are using ActiveSync SMS POP3 or IMAP4 e Ifyou use ActiveSync e mail messages in the Inbox folder in Outlook automatically synchro nize with your device You can select to synchronize additional folders by designating them for ActiveSync The folders you create and the messages you move are then mirrored on the server For example if you move two messages from the Inbox folder to a folder named Family and you have designated Family for synchronization the server creates a copy of the Family folder and copies the messages into that folder You can then read the messages while away from your desktop If you use SMS messages are stored in the Inbox folder Ifyou use POP3 and you move e mail messages to a folder you created the link is broken between the messages on the device and their copies on the mail server The next time you connect the mail server sees that the messages are missing from the device Inbox and deletes them from
208. crosoft s Wireless Zero Config application This effectively disables the Intermec software solution for 802 11b or 802 11b g including configuration via the CORE application and the Wireless Network control panel applet 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 373 Appendix A Configurable Settings Basic Use the Basic page to set the network type name and manage battery power for this profile Tap ok or OK to return to the Profiles page Profile Label Enter a unique name for your profile Network type Tap the drop down list to select either Infrastructure if your network uses access points to provide connectivity to the corporate network or internet or Ad Hoc to set up a private network with one or more par ticipants Channel If you selected Ad Hoc for the network type select the channel on which you are communicating with others in your network There are up to 11 channels available SSID Network Name This assumes the profile name unless another name is entered in this field If you want to connect to the next available network or are not familiar with the network name enter ANY in this field Consult your LAN administrator for network names Enable Power Management Check this box to conserve battery power default or clear this box to disable this feature AR Profile Wizard Hdi ok ad Basic security Advanced Profile Label Profile_1 Network ty
209. d default Mod 10 transmitted Mod 10 not transmitted Any length Minimum length default Fixed lengths Minimum length 001 254 Minimum length 1 254 default is 6 Fixed length 1 000 254 Fixed bar code length 0 254 default is 0 Fixed length 2 000 254 Fixed bar code length 0 254 default is 0 Fixed length 3 000 254 Fixed bar code length 0 254 default is 0 Check digit Bar code length 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 0 1 p x Note If Bar code length 1 then Minimum length is entered If Bar code length 2 then Fixed length 1 Fixed length 2 or Fixed length 3 is entered Settings Pd Ero Data Collection amp Standard 2 of 5 lt 0001006000000000 gt a Decoding lt Not active gt E PO Format lt Identicon 6 start stop bars Check digit Mot used Bar code length Minimum length Symbologies Symbology Options Beeper_ 4 gt New Tools Accounts 2 mj 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 305 Appendix A Configurable Settings Codabar Codabar is a self checking discrete symbology Action Tap to expand the Codabar parameter select a setting to be changed then select an option from the drop down list to change this setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 1 1 5 1 Options Decoding Not active default Active Start Stop Not transmitted default abcd transmitted ABCD transmitted abcd tn e transmitted DC1 DC4 transmitted Not active defau
210. d programs from the Internet or intranet ZEUG 798 To switch to Pocket Internet Explorer on your 700 Color Computer tap Start gt Internet Explorer The Mobile Favorites Folder Favorite Links 96 Only items stored in the Mobile Favorites subfolder in the Favorites folder in Internet Explorer on your desktop are synchronized with your 700 Col or Computer This folder was created automatically when you installed ActiveSync During synchronization the list of favorite links in the Mobile Favorites folder on your desktop is synchronized with Pocket Internet Explorer on your 700 Color Computer Both computers are updated with changes made to either list each time you synchronize Unless you mark the favor ite link as a mobile favorite only the link is downloaded to your 700 Color Computer Connect to your ISP or network to view the content 1 In ActiveSync on your desktop click Tools gt Options and select Fa vorites from the Mobile Device list For more information on using ActiveSync see ActiveSync Help on the desktop 2 In Internet Explorer on your desktop save or move favorite links to the Mobile Favorites subfolder in the Favorites list via Favorites gt Organize Favorites For more information on using Internet Explorer see nternet Explorer Help on the desktop 3 Connect your 700 Color Computer to your desktop If synchronization does not start automatically in ActiveSync on your desktop click Sync 700
211. d an aster isk Default is no characters Parameter information is on page 344 AD Postamble For Virtual Wedge Postamble the first part of the bar code would be be low followed by a string of up to 31 characters no lt NUL gt and an aster isk Default is no characters Parameter information is on page 346 4AE 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 399 Appendix A Configurable Settings 400 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual B Troubleshooting This appendix contains a brief explanation of what you can do to trouble shoot your 700 Color Mobile Computer 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 401 Appendix B Troubleshooting The 700 Color Computer does not respond when connected to a power supply Make sure your ac adapter or dock is plugged in and is making good con tact with your mobile computer The 700 Color Computer will not turn on when the 1 0 key is pressed The battery may be low and need recharging The Power status LED starts blinking The Power status LED provides the status of your battery pack when it is connected to a charging device See Chapter 1 Introduction for LED descriptions The 700 Color Computer will not turn on and the screen is blank The battery may be critically low Put your mobile computer in a charger for at least five minutes remove it from the dock then press the I O but ton The screen should turn on Put your mobile comp
212. d each time to access the protocol or leave Use following password as selected to automatically use the protocol without entering a password 52 Profile Wizard ez O Basic Security Advanced 8021x Security LEAP Association Encryption Network EAP WEP Y Password O Prompt for password e Use Ped A assword Ej 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 391 Appendix A 392 Configurable Settings Advanced Use this page to configure additional settings for this profile Tap ok or OK to return to the Profiles page Detect Rogue APs Wireless NICs and APs associate based on the SSID configured for the NIC Given an SSID the BSSID with the strongest signal is often cho sen for association After association 802 1x authentication may occur and during authentication credentials to uniquely identify a user these are passed between the NIC and the AP The base 802 1x technology does not protect the network from rogue APs These can mimic a legitimate AP to authentication protocols and user credentials This provides illegal users ways to mimic legitimate us ers and steal network resources and compromise security Check this box to detect and report client behavior suspected of being rogue APs Once a rouge AP is detected your 700 Series Computer no longer associates with that AP until you perform a warm boot Clear this box to solve AP connection prob
213. d to by the OuzBuffer parameter ITC_NVPARM_MANF_DATE This IOCTL returns the device date of manufacture in the BCD YYYY MM DD format Four bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the OurBuffer parameter ITC_NVPARM_SERVICE_DATE This IOCTL returns the device s date of last service in BCD YYYY MM DD format Four bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the pOuzBuffer parameter 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 251 Chapter 7 Programming ID Field Values continued ITC_NVPARM_DISPLAY_TYPE This IOCTL returns the device s display type One byte is returned in the buffer pointed to by the OutBuffer parameter ITC_NVPARM_EDG_IP This IOCTL returns the device Ethernet debug IP address Four bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the IpOutBuffer parameter ITC NVPARM EDBG SUBNET This IOCTL returns the device Ethernet debug subnet mask Four bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the 4p OutBuffer parameter ITC_NVPARM_ECN This IOCTL returns ECNs applied to the device in a bit array format Four bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the pOurBuffer parameter ITC_NVPARM_CONTRAST This IOCTL returns the device default contrast setting Two bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the IpOutBuffer parameter ITC_NVPARM_MCODE This IOCTL returns the manufacturing configuration code for the device Sixteen bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the OurBuffer param
214. dar tap the appointment then tap Edit 2 Tap the Notes tab to enter notes For specific instructions tap Start gt Help gt Notes to see Notes Help These are controls for the recorder Use your stylus to write or draw your informa tion here Tap to activate the keyboard Tap to activate the writing pad Tap to activate the recorder 4 Note To edit an existing note tap the appointment in the calendar tap Edit then tap the Notes tab 58 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Making an Appointment Recurring Do the following to make a recurring appointment 1 In the calendar tap the appointment then tap Edit 2 Tap Occurs and select a pattern from the list Or to create a new pat tern tap lt Edit pattern gt and follow the steps in the wizard T Calendar 9f et 42701 ole Subject Staff Meeting bd Location Starts 9 00 AM T Ends 10 00 AM All Day No Select your recurrence pattern from this drop down list Occurs Ur Reminder Once Every Monday Day 14 of every month Categories Every February 14 Attendees lt Edit pattern Status Busy Sensitivity Normal Appointment notes Edit Ej Select lt Edit pattern gt to access the wizard with which to custom ize your recurrence 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 59 Chapter 2 Win
215. dditional Settings Ej 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings To Enable TLS with WPA Encryption 1 Set 8021x Security as TLS 2 Set Association to WPA See page 372 for information about WPA encryption 3 Skip Encryption as it is automatically set to TKIP See page 372 for more information about TKIP 4 Enter your unique Subject Name and User Name as credentials for this profile 5 Tap Get Certificates to obtain or import server certificates See page 388 for more information 6 Tap Additional Settings to set options for server certificate validation and trust See page 384 for more information ES Profile wizard ef d 239 ok Basic Security advanced 3021x Security ns Association Encryption WPA Y reap T Get Certificates Additional Settings Ej 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 383 Appendix A Configurable Settings Additional Settings 1 Check Validate Server Certificate to verify the identity of the authenti cation server based on its certificate when using PEAP or TLS 2 Enter the Common Names of trusted servers Note that if these fields are lefi blank the server certificate trust validation is not performed or required 3 Click ok to return to the Security page AJ Profile Wizard izar O Certificate Settings O Validate Server Certificate Ej 384 700
216. ding files to the 700 Color Computer without any prior configuration x Note If a network driver is unloaded using the NDISTRAY popup menu and the FTP Server is running the FTP Server is stopped On a resume if AutoFTP is enabled and the FTP Server is running it is stopped and restarted NDISTRAY uses a helper application named RESE TIFTP to implement the restart on resume feature To do an AutoFTP Installation Check 1 Ensure the FTP Server is running out of the box the first time 2 Tap Start gt Today to access the Today screen then tap the antenna icon in the System Tray to bring up the NDISTRAY pop up menu Select AutoFTP Off to disable AutoFTP Do a warm boot and confirm the FTP Server is not running Built in Ethernet Wireless 802 11 No networking AutoFTP On AutoFTP Off 3 Tap Start Today to access the Today screen then tap the antenna icon in the System Tray to bring up the NDISTRAY pop up menu Select AutoFTP On to enable AutoFTP reboot confirm it is running Built in Ethernet Wireless 802 11 No networking AutoFTP On AutoFTP Off 4 Unload the network driver when the FTP Server is running and con firm that it is not running any more 5 Load the FTP Server establish a connection then suspend and resume The server should still run but the FTP connection to the client should be dropped 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 249 Chapter 7 Programming Kernel 1 0
217. dows Mobile 2003 60 Assigning an Appointment to a Category 1 In the calendar tap the appointment then tap Edit 2 Tap Categories 3 On the Select tab select the categories to which you want to assign the appointment 4 To create a new category tap the Add Delete tab enter the category name then tap Add The new category is automatically selected in the Select tab 5 Tap ok to return to the appointment Calendar g gt d 7 06 fok Business Holiday Personal Reviews Staff A check mark indicates a selected category Select addrDelete Edit Ej x Note To find an appointment assigned to a category tap Tools Catego ries and select the type of appointment that you want displayed T o show all appointments again tap Tools Categories and clear all categories 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Sending a Meeting Request Use Calendar to schedule meetings with people who use Outlook or Pock et Outlook When attendees receive a meeting request they can accept or decline the meeting If they accept the meeting is automatically added to their schedule In addition their response is sent back to you and your calendar is updated Before you can send a meeting request you must enter e mail addresses in Contacts Help and set up Inbox to send and receive messages For more information on sending and receiving meeting requests tap Start gt Hel
218. e To see more contact information tap the contact To see a list of available actions for a contact via a pop up menu tap and hold the contact To see a list of contacts employed by a specific company tap View By Company Then tap the desired company name Note You can change the appearance of the contact list by tapping Tools Options Edmonds De dedmondsadee in e Emig Irvin Emigir ncs com e Ww Indicates the 319 294 5312 Work Tel default number 319 393 6012 Home Tel 319 329 4339 Mobile Tel bgruber aol com E mail Tap for a list of phone numbers and e mail addresses Klees Dottie dale klees mcleod Kurth Judy heyjude0826 yah Linda Bahr bahr linda mayo e MAAS ROBE dudnbert msn c Mayer Jenny JLMayer5S805 aol Retchless N nathan retchless Welarde Sus Susan Velarde Wad New Yiew Tools Ej Tap to toggle By Name and By Company views nananana 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Creating or Changing a Contact To create a contact tap New To enter notes tap the Notes tab When finished tap ok to return to the contact list To change a contact tap it in the contact list and then tap Edit To cancel edits tap Edit gt Undo When finished making changes tap ok to return to the contact list Z Note If you enter a name with more than two words the middle word is recorded as a m
219. e The following is a guide to more information to assist you use your 700 Color Computer For information on See this source Programs on your mobile computer This chapter and mobile computer Help To view Help tap Start gt Help Additional programs that can be installed on the mobile The Windows Mobile Companion CD computer Connecting to and synchronizing with a desktop The Quick Start Guide or AutoSync Help on your desk top To view Help click Help gt Microsoft ActiveSync Help Last minute updates and detailed technical information The Read Me files located in the Microsoft ActiveSync folder on the desktop and on the Windows Mobile Com panion CD Up to date information on your Windows Mobile www microsoft com windowsmobile resources commu nities default mspx Windows Mobile and many of the technologies supported by the 700 Col or Computer are not from Intermec Technologies Many of the utilities and features on a Windows Mobile device come directly from Microsoft without any modification from Intermec Technologies There may be cer tain Microsoft specific issues that Intermec Technologies would not be able to support so contact our front line support personnel to determine the best source of assistance Use these URLs for additional information about Microsoft Windows Mobile Pocket PC e http msdn microsoft com support http support microsoft com news news microsoft com a free support option
220. e default Active Not used default Mod 10 transmitted Mod 10 not transmitted French CIP transmitted French CIP not transmitted Any length Minimum length default Fixed lengths Minimum length 003 254 Minimum length 3 254 default is 6 Fixed length 1 003 254 Fixed bar code length 3 254 default is 3 Fixed length 2 003 254 Fixed bar code length 3 254 default is 3 Fixed length 3 003 254 Fixed bar code length 3 254 default is 3 Check digit Bar code length 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 6 Note If Bar code length 1 then Minimum length is entered If Bar code length 2 then Fixed length 1 Fixed length 2 or Fixed length 3 is entered AY settings giu Data Collection E Interleaved 2 of 5 lt 001006000000000 E Decoding Not active gt i Check digit Nat used Bar code length Minimum length Minimum length lt 6 gt E Change PDF417 Setting O Not active 8 Active T Symbologies 5ymbology Options Beepell 4 gt New Tools Accounts 1 mj 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 317 Appendix A Configurable Settings Matrix 2 of 5 Matrix 2 of 5 is a numerical symbology Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer Action Tap to expand the Matrix 2 of 5 parameter select the setting to be changed then tap an option to change this setting or select an option from the drop down list SNMP OI
221. e the LED temporarily switches from red to yellow to indicate a good scan This also indicates a Calendar or Task activity occurred Modem Support The 700 Color Computer has the following modem options Modem dock that provides charging and includes a built in modem and a serial port between which an application can switch Snap on modem a stand alone product that attaches to the bottom of your 700 Color Computer Note that you cannot place this modem in a dock printer or other devices Contact your Intermec representative for more information 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 17 Chapter 1 Introduction PSM Build Version The Persistent Storage Manager PSM is an area of storage which is em bedded in a section of the system s FLASH memory This storage area is not erased during a cold boot It may however be erased during the re flashing process In addition to storing applications and data files you do have the option to store a persistent registry to the PSM region To determine what PSM Build is on your 700 Color Computer tap Start po Programs File Explorer Access the Flash File Store folder from the File Explorer My Device root directory then tap the PSMinfo text file Take note of your information then tap ok to exit PITE y Pocket word PSM Build 3 77 5 9 2005 New Edit View Tools f Ej 18 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 1
222. e Pulse dialing box If your type is tone dialing as most phone lines are then clear the Pulse dialing box Continue to tap ok to close each page and return to the Settings page reg ES settings e dina m Work o Country code Area code 425 _ Disable call waiting _ Pulse dialing Dialing Patterns Edit Ej 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 103 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Z Connecting to Work 104 To start the connection start using one of the following programs Once connected you can Send and receive e mail messages by using Inbox Before you can use Inbox you need to provide the information it needs to communicate with the e mail server For specific instructions see Connecting Directly to an E mail Server on page 116 Visit Web and WAP pages by using Pocket Internet Explorer For more information see Pocket Internet Explorer on page 96 e Send and receive instant messages with MSN Messenger For more in formation see MSN Messenger on page 87 Note To change modem connection settings in My ISP tap Manage existing connections Select the desired modem connection tap Settings and follow the instructions on the screen If you have access to a network at work you can send e mail messages view intranet pages synchronize your 700 Color Computer and possibly access the Internet You can connect to work in one of two ways Create a modem connection by
223. e detailed information CORE is built into the operating system of every 760 or 761 Computer To run CORE for the first time select Start gt Programs gt File Explorer select Flash File Store Apps CORE then tap the CORE executable file After CORE is run on the 760 or 761 Computer tap Start gt Programs gt Core to access this application henceforth Note To deactivate CORE tap CORE gt Fxit from within the CORE application Install an Available Radio Module To install an available radio module onto your 760 or 761 Computer tap Modules gt Add Remove select a module from the bottom Available box then tap Add to put the selected module in the upper Installed box Click OK to exit the Add Remove Modules screen Loading a Radio Module P File Explorer To load or switch to another radio module installed on the 760 or 761 Computer tap Modules gt Choose Module select a module from the Installed Modules box then tap Choose to initialize and begin using that module To learn more about this application see its online help Tap Start gt Programs gt File Explorer and select Flash File Store Apps CORE then tap the corehelp HTM file 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 137 Chapter 4 Network Support L4 Note Once CORE is running you can return to it by tapping its icon from the System Tray via the Today screen Tap Start gt Today gt the Core three ring icon circled in the
224. e feature is to be disabled or one TRUE if the feature is to be enabled ITC_DOCK_SWITCH This IOCTL sets a position of the dock switch The dock switch may be set to either modem or serial positions IpOutBuf must point to a buffer that contains a byte value of either DOCK MODEM or DOCK SERIAL as defined in OEMIOCTL H the value specifies the position the switch is to be set The call appears as follows port DOCK_MODEM or DOCK_SERIAL as defined in oemioctl h BOOL SetDockSwitch BYTE port DWORD cmd ITC_DOCK_SWITCH DWORD cbRet return KernelloControl IOCTL HAL ITC WRITE SYSPARM amp cmd sizeof cmd amp port sizeof port amp cbRet ITC_ WAKEUP MASK This IOCTL sets a bit mask that represents the mask for the five programmable wakeup keys The I O key is not a programmable wakeup key By default it is always the system resume key and all other keys are set to disable key wakeup A zero in a bit position masks the wakeup for that key A one in a bit position enables wakeup for that key IpOutBuf must point to a buffer that contains a byte value of a wakeup mask consisting of the OR ed constants as defined in OEMIOCTL H Only the following keys are programmable as wakeup events define SCANNER TRIGGER 1 define SCANNER LEFT 2 define SCANNER RIGHT 4 define GOLD A1 8 define GOLD A2 0x10 ITC AMBIENT KEYBOARD does not apply to the 730 Computer This IOCTL sets the threshold for the keypad ambient
225. e memory Note The size column in the message list displays the local size and server size of a message Even when a message has downloaded fully these num bers may differ because the size of a message can vary between the server and the device 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Composing and Sending Messages To compose a message 1 In the message list tap New 2 To select an account tap the From list and select ActiveSync SMS or the desired e mail account 3 Enter the e mail address or SMS address of one or more recipients sepa rating them with semicolons To access addresses and phone numbers from Contacts tap To 4 Enter your message To quickly add common messages tap My Text and tap a desired message 5 To check spelling tap Edit gt Spell Check 6 Tap Send If you are working offline the message is moved to the Out box folder and is sent the next time you connect a Tap to show or hide the complete header Edit My Text ES Ej Tap to show or hide the recording tool bar Tap to display the Address Book Tap to insert common preset messages x Note If you are sending an SMS message and want to know if it was re ceived before sending the message tap Edit Options Request SMS text message delivery notification You can directly call the sender of an SMS message by tapping the icon p shown to the left then Call
226. e mobile computer The process of activating the ability for the CDMA radio to establish data connections such as connecting to the Internet The CDMA radio makes data connection only after it is activated and data provisioned A numeric value programmed into the CDMA radio at the factory or during the activation process Your carrier may or may not use this value but your carrier may provide this for ac tivation purposes A numeric value programmed into the CDMA radio at the factory or during the activation process This number is used by your carrier to determine if the radio belongs to its CDMA network Your carrier may provide this number for activation purposes Z Note Descriptions in this chapter are for Sprint PCS Bell Mobility Te lus and Verizon Networks versions of the SB555 Watcher program Oth er carriers may be added pending regulatory and carrier approval Copying CDMA Radio Module CAB Files from Intermec Web Site 162 Copy CAB files from the Intermec web site at www intermec com onto your desktop Note that this is subject to change 1 Select Service amp Support gt Developers Library from the blue naviga tion bar on the Intermec home page 2 Select 700 Color Support from the Developers Library navigation co lumn on the left side of the screen 3 Select Downloads from beneath the 700 Color Support selection in the Developers Library navigation column on the left side of the screen 4 Select WW AN fro
227. e preferred location on your 700 Series Computer Microsoft ActiveSync FTP Server page 122 Secure Digital or CompactFlash storage cards page 122 Registry page 123 Using Microsoft ActiveSync Ww Note These instructions assume the 700 Color Management Tools were installed on your desktop The Microsoft ActiveSync tool is located on the 700 Color Companion CD See Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 for information about this tool as provided by Microsoft Corporation This can be a serial USB Ethernet InfraRed or 802 11b ActiveSync con nection Files can be copied using File Explorer on a desktop or a laptop computer This is usually good when updating few 700 Color Computers Note The 730 Computer does not support Ethernet These instructions assume that Microsoft ActiveSync was installed onto your desktop and is up and running If not go to Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 for an URL from which to download the latest application 1 Connect your 700 Color Computer to your desktop computer via an ActiveSync cable or IrDA 2 Wait for a Connected message to appear in the Microsoft ActiveSync application to signal a connection to the 700 Series Computer If neces sary select File Get Connected to initiate a connection 43 Microsoft ActiveSync El x File View Tools Help 9 OO a E Sync Stop Details Explore Options Pocket PC 761 Connected Synchronized Informat
228. e to Dd na A mE d eR rS tA 292 Gold Bang 5 eode pde Pte Sh Ub ALL i So cla oe teat abu acies pga ett 292 Alpha Bitte lanes so x io tete n c Rate cien RA Et odas Qd 293 Key Valesi duis Aux Rasta Obstet AS dern M one feelin dad ear O 293 A ean Rer DICE Rd EU Rd da ENS qudd 293 Alphanumeric Keypad accio eR Eta REA poca 293 How Key Values Are Stored in Registry cano Pas o EE a oad ERR 294 Change Notification 5e ea evene rot re BA aes Seat awed gal cs Baci 294 Advanced Keypad Remapping ius space ria ku Va ERE pack Face began Ro E MER 294 Sem Codes oastei ecd cn Wo Vaca LA On Ra on Vox Wace dre SAU dn Wc Caf vacate up 295 Numeric Keypad is ape nda oda y pA Aia A 295 Alphanumeric Keypad ica rper Ee RU a tU EET DERE ERES 296 Sample View of Registry eyes ii ameet erac niece adest wa e a cete 298 A Configurable Settings t Totus 299 Configuration Parameters st s vet eut deese E ed 300 Changing a Parameter Setting daras 300 About Configuration Parameters c Moe eek anal ad ek rl oca eed el 301 xiv 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Contents Data Collection Control Panel Applet 4 asi des een tte da 302 SMI DO LOB Les Gioca bu bacs Vac ol veas ose caus vasi aaa Denia eati duda vont 303 Code Dort bet red oce Ca cote hee A aca ueni c eA eR nc Moi scat iod 304 Standard 2 0P eke eite du eens cien eda ra ale va eee gels ode ors 305 Codab lala ai 306 UPC EAN A O NN 307 A Geeta RIS UL es eens teehee LL a een es 308 Code 1
229. e to change this setting Note that values must be in 50 ms increments such as 500 650 or 32500 Values not entered in 50 ms increments are rounded down For example 2489 ms is rounded down to 2450 ms 149 ms is rounded down to 100 ms etc SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 3 1 1 24 1 Options 0 65535 ms Default is 1000 Settings Pd E Q Data Collection Aimer LED Duration msecs A Sticky Aimer Duration msecs lt 1000 gt amp Image Dimension 000639000479 gt Lighting Made LED Priority 1D OmniDir Decode Enable Mot Available FREE eum OPES es iB Sticky Aimer Duration msecs Setting Beeper LED Imager Virtual Wedge ale New Tools Accounts E mlj 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 339 Appendix A Configurable Settings Image Dimension The image dimensions control the vertical size of the image for decoding This can restrict the image to one bar code when otherwise there might be more than one bar code in the image to be decoded Note that this is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Color Computer Action Tap the Image dimension parameter select the position to be changed then tap an option or enter a value to change this position SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 3 1 1 22 1 Options Left position Not supported Right position Not supported Top position Position in pixels Default is 0 Bottom position Position in pixels Default
230. e using the macro PDF control header transmitted with each label Control Header is only present in macro PDF codes and is always transmitted with unbuffered option Action Tap to expand the PDF417 parameter tap to expand the Macro PDF parameter select a setting to be changed then select an option to change this setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 1 1 22 1 Options Macro PDF Jnbuffered uffered default Not transmitted default Transmitted Control header Not transmitted default Transmitted File name Not transmitted default Transmitted Segment count Jot transmitted default Time stamp N Transmitted Sender Not transmitted default Transmitted Addressee Jot transmitted default N Transmitted Not transmitted default Transmitted File size Checksum Not transmitted default Transmitted 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 EET ee EIU Data Collection Bg Macro PDF options lt 000000000 gt E Macro PDF lt Unbuffered gt A Control header lt Not transmitted File name lt Not transmitted gt i Segment count lt Not transmitked I DeFaults Apply Symbologies Symbology Options Beepe 4 gt Ej 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 315 Appendix A 316 Configurable Settings Micro PDF417 Micro PDF417 is a multi row symbology derived from and closely based on PDF417 page 314 A limited se
231. eSync Help on your desktop Typing Using the input panel enter typed text into the 700 Color Computer You can do this by tapping keys on the onscreen keyboard or by using handwriting recognition software Writing Using the stylus write directly on the screen Drawing Using the stylus draw directly on the screen Recording Create a stand alone recording or embed a recording into a document or note Use the input panel to enter information in any program on your 700 Color Computer You can either type using the onscreen keyboard or write using Block Recognizer Letter Recognizer or Transcriber In either case the characters appear as typed text on the screen To show or hide the input panel tap the Input Panel icon Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel icon to see your choices Options Block Recognizer Keyboard Letter Recognizer Transcriber Select an input method New Tools EE Tap to see your choices Input Panel icon 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 When you use the input panel your 700 Color Computer anticipates the word you are typing or writing and displays it above the input panel When you tap the displayed word it is inserted into your text at the insertion point The more you use your 700 Color Computer the more words it learns to anticipate e 223 D Subject Status Me E Location ing Starts 1
232. eateFile T DTR1 GENERIC WRITE 0 NULL OPEN ALWAYS FILE ATTRIBUTE NORMAL NULL The first parameter DTR1 must reflect the device name and index used in the RegisterDevice function call The function call will fail for any of the following reasons The port associated with the device during RegisterDevice is currently in use The DTR device is already open The share mode is not set to zero The device cannot be shared e Access permissions are not set to GENERIC WRITE Closing the DTR Driver Using the CloseHandle hFile function closes the DTR driver Where hFile is the handle returned by the CreateFile function call TRUE indicates the device is successfully closed FALSE indicates an attempt to close a NULL HANDLE or an already closed device Writing to the DTR Driver You can use the WriteFile function to send all Print data to the printer The print data being written must contain the proper formatting printer commandis DTR Printer Communications All DTR printer communications should be based on the following flow 1 Use CreateFile to open the printer driver 2 Use WriteFile to write your data to the printer Check for errors and that all data were written 3 Use CloseHandle to close the driver 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 205 Chapter 5 Printer Support 206 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 6 Scanner Support
233. ecommendation V 25 ter Serial asynchronous automatic dialing and control 4 Note You need the Adobe Acrobat Reader application to view a PDF do cument Go to www adobe com prodindex acrobat readstep html to install or download the latest Adobe Acrobat Reader Command Set for Sierra Wireless SB555 Use the AT command interface from Sierra Wireless to program the CDMA 1xRTT SB555 radio module Documentation for this interface is available via the following URL Click the General AT command refer ence link for a PDF document which is 680 KB in size Note that this URL is subject to change www sierrawireless com ProductsOrdering embedded_docs html Command Set for Siemens MC45 or MC46 Use the MC45 or MC46 AT command interface from Siemens AG to program the GPRS GSM MC45 or MC46 radio module The MC45 Siemens Cellular Engine AT Command Set and the MC46 Siemens Cellu lar Engine AT Command Set are available either from Intermec Technolo gies or from Siemens AG Contact either your Intermec representative or the Siemens AG support personnel at the following URL for more infor mation Note this URL is subject to change www siemens mobile com btob CDA presentation ap_btob_cda_presentation_front door 0 2950 12 FF html 184 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Testing the AT Commands These commands can be sent to either WAN radio by setting up a dial up networking connection to CO
234. ection In the Select a modem list select your modem type then tap Next to con tinue If your modem type does not appear try reinserting your 700 Color Computer into your modem dock If using an external modem connected to your 700 Computer with a cable select Hayes Compatible on COM1 f using any type of external modem select the modem by name If a listing does not exist for your external modem select Hayes Com patible on COMI Wireless connections can be made via a mobile phone network or GPRS If using a mobile phone network to connect select Cellular Line If using GPRS tap Cellular Line GPRS E Settings i d 1 35 Make New Connection Q Enter a name For the connection Company Connection Select a modem Hayes Compatible on COMI cancer naci Ej 3 Enter the access phone number using some of the following guidelines If you know part of the phone number changes frequently as you travel create dialing rules to avoid creating numerous modem connections for the same phone number For more information tap Use Dialing Rules Enter the phone number exactly as you want it dialed For example if you call from a business complex or hotel that requires a nine be fore dialing out enter 9 in front of the phone number Enter the APN provided by your mobile phone service provider When using dialing rules phone numbers are entered differently To use additional
235. efaultInstall MIPS CopyFiles Files Common Files MIPS 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 231 Chapter 7 Programming AddReg This section under the DefaultInstall section is optional and describes the keys and values that the CAB file adds to the device registry Within the DefaultInstall section a reference may have been made to this section such as AddReg RegSettings All This section defines the options for that setting Required No add registry section registry root string String that specifies the registry root location The following list shows the values supported by Windows CE HKCR Same as HKEY CLASSES ROOT e HKCU Same as HKEY CURRENT USER HKLM Same as HKEY LOCAL MACHINE e add registry section value name Registry value name If empty the default registry value name is used add registry section flag Numeric value that specifies information about the registry key The following table shows the values that are supported by Window CE Flag Value Description FLG ADDREG NOCLOBBER 0x00000002 If the registry key exists do not overwrite it Can be used with any of the other flags in this table FLG ADDREG TYPE SZ 0x00000000 REG SZ registry data type FLG ADDREG TYPE MULTI SZ 0x00010000 REG MULTI SZ registry data type Value field that follows can be a list of strings separated by commas FLG ADDREG TYPE BINARY 0x00000001 REG BINARY registry data type Value f
236. egistry to the PSM region e f the optional Secure Digital or CompactFlash storage card is in the system then consider this card the primary location for placing an ap plications install files The following folders represent either card The Secure Digital storage card creates the SDMMC Disk folder The CompactFlash storage card creates the Storage Card folder Z Note The 730 Mobile Computer does not support the Compact Flash storage card Use the small non volatile Flash File Store region to hold CAB files that rebuild the system at cold boot or install applications from a CAB file into the Flash File Store so they are ready to run when a cold boot is performed Since the FLASH in the system has a limited number of write cycles do not use the Flash File Store for excessive writing pur poses however reading is okay Files copied to any of these locations are safe when a cold boot is performed on a 700 Color Computer providing the AutoRun system is installed in the appropriate location You can find this system in the 700 Color Management Tools portion Copying a CAB file to the CABFILES folder on one of these cards automatically extracts that CAB file on every cold boot to ensure that your system is properly set up see page 130 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 3 Installing Applications Installing Applications Consider any of the following options to get the package to th
237. elect formatting options such as pen weight and line color Space icon Pen icon Note If you cross three ruled lines in a single stylus stroke the writing becomes a drawing and can be edited and manipulated as described in Drawing Mode on the next page Note Written words are converted to graphics metafiles when a Pocket Word document is converted to a Word document on your desktop Recording Mode In recording mode embed a recording into your document Recordings are saved as WAV files For more information on recording see Basic Skills on page 30 For more information on using Pocket Word tap Start gt Help gt Pocket Word to see Pocket Word Help 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Drawing Mode In drawing mode use your stylus to draw on the screen Grid lines appear as a guide When you lift your stylus off the screen after the first stroke a drawing box indicating the boundaries of the drawing appears Every sub sequent stroke within or touching the drawing box becomes part of the drawing For more information on drawing and selecting drawings see Basic Skills on page 30 Resize an object by dragging the selection handles Tap to select formatting options such as line weight fill color and line color Tap an arrow to see your choices Pen icon Synchronizing Pocket Word Documents Pocket Word documents can
238. ence for the decimal format You only need to provide one number to your carrier The decimal format consists of 11 digits beginning with 099 The hexadecimal format is an 8 digit number beginning with 63 Accounts for Verizon and Sprint carriers can be set up for data only Cana dian carriers Telus and Bell Mobility can be set for data only voice only or both voice and data This is determined by your application and the services your carrier offers After the all ESNs are provided to the carrier and the carrier has estab lished the accounts you will be provided with the lock codes and tele phone numbers needed to complete the activation process You use the SB555 Watcher program to accomplish this task Be sure to write down this information for future use Note Ensure that you receive a spreadsheet with your order that calls out all ESNs in both decimal and hexadecimal formats 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 165 Chapter 4 Network Support Note Keep the activation information for your devices in a safe accessible ES place should you have any future issues Note Not all of the elements listed are required by all service providers ESN of the modem Lock Activation Code may be termed one of the following MSL Master Subsidy Lock e OTSL OneTime Subsidy Lock SPC Service Provisioning Code OTKSL One Time Key Subsidy Lock SID System ID NID Network ID User
239. er Bath Power Keyboard KI Ej 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Audio System The audio system consists of the speaker internal microphone and the external headset jack Speaker A speaker capable of variable volume levels is located on the back of the computer This speaker has a transducer volume of 85 dB min at 10 CM and a frequency range of 1 8 KHz Speaker 700 Color Computer 730 Computer Warning Do not place the speaker next to your ear when the speaker volume is set to Loud maximum or you may damage your Warning hearing 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 3 Chapter 1 Introduction Microphone The built in microphone is located on the bottom of the unit next to the Hirose docking connector Charging Docking Microphone connector This is the bottom of the 700 Color Computer Note that the keypad is to the bottom in this illustration External Headset Jack The external headset jack connects a mobile phone style headset to your mobile computer for use in noisy environments The jack is a 2 5 mm three conductor jack with autosensing of the headset jack insertion which disables the internal speaker and microphone The external headset jack is located on the bottom of the mobile computer next to the Hirose docking connector Charging Docking Headset jack A connector This is
240. er on your 700 Color Computer tap ES to display your list of favorites 2 Tap the AvantGo Channels link 3 Tap Activate 4 Follow the directions on the screen Synchronize your 700 Series Com puter with your desktop then tap My Channels to complete the Avant Go setup 5 When synchronization is complete tap the AvantGo Channels link in your list of favorites to see a few of the most popular channels To add or remove channels tap the Add or Remove link Using Pocket Internet Explorer 98 You can use Pocket Internet Explorer to browse mobile favorites and chan nels that were downloaded to your 700 Color Computer without connect ing to the Internet You can also connect to the Internet through an ISP or a network connection and browse the Web file uindowsidefault htm Microsoft Pocket Internet Explorer Welcome to Pocket Internet Explorer Nat online yet Find out how to get connected and save offline content fatermec AvantGo PocketPC com view Tools 4 X c3 sy Ej Favorites icon Home icon Refresh icon 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Viewing Mobile Favorites and Channels 1 Tap the Favorites icon to display your list of favorites 2 Tap the page you want to view LE interme Explorer 47 4 12 59 fok Favorites E Mobile Favorites p AvantGo Channels Ag MSN Mobile 9 Pocket PC Web Guide 2 Pocket PC co
241. er tips V Display simple folder view in Explorer s Folders list V Display the contents of system folders V Display the full path in the address bar v Display the full path in the title bar C Do not cache thumbnails 5 Hidden files and folders Do not show hidden files and folders Show hidden files and folders O Hide extensions for known file types vil a 3 Using the Microsoft ActiveSync application on your desktop click Ex plore to access the Flash File Store folder on your 700 Color Computer and locate the registry file Copy this file then paste it in a temporary location on your desktop Explore 4 Remove the 700 Color Computer from the cradle and put another 700 Color Computer in its place The ActiveSync application on your desk top should connect to the new unit 5 Follow the instructions for Deleting the Old Registry File starting on page 124 put the new registry file in the root of the Flash File Store folder on the new 700 Color Computer enable the registry save flag via the Utilities applet perform a warm boot and make sure these settings are saved Updating the System Software You can use the ntermec Recovery CD to reinstall or update the operating system software on the 700 Color Computer For more information con tact your Intermec representative 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 127 Chapter 3 Installing Applications Migrating Applications 2
242. es batch files or other files within this publication 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 403 Index Classes and Functions A add_registry_section AddReg flags 232 registry_root_string 232 value_name 232 AddReg DefaultInstall 228 AddReg add_registry_section flags 232 registry_root_string 232 value_name 232 AddWep 278 ANT DIVERSITY GetDiversity 271 ANT_PRIMARY GetDiversity 271 ANT_SECONDARY GetDiversity 271 AppName CEStrings 225 Asset management DeviceURL parameter 243 Basic connect disconnect functions 268 BlockSize FTP Server 243 BuildMax CEDevice 226 BuildMin CEDevice 226 C CEDevice BuildMax 226 BuildMin 226 Processor Type 226 UnsupportedPlatforms 226 VersionMax 226 VersionMin 226 CESelfRegister DefaultInstall 228 CESetupDLL DefaultInstall 228 CEShortcuts DefaultInstall 228 CEShortcuts shortcut_list_section shortcut_filename 233 shortcut_type_flag 233 target_file path 233 target_file_path 233 CESignature SourceDiskNames 228 Version 224 CEStrings AppName 225 InstallDir 225 ClassID field values VN CLASS ASIC 252 VN CLASS BOOTSTRAD 252 VN CLASS KBD 252 CloseHandle DTR printing 204 205 IrDA printing 198 NPCP printing 199 200 404 Cold boot IOCTL HAL COLDBOOT 260 ConfigureProfile 283 Copyfiles DefaultInstall 228 CopyFiles file list section destination filename 231 flags 231 s
243. es DataBase 0 InstallDir DataBase Files BitMaps 0 SInstallDir Bitmaps Files Fonts 0 InstallDir Fonts Files Intl 0 InstallDir Intl Files TelecomNcsCE 0 InstallDir Telecom NcsCE Files Windows 0 InstallDir Windows Files Import 0 InstallDir Import Files Export 0 InstallDir Export Files Work 0 InstallDir Work Files WinCE 0 storage_card wince CEStrings Required section AppName Rp32 InstallDir storage_card AppName Strings Optional section Shortcuts Al11 Sample App 0 sample exe Uses the path in DestinationDirs Sample App 0 sample exe SInstallDirs The path is explicitly specified Files App 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 7 Programming fmtctrl dll 0 ugrid dl1 0 simple dll 0 psink dll 0 pslpwce dll 0 npcpport dll 0 dexcom dll 0 Files DataBase rpmdata dbd 0 Files Fonts tahoma ttf 0 Files BitMaps intermec bmp 0 rpmlogo bmp 0 rpmname bmp 0 import bmp 0 export bmp 0 clock bmp 0 printer bmp 0 filecopy bmp 0 Files Intl lang eng bin 0 Files TelecomNcsC ncsce exe 0 ntvunetdll Ld e Files Windows readme txt 0 Files Import readme txt 0 Files Export readme txt 0 Files Work readme txt 0 Files WinCE wcestart ini 0 RegSettings All HKLM SOFTWAREMMicrosoftNShellN
244. espective acceptable data values Command Syntax Audio Volume BVdata Automatic Shutoff EZdata Backlight Timeout DFdata Key Clicks KCdata Virtual Wedge Grid AFdata Virtual Wedge Postamble AEdata Virtual Wedge Preamble ADdata 4 Note See pages 344 and 346 for more information about the Virtual Wedge Postamble and Virtual Wedge Preamble commands Example 1 To change the Beep Volume to Off you can send this string to the 700 Color Computer through the network Bv0 where 4 Indicates Change Configuration BV Specifies the Audio Volume parameter 0 Specifies a value of Off Example 2 To change the Beep Volume to Very Quiet and the Virtual Wedge Grid to 123 BV1AF123 where 4 Indicates Change Configuration BV1 Specifies Audio Volume set to Very Quiet 1 AF123 Specifies Virtual Wedge Grid set to a value of 123 394 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Set Time and Date This command sets the date and time on the 700 Color Computer The default date and time is June 1 1999 at 12 00 AM From the network send the following yyyymmddhhmmss where acceptable values for the date are yyyy 0000 9999 Year mm 01 12 Month of the year dd 01 31 Day of the month hh 00 23 Hour mm 00 59 Minutes ss 00 59 Seconds You can also set the time and date by using Configuration Management in 24 Unit Manager or by using the Clock control panel applet in the Settin
245. ess Table The subnet mask associated with ipAddrTable the IP address of this entry same as Subnet Mask Configuring with SNMP The community string allows an SNMP manager to manage the 700 Col or Computer with a specified privilege level The default read only com munity string is public and private is the default read write communi ty string See the specific configuration parameter to find its OID To configure the 700 Color Computers using SNMP 1 Configure 700 Color Computers for RF or Ethernet communications 2 Determine the OID Object Identifier for the parameter to be chan ged The Intermec base OID is 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 3 Use your SNMP management station to get and set variables that are defined in the Intermec MIBs You can set the traps identification or security configuration parameters for SNMP See Appendix A Confi gurable Settings to learn more about these parameters 196 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 5 Printer Support The 700 Series Color Mobile Computer works with the following printers from Intermec Technologies Contact an Intermec representative for infor mation about these printers 6820 A full page 80 column printer 6808 A 4 inch belt mount printer e PB20 A 2 inch belt mount printer with a Bluetooth compatible module from Socket Communications e 782T A 2 inch workboard printer Z Note 700 Color pertains to 740 741 750 751 7
246. est a return authorization 1 On site Repair number for authorized service center repair or request an on site repair technician Technical Support Get technical support on your Intermec product Service Contract Inquire about an existing Status contract renew a contract or ask invoicing questions Schedule Site Surveys Schedule a site survey or request or Installations a product or system installation Ordering Products Talk to sales administration place an order or check the status of your order Outside the U S A and Canada contact your local Intermec representative To search for your local representative from the Intermec web site click Contact 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual xxi Before You Begin Who Should Read this Manual Related Documents This manual provides you with information about the features of the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer and how to configure troubleshoot and support it You must be familiar with your host PC your network and your other Intermec equipment This table contains a list of related Intermec documents and their part numbers Document Title Part Number 700 Color with Windows Mobile 2003 Quick Start Guide 962 054 069 730 Mobile Computer Quick Start Guide 962 054 068 Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual 073529 700C Recovery CD Windows Mobile 2003 Edition English 235 110 001 Kit The Intermec web site at www intermec com contains many of our
247. eter ITC NVPARM VERSION NUMBER This IOCTL returns the firmware version for various system components These values for the Classld field of the PARMS structure are allowed when ITC NVPARM VERSION NUMBER is used in the d field VN CLASS KBD Returns a five byte string including null terminator that contains an ASCII value which represents the keypad microprocessor version in the system The format of the string is x xx with a terminating null character VN CLASS ASIC Returns a five byte string including null terminator that contains an ASCII value which represents the version of the FPGA firmware in the system The format of the string is x xx with a terminating null character e VN CLASS BOOTSTRAP Returns a five byte string including null terminator that contains an ASCII value which represents the version of the Bootstrap Loader firmware in the system The format of the string is x xx with a terminating null character ITC NVPARM INTERMEC SOFTWARE CONTENT This IOCTL reads the manufacturing flag bits from the non volatile data store that dictates certain software parameters A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by pOutBuffer that indicates if Intermec Content is enabled in the XIP regions TRUE indicates that it is enabled FALSE indicates that it is not enabled ITC NVPARM ANTENNA DIVERSITY This IOCTL reads the state of the antenna diversity flag A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by pOutBuffer
248. etworks and provide you the opportunity to configure them Creating a VPN Server Connection to Work A VPN connection helps you to securely connect to servers such as a cor porate network via the Internet Ask your network administrator for the following User name Password Domain name TCP IP settings Host name or IP address of the VPN server To view additional information for any screen in the wizard or while changing settings tap the Help icon ae Note To change existing settings in My Work Network tap Manage existing connections gt the VPN tab Select the desired VPN connection tap Settings and follow the instructions on the screen 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 113 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 98 1 Tap Start gt Settings gt the Connections tab gt the Connections icon J Tap Add a new VPN server connection beneath My Work Network to Connections initiate this procedure Connections To set up ar change connection information tap one of the Following links My ISP Add a new modem connection My Work Network Add a new modem connection Add a new YPN server connection Set up my proxy server Settings Par ro e Ej 114 In Name enter a name for the connection such as a company s name In Host name IP enter the VPN server name or IP address Next to VPN type select the type of authentication to use with your device IPSec L2TP or PP
249. ext Note Tap arrows to turn the page or tap and hold page number to bring up page riffle 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Searching for Text Copying Text Adding Bookmarks Highlighting Text Attaching Notes to Text Adding Drawings Annotations Index Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Using Reader Features Reading a book electronically gives you several options not available with paper books These options are available from any book page Select text by dragging across the text on the page Then tap an option on the pop up menu as described here Find text in a book by tapping Find on the pop up menu Enter the word you want to search for and tap the desired Find option Reader highlights found text on the page To close Find tap outside the box To return to your original page tap the title and then tap Return on the pop up menu You can copy text from books that support this feature into any program that accepts text On a book page select the text you want to copy Then tap Copy Text on the pop up menu The text can be pasted into the program of your choice When you add a bookmark to a book a color coded bookmark icon appears in the right margin You can add multiple bookmarks to a book Then from anywhere in the book tap the bookmark icon to go to the bookmarked page When you highlight text it appears with a colored background When you attach a note to text you enter t
250. ey is provided For me automatically Network key torta roto RootK Key index General Network Key 02 1 ile Ej 5 Tap the 802 1x tab select either PEAP or Smart Card or Certificate for the EAP type then tap Properties to adjust its settings HF settings 61 59 Gb Configure Network Authentication o Use IEEE 802 1x network access control EAPLype Smart Card or Certificate General Network Key Key 802 1x Ej 6 Tap ok to return to the Configure Wireless Network screen 7 From the Networks to access drop down list select All Available Only access points or Only computer to computer depending on the type of networks to which you connect 112 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 To connect only to networks you have already configured clear Auto matically connect to non preferred networks Tap ok to close this screen E Settings eh q 2 00 Configure Wireless Networks Add New i Available i Available 4 psup3 Available i psupg Available i bsupleap Available 4 psupttils Available A allabla o _ Configure Wireless Networks bd Networks to access n Available O Automatically connect to non preferred networks Wireless Network Adapters Adapters Ej 6 Note If you select to automatically connect to non preferred networks your device detects any new n
251. fatermec Va User s Manual ho 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Intermec Technologies Corporation Corporate Headquarters Technical Communications Department 6001 36th Ave W 550 Second Street SE Everett WA 98203 Cedar Rapids IA 52401 U S A U S A www intermec com The information contained herein is proprietary and is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and service Intermec manufactured equipment and is not to be released reproduced or used for any other purpose without written permission of Intermec Information and specifications contained in this document are subject to change without prior notice and do not represent a commitment on the part of Intermec Technologies Corporation 2002 2005 by Intermec Technologies Corporation All rights reserved The word Intermec the Intermec logo Norand ArciTech CrossBar Data Collection Browser dcBrowser Duratherm EasyADC EasyCoder EasyLAN Enterprise Wireless LAN EZBuilder Fingerprint i gistics INCA under license InterDriver Intermec Printer Network Manager IRL JANUS LabelShop Mobile Framework MobileLAN Nor Ware Pen Key Precision Print PrintSet RoutePower SmartSystems TE 2000 Trakker Antares and Virtual Wedge are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Intermec Technologies Corporation Throughout this manual trademarked names may be used Rather than put a trademark or symbol in every occurrence of a tr
252. feature and use the COMI port for another application such as ActiveSync An error message will result if this option were not selected but this action was attempted Similarly if ActiveSync is using the COM1 port and you select Comm Port Wedge or 1551 1553 an error message will result See Error Message for more information Comm Port Wedge 1551 1553 Disable All Change Comm Settings Error Message If the COMI port is used by another application such as ActiveSync nei ther the Comm Port Wedge nor the 1551 1553 Tethered Scanner can be enabled As a result the following message may appear Note that this mes sage is for the Comm Port Wedge You must disable that application to free up the COM port before you can enable either the wedge or the scanner ITC TetherScan ok Error enabled CommPortWedge Comm port unavailable Changing Comm Settings Tap Change Comm Settings to configure the settings for the COMI port Current settings are restored after a warm boot is performed but are lost after a cold boot is performed When these settings are not changed the OK button is disabled grayed out When changes are made tap OK after it is enabled to accept these changes Baud Rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Data Bits 7 or 8 e Parity None Odd Even Mark Space Stop Bits l or 2 Flow Control None or Hardware 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter
253. figuration grid 399 postamble 399 preamble 399 configuration parameter 343 code page 349 grid 348 postamble 346 preamble 344 Voice mail Phone application CDMA radios 150 Volume bar code configuration 393 396 configuration parameter 393 phone application 159 161 VPN server creating a connection to work 113 Ww Wakeup mask control panel applet 368 WAN monitor CORE module CDMA 1xRTT 140 424 GSM GPRS 142 installing available modules 137 loading a module 137 WAN rado CORE module installing available modules 137 loading a module 137 WAP pages 96 connecting to an ISP 100 Warm boot performing 19 Watcher applications activating Sprint 173 downloading Sprint 173 using Sprint 176 Verizon 168 Web browsers FTP support 247 Web pages 96 connecting to an ISP 100 Welch Allyn 1470 Imager cabling 216 settings 215 WEP encryption LEAP security method 389 PEAP security method 378 profile security information 375 376 TLS security method 382 TTLS security method 385 zero configuration 110 Windows CE documentation MSDN 194 Windows configuration unit information control panel WinCfg CAB file 365 Windows Media files Windows Media Player 92 Windows Media Player Start menu icon 31 Windows Mobile 92 Windows Mobile ActiveSync 48 basic skills 30 Calendar 50 command bar 32 Contacts 64 edition information 28 getting connected 100 Inbox 77 MSN Messenger 87 navigation ba
254. fw Network Type On Phone Number Radio ESN Registered on home network RSSI Serial Status Verizon Network Code Division Multiple Access CDMA is a form of wide area wireless communications IXRTT supports up to 144 KB per second packet data transmission The WAN radio CORE module displays helpful information about the CDMA IxRTT radio option built into your 760 Computer WAN Monitor General Below are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information pro vided via the General tab Note that the information is listed alphabetically Indicates whether the ESN on this unit was ever activated Note this activation indicates that the device was activated at some point in time However it does not guarantee that the activation is valid or is working on the carrier s network Identifies the firmware version if available The network type which would list CDMA 1XRTT Indicates when activation was provided by your service provider Identifies the telephone number or MDN assigned to the WAN Module installed in your unit Lists the Electronic Serial Number ESN assigned to this radio module or Unavailable if a number cannot be read from the radio This number is required for activation You must provide this number to your service provider such as Sprint Verizon Bell Mobility etc for activation Note a decimal version of your ESN is on the Details page If the WAN radio module is registered with
255. g TTLS PEAP and TLS 5 Enter the Anonymous EAP TTLS Name as assigned for public usage Use of this outer identity protects your login name or identity 6 Click ok to return to the Security page EF Profile Wizard an d 2 45 ok Inner TTLS Authentication EAP Inner EAP EAPJMDS Challenge T Certificate Settings L Validate Server Certificate Common Mame 1 Common Marne 2 Anonymous EAP TTLS Name anonymous Ej 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 387 Appendix A 388 Configurable Settings To Get Certificates Certificates are pieces of cryptographic data that guarantee a public key is associated with a private key They contain a public key and the entity name that owns the key Each certificate is issued by a certificate authority Use this page to import a certificate onto the 700 Color Computer Root Certificates 1 Tap the lt lt lt button next to the Import Root Certificate field to select the root certificate DER encoded CER file to import 2 Click Import Root Cert to install the selected certificate User Certificate 1 Tap the lt lt lt button next to the Certificate Path field to select the user certificate DER encoded CER file without the private key to import 2 Tap the lt lt lt button next to the Key Path field to select the private key PVK file which corresponds to the user certificate chosen in step 1 3 Tap Import User Cert to ins
256. g all day set type to Normal then adjust the date and time appropriately Mar 25 05 SMTWITES 4 Conference SM2 This describes the all day event ee Sia Mak ane Ne New Tools E E3 gl C Tap to access the Day view 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 What s a Recurrence Pattern If you have an appointment or task that you do on a regular basis such as a weekly team meeting or a monthly status report enter the item once and set a recurrence pattern for it If the default patterns in the list are not what you need you can create your own pattern using the wizard Ha Calendar 4 ff 2 40 td 4 Subject Staff Meeting X Location Tech Pubs table 7 Starts 7 00 AM M Ends 8 00 AM Y All Day Na Occurs Every Wednesday M Select your recurrence Reminder pattern from this drop Every Wednesday down list Day 30 of every month Categories Every March 30 Attendees L Edit patteri gt Select lt Edit pattern gt Status Busy to access the wizard Sensitivity Normal with which to custom ize your recurrence Appointment Notes Edit a Viewing Appointments You can view appointments in one of several views Agenda Day Week and Month In Agenda view upcoming appointments are displayed in bold To see detailed appointment information in any view tap the ap pointment To see a list of availab
257. ght arrow This moves the contact to the My Block List To unblock a contact tap the contact and tap the left arrow This moves the contact to the My Allow List To receive an alert when someone adds you to their contacts list select Alert me when I am added to a Passport contact list To see who has you listed as a contact tap View ZIMSNMessenger amp 11 56 ok My Allow List My Block List Can see my online Can t see my online status and send me status or send me messages messages All other u kansascome amt1965 Andrew Bobbie grandmagru hpgla msn Jessica Alert me when I am added to a Passport contact list Users who have me in their contact ne General Privacy accounts mj 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Sending a Message Tap a contact to whom you want to send a message Enter your message in the text entry area at the bottom of the screen and tap Send To quickly add common messages tap My Text and tap a desired message To invite another contact to an ongoing chat tap Tools Invite and tap a contact To see who is already chatting or to switch between chats tap Chats ES MSN Messenger 7 l 12 05 fok You are chatting with Bobbie Bobbie says ok Enter a message Thank you For helping aut Tap to send message Last message 2 10 05 at 12 05 PM i3 1 2 3 4 5 e 7 8 o u
258. gies Corporation to print configuration labels Scan the labels to change the scanner configuration and data transfer settings Use the Intermec EasySet software to print configuration labels you can scan to change your configuration settings For more information see the EasySet online help EasySet is available from the Intermec Data Capture web site Changing a Parameter Setting Menus of available parameters for each group are listed Use the scroll bars to go through the list Expand each menu to view its parameter set tings Tap a parameter to select or expand a parameter to view its sub parameters Note that each parameter or subparameter is shown with its default setting or current setting in brackets Tap a parameter or subparameter to select that parameter then do any of the following to change its setting Tap Apply to apply any changes Note that these illustrations are from a Symbologies parameter Typing a new value in an entry field Choosing a new value from the drop down list Selecting a different option The selected option contains a bullet Tap Defaults then Apply to restore factory default settings Tap Yes when you are prompted to verify this action Caution restoring Factory Defaults will replace all settings for this page Restore Factory Defaults naw 300 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Tap Refresh to disca
259. good for when a large number of 700 Color Computers need updating See Chapter 7 Programming for more information Using a Storage Card 122 Use the following steps to install an application using a storage card Copying to a CompactFlash Card Note These instructions do not apply to the 730 Computer 1 Suspend the 700 Color Computer and remove its CompactFlash drive which holds a SanDisk CompactFlash storage card 2 Using a CompactFlash Adapter card place the CompactFlash drive in your desktop PC card drive 3 Create a subdirectory on the PCMCIA CompactFlash drive in which to store your application 4 Use the CElmager application to add the autorun system to the storage card See the Software Tools Users Manual to learn about CElmager 5 Copy your application data files and all required DLLs and drivers to the subdirectory created on the CompactFlash drive 6 Add your application to the AUTOUSER DAT file on the Storage Card 2577 directory with the following statement RUN lt your directory gt lt yourapp exe gt where your directory is the directory on the CompactFlash storage card where the application was installed and yourapp exe is the name of your application Finish the RUN statement with a carriage return line feed combination There may be multiple run statements in the file 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 3 Installing Applications 7 Remove the Comp
260. gs w B Ej Ej Personal tab System tab Menus To customize what appears on the Start menu and to enable a pop up menu from the New icon Owner Information To enter your contact information Password To limit access to your 700 Color Computer Today To customize the look and information displayed on the Today screen Clock To change the time or to set alarms Power To maximize battery life Adding or Removing Programs Programs added to your 700 Color Computer at the factory are stored in ROM Read Only Memory You cannot remove this software and you cannot accidentally lose ROM contents ROM programs can be updated using special installation programs with a XIP extension All other pro grams and data files added to your 700 Color Computer after factory installation are stored in RAM Random Access Memory You can install any program created for your 700 Color Computer as long as your 700 Color Computer has enough memory The most popular place to find software for your 700 Color Computer is on the Windows Mobile Web site www microsoft com windowsmobile resources commu nities default mspx 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 45 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 46 About About Adding Programs Using ActiveSync Install the appropriate software for your 700 Color Computer on your desktop before installing it on your 700 Color Computer 1 Determine your 700 Color Computer and processo
261. gs Clock menu To access this control panel applet tap Start Settings the System tab the Clock icon to access its control panel applet y Settings d 3 07 o Clock 8 Home es GMT 8 Pacific US 9 L 3 07 18 AM DE 3 21 2005 6 O Visiting s GMT 1 Paris Madrid omom LIE 3 005 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 395 Appendix A Configurable Settings Configuration Bar Codes Audio Volume 396 id You can change some settings on your 700 Color Computer by scanning the following Code 39 bar code labels You can use the Data Collection control panel to set the three Virtual Wedge parameters starting on page 343 Note When you use a bar code creation utility to make a scannable bar code label the utility probably adds opening and closing asterisks automat ically Asterisks are included here for translation purposes Note The Audio Volume parameter information is on page 393 Turn Audio Off BVO Set Audio Volume to very quiet VB1 Set Audio Volume to quiet BV2 Set Audio Volume to normal default BV3 Set Audio Volume to loud BV4 Set Audio Volume to very loud BV5 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Automatic Shutoff Backlight Timeout ES Appendix A Configurable Settings Note The Automatic Shutoff parameter information is on page 393 Set Automatic Shutoff to 1
262. gs from the 700 Color Computer tap Start gt Settings gt the System tab gt SNMP gt the Identification tab to access ts SNMP parameters The following are parameters for contact location and name information for support purposes Note that these are listed in the order of their appear ance within the Identification tab Contact Sets the contact information for the person responsible for this 700 Color Computer Action Tap the Contact parameter then enter the name of your contact represen tative to change this parameter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 4 0 Options The identification contact may be up to 255 ASCII characters Default is no characters or blank AY settings eius Q SNMP Contact Add an administrator here gt Name lt Pocket_PC gt Location Add a location if applicable gt Change Contact Setting Add an administrator here Security Traps Identification m 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 359 Appendix A Configurable Settings Name Sets the assigned name for this 700 Color Computer Action Tap the Name parameter then enter the name of your 700 Color Com puter to change this parameter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 5 0 Options The identification name may be up to 255 ASCII characters Default is no characters or blank Settings exin Q SNMP Contact Add an administrator herez Blame lt Po cket_PC gt i
263. he book title then tap Library on the pop up menu 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 93 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 94 3 To open a book tap its title in the Library list mmm DS ae Microsoft Reader 4 42 12 56 DX Tap to scroll through the Library list English Spanish Pocket Dic Tap to select a fe Dieu pn Tap to open Sort order a book Encarta Pocket Dictionary Thursday February 10 2005 Microsoft Reader Help Thursday February 10 2005 A Sh Tap here to navi gate to other parts Help of the Reader Settings Return Reading a Book Each book consists of a cover page an optional table of contents and the pages of the book Navigation options are listed in the bottom portion of the cover page The first time you open a book go to the first page or to the table of con tents if there is one Subsequently whenever you open the book you are automatically taken to the last page read With the text each book page includes a page number and book title You can also page through a book by using the Up Down Left Right controls on your 700 Color Computer LES Microsoft Reader 2 12 44 x English Spanish Pocket Dictionary Tap to selecta navigation option Drag to select text FEISETHESTE knee knew Add Bookmark Select an option pret gt know add Highlight after dragging to knick knacks select a text sust pl colog ba Add T
264. he current BSSID after a successful call ERROR SUCCESS when successful ERR QUERY FAILED when the query failed or ERR CONNECT FAILED ifa connection with the radio failed If ERROR SUCCESS is returned your TCHAR array is populated with the BSSID of the cur rent service set XX XX XX XX XX XX ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN GetBSSID TCHAR else UINT GetBSSID TCHAR endif 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions Chapter 7 Programming GetDiversity Call this function to get the current diversity setting of your 802 11b or 802 11b g radio This uses an optional NDIS5 1 OID to query the radio of which a large number of 802 11b or 802 11b g devices do not support This may be inaccurate UINT GetDiversity USHORT ANT_PRIMARY The primary antenna is selected ANT_SECONDARY The secondary antenna is selected ANT_DIVERSITY The radio is in diversity mode and uses both antennas ERROR_SUCCESS when successful ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed or ERR CONNECT FAILED if a connection with the radio failed If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned your USHORT reference is populated with one of the parame ters listed above ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT PFN GetDiversity USHORT else UINT GetDiversity USHORT fendif GetLinkSpeed Cal
265. he item on which you want to perform the action When the menu appears tap the action you want to perform or tap anywhere outside the menu to close the menu without performing the action L Pocket Word 4 9 10 e B All Folders y Name v Si Ps Minfo 3 21 03 zib Fa ReadmeSuppCAB 11 9 04 1k Create Copy Delete Select All Tap and hold to display the pop up menu Lift the stylus and tap the action Send via E mail you want Beam File Rename Moy e Tap outside the menu to close it without performing an action New Tools Ej When you have something to do your device notifies you in a variety of ways For example if you have set up an appointment in Calendar an e mail message arrives or a friend sends you an instant message you are no tified in any of the following ways A message box appears on the screen A sound which you can specify is played A light flashes on your 700 Color Computer The 700 Color Computer vibrates You can choose the notification types 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 33 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Entering Information 34 You can enter information on your 700 Color Computer in several ways depending on the type of device you have and the program you are using Synchronizing Using Microsoft ActiveSync synchronize or copy information between your desktop and 700 Color Computer For more information on Acti veSync see Activ
266. he setting to be changed then select an option to change this setting or select an option from the drop down list SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 1 1 15 1 Options Decoding Not active default Active Mod 10 transmitted default Mod 10 not transmitted Double Mod 10 transmitted Double Mod 10 not transmitted Any length Minimum length default Minimum length 001 254 Minimum length 1 254 default is 6 Check digit Bar code length 0 1 0 1 p 3 0 1 x Note If Bar code length 1 then Minimum length is entered Emm a 461114 Q Data Collection amp MSI lt 000006 gt Decoding Not active gt PO Check digit Mod 10 transmitted Bar code length Any length gt Minimum length 62 Symbologies Symbology Options Beepel 4 gt m 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 313 Appendix A 314 Configurable Settings PDF417 PDF417 is a stacked two dimensional symbology that provides the ability to scan across rows of code Each row consists of start stop characters row identifiers and symbol characters which consist of four bars and four spaces each and contain the actual data This symbology uses error correc tion symbol characters appended at the end to recover loss of data Because the virtual wedge translates incoming data into keypad input the size of the keypad buffer limits the effective length of the label to 128 characters Longer
267. he text in a notepad that appears on top of the book page A Note icon displays in the left margin To show or hide the note tap the icon When you add a drawing a Drawing icon appears in the bottom left corner of the page and drawing tools appear across the bottom of the page Draw by dragging your stylus To see a list of a book s annotations including bookmarks highlights text notes and drawings tap Annotations Index on the book s cover page You can tap an entry in the list to go to the annotated page Removing a Book When you finish reading a book you can delete it to conserve space on your 700 Color Computer If a copy of the book is stored on your desk top you can download it again at any time To remove a book from your 700 Color Computer tap and hold the title in the Library list and then tap Delete on the pop up menu 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 95 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Pocket Internet Explorer Use Microsoft Pocket Internet Explorer to view Web or WAP pages in either of these ways During synchronization with your desktop download your favorite links and mobile favorites that are stored in the Mobile Favorites sub folder in Internet Explorer on the desktop Connect to an ISP or network and browse the Web To do this create the connection first as described in Getting Connected on page 100 When connected to an ISP or network you can also download files an
268. his is a zero based index For example in the unshifted plane the 4 key has a scan code of 0x06 This means that the seventh word under the Vkey registry key will have the value for the 4 key Taking a sample of the Vkey registry key shows the following values 00 00 0B 05 02 03 C1 07 04 03 BE 00 34 00 00 00 The value is 34 00 The values are in reverse byte order because that is the way the processor handles data When writing an application nothing needs to be done to swap the bytes as this will happen automatically when the data is read into a byte value This is something you just need to be aware of when looking at the registry Knowing this we can see that the value that the keypad driver will pass to the system is a hex 34 Looking that up on an UNICODE character chart we see that it maps to a 4 If you wanted the key labeled 4 to output the letter A instead you would need to change the seventh word to 41 the hexadecimal repre sentation of A from the UNICODE chart then put the key back into the registry Note Do not remap scan codes 0x01 0x41 0x42 0x43 0x44 Remap ping these scan codes could render your 700 Color Computer unusable until a cold boot is performed If you wish to disable a certain key remap its scan code to 0x00 Just changing the registry keys will not immediately change the key mappings To notify the keypad driver that the registry has been updated
269. hrough the keyboard interface via the Virtual Wedge 216 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support The bar code APIs defined in the IADC interface are available to get bar code data from the bar code scanner The following example shows how to programmatically collects bar code data include IADC h include ITCAdcMgmt h IADC pIADC HRESULT hrStatus S OK Linked with ITCUUID LIB Linked with ITCAdcDevMgmt lib Create a ADC COM interface to collect bar code data from the 1551E 1553 when the 1551 1553 menu option is enabled hrStatus ITCDeviceOpen TEXT ExtScanner Name of the ADC device IID IADC COM interface to return ITC DHDEVFLAG READAHEAD Device s Flags LPVOID amp pIADC the returned interfac if SUCCEEDED hrStatus BYTE byteBuffer MAX LABEL SIZE DWORD dwLength 0 HRESULT hr pIDC gt Read byteBuffer Buffer to put the ADC data MAX LABEL SIZE Size of pDataBuffer in bytes amp dwLength Number bytes returned NULL Time stamp of the received data NULL INFINITE Number of milliseconds to wait when done using this COM interface delete it ITCDeviceClose IUnknown pIADC 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 217 Chapter 6 Scanner Support For Units With PSM Build 3 00 or Newer
270. i elis Wav ves 189 Ab utthe Application a veo cabe dots eoe on Vos iac YE SAC sun C cate ud 189 Mode vous ee cu ob ote ean A Ar TAL 190 Wireless DO ires ene a GND ed a iE Oe ENEE ul ia 191 CAS A E AE N 192 Autol P DHCP Lora bats ae EE P ELE S OPERE V PUE ILICE PU EFEIU PA C Ape Fes 194 SNMP Configuration on the 700 Color Computer i4 sss o sobl prr hrec ER REY E ERA 195 Management Information Base na Rer vd Er Ee be e EAE Bek ees 195 Object Identifiers not area e Vp WA VOCARI DAS E RACER VE S ctt ine heute dure weak 196 Configuring with SNMP ess wa ted Ed REA Ead lS c dae e RSEN Idas MORE Ra Rd 196 5 Printer Support So e EA b ve a oS tke eons 197 Prin ng ASCII 4er ee ex AA ee a esc e e e ee rer ee de 198 Ditecily tao Port ves ct ds oe 198 Directly t a Generic Se al Port cepe e reor pu EE eee eho eee E OCC ERE 198 IrDA Printet Dryer ior ee v wet e ets ette irem e ee we eter tec eret ea 198 NPCP Printer Drive nit rota Miia See eee as DPI ERIT DUI Dx peg 199 ADENT Sew ee ee A V ede hae ees ees 199 NPOP Driver Installation and Removal aiii oe deceret ro ees 199 Opening the NPCP Driver es dap aras wie eu Wa yal Waco duck aU dace usd 200 Closing the IPOD Diver iii aane vocati yee Asa Ron Yos aca dem o pod vacate bed 200 Reading from the NPCP Driver rias ds AR 200 Writing te the NPCP Drivers tacita 200 NPEP Driver VO Controls aea Gov dando e eon ete std Bae editt Cove 201 NPCP Printer Communications 0 cee eee eee 202 Sample Code bang
271. ical information and samples www microsoft com windowsmobile resources communities default mspx Using Microsoft ActiveSync you can synchronize the information on your desktop with the information on your 700 Color Computer Synchroniza tion compares the data on your 700 Color Computer with your desktop and updates both computers with the most recent information For exam ple Keep Pocket Outlook data up to date by synchronizing your 700 Color Computer with Microsoft Outlook data on your desktop Synchronize Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel files between your 700 Color Computer and desktop Your files are automatically con verted to the correct format Note By default ActiveSync does not automatically synchronize all types of information Use ActiveSync options to turn synchronization on and off for specific information types With ActiveSync you can also Back up and restore your 700 Color Computer data Copy rather than synchronize files between your 700 Color Computer and desktop Control when synchronization occurs by selecting a synchronization mode For example you can synchronize continually while connected to your desktop or only when you choose the synchronize command Select which information types are synchronized and control how much data is synchronized For example you can choose how many weeks of past appointments you want synchronized Before you begin synchronization install ActiveSync on y
272. ication and send an SMS Short Messaging Service message Be sure to have an SMS num ber ready to send the message this is usually the mobile phone num ber See Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 for the Inbox information Send subj lt gt 0 160 Edit My Text 23 Ej 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Phone Settings i4 Either select Tools gt Options from the Phone application or select Start gt Settings the Personal tab the Phone icon to access the Phone Settings Phone control panel applet Tap the Phone tab to customize your phone settings such as the ring type and ring tone to use for incoming calls and the keypad tone to use when entering phone numbers Tap Other Settings to go to the Sounds amp Notifications control panel applet Select Start Help for more online information about this feature timo Y Phone Phone Number 000 000 9420 Voicemail 000 000 9420 Sounds Rng ect AMAS Ring tone Windows Default v m Keypad Short Tones Other Settings Notify me when voice privacy is unavailable Phone uci bt Ste Pere is Ej e Tap the Location tab to toggle between letting your location be visible for everyone to detect and hiding your location from everyone except 911 m 3 F z Eig settings 9 ro Q 9 settings EBERT Mol Turning location on will allow
273. ications There are multiple ways to get an application to your 700 Series Color Mobile Computer just as there are multiple ways to package the applica tion for delivery Z Note 700 Color pertains to 740 741 750 751 760 and 761 Com puters unless otherwise noted 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 119 Chapter 3 Installing Applications Packaging an Application 120 Use any of these methods to package an application for installation For very simple applications the application itself might be the only file that needs to be delivered It could be a directory structure that contains the application support ing files like ActiveX controls DLLs images sound files and data files Or you could package an application via a CAB file Consider any of the following when choosing a location into which to store your application n the basic 700 Color Computer there are two built in storage op tions the Object Store and the Persistent Storage Manager PSM The Object Store is RAM that looks like a disk Anything copied here is de leted when a cold boot is performed on the 700 Color Computer The PSM is an area of storage which is embedded in a section of the system s FLASH memory This storage area is not erased during a cold boot It may however be erased during the reflashing process In addition to storing applications and data files you do have the option to store a per sistent r
274. icle number 5749 is titled How to Manually Activate a Sprint CDMA WAN Radio in the 760 Device SB555 Watcher 1220 E c ha ar A SIERAA WIRELESS PCS ision M mer y Tools Admin 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 181 Chapter 4 Network Support 3 The following screen appears once data provisioning is complete SB555 Watcher SIERAA WIRELESB PCS Vision X KA 4 Test the data connection by tapping on the connect button to make a data connection to the network Watcher progresses through the follow ing two screens Once you see the second screen you know that your mobile computer has successfully connected to the IXRTT network SB555 Watcher lt P d 7 02 amp B555 Watcher e 4 1225 Y SIERRA WIRELESS SIERRA WRELEGE PCS Vision T PCS Vision T 182 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 4 Network Support DEE LIA 5 Select Start gt Internet Explorer then tap Pocket Internet Explorer to choose a web site Your unit is now successfully activated m Explorer e 4 12 30 f http mabile msn com pocketpc e c MSN Hotmail So Maps amp Directions P windowsMedia com E Money i News Weather 8 Sports ESPN Jig Entertainment view Tools 4 Gj sv mE Perform a cold boot on your 760 Computer to uninstall the Watcher ap plication Watcher is intended for activation purposes only I
275. iddle name If your contact has a double first or last name tap the Name arrow and enter the names in the proper box Name Linda Gruber Bahr Job title Tap to access the Name fields First Linda Middle Last Suffix E mail bah Jinda mayo edu Gruber Bahr Mobile tel Web page Tap anywhere outside the box Office loc to close and return to details Home tel Home addr Details L4 Note New contacts are added to the displayed category 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 67 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Adding a Note to a Contact You can add written or typed notes and even recordings if your device supports recordings to a contact Notes are handy for maps and drawings 1 In the contact list tap the contact 2 Tap the Notes tab For specific instructions tap Start gt Help gt Notes to see Notes Help Tr 273 Contacts t Bring records to These are controls for the recorder Room 3A Use your stylus to write or draw your informa tion here Details Notes Edit Tools Z Notes tab 68 Tap to activate the keyboard Tap to activate the writing pad Tap to activate the recorder Note To edit an existing note tap the contact tap Edit then tap the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Assigning a Contact to a Category 1 In the contac
276. ield that follows must be a list of numeric values separated by commas one byte per field and must not use the 0x hexadecimal prefix FLG ADDREG TYPE DWORD 0x00010001 REG DWORD data type The noncompatible format in the Win32 Setup INF documentation is supported Example AddReg RegSettings All RegSettings Al1 HKLM Sreg_path 0x00000000 alpha default alpha HKLM Sreg_path test 0x00010001 3 Test 3 HKLM Sreg_path new another 0x00010001 6 New another 6 232 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 7 Programming CEShortCuts This section a Windows CE specific section under the DefaultInstall section is optional and describes the shortcuts that the installation applica tion creates on the device Within the DefaultInstall section a reference may have been made to this section such as ShortCuts All This section defines the options for that setting Required No e shortcut list section shortcut_filename String that identifies the shortcut name It does not require the LNK extension shortcut list section s ortcut type flag Numeric value Zero or empty represents a shortcut to a file any non zero numeric value represents a shortcut to a folder shortcut list section target file path String value that specifies the destination location Use the target file name for a file such as MyApp exe that must be defined in a file copy list For a path
277. ing a Task To quickly create a task enter text in the Tap here to add a new task box at the top of the screen If you do not see this box tap Tools gt Entry Bar To create a task with detailed information such as start and due dates tap New To enter notes tap the Notes tab You can enter a start date and due date or enter other information by first tapping the field If the input panel is open you need to hide it to see all available fields You can enter text draw or create a recording For more information on creating notes see Notes Capturing Thoughts and Ideas on page 75 To change a task tap it in the task list and then tap Edit Using the onscreen keyboard enter a description To assign the task to a category tap Categories and select a category from the list In the task list you can display tasks by category When finished tap ok to return to the task list Tap to return to the task list the task is saved automatically Tasks Subject Proof articles 7 Tap to choose from predefined Priority Low subjects Status Not Completed Starts None Due Mone Occurs Once Reminder Mone Categories No categories Sensitivity Normal Task Notes Notes is a good place for Edit E maps and drawings Note To quickly create a task with only a subject tap Entry Bar on the Tools menu Then tap Tap here to add a new task and enter your task information Synchronizing Tas
278. int configuration labels you can scan to change your configuration settings For more information see the EasySet online help EasySet is available from the Intermec Data Capture web site For more information see the Data Collection Resource Kit in the Inter mec Developer Library IDL which is available as a download from the Intermec web site at www intermec com Contact your Intermec represen tative for more information 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support Data Collection Configuration For Units with PSM Builds Older than 3 00 Il Scanner settings for the 700 Color Computer can be configured via the i23lius Data Collection control panel applet From the 700 Color Computer tap Data Start Settings the System tab Data Collection See Appendix A Collection Configurable Settings for more information about the following parame ters Note that these are in alphabetical order e Codabar page 306 Code 11 page 320 Code 128 page 309 Code 128 Options page 310 Code 128 FNCI Character page 311 Code 39 page 304 Code 93 page 308 Code 93 Length page 308 Data Matrix page 322 Interleaved 2 of 5 page 317 Matrix 2 of 5 page 318 MaxiCode page 323 MSI page 313 PDFA417 page 314 Macro PDF page 314 Micro PDF417 page 316 Plessey page 312 QR Code page 321 Standard 2 of 5 page 305 Telepen page 319
279. interface UD this is useful for automated builds Creates a CAB file for each specified microprocessor tag which is a label used in the Win32 SE TUP INF file to differentiate between different microprocessor types The cpu parameter fol lowed by multiple cpu_type values must be the last qualifier in the command line Example This example creates CAB files for the ARM and MIPS microprocessors assuming the Win32 SETUP INF file contains the ARM and MIPS tags cabwiz exe c myfile inf err myfile err cpu arm mips Z Note CABWIZ EXE MAKECAB EXE and CABWIZ DDF Windows CE files available on the Windows CE Toolkit must be installed in the same directory on the desktop computer Call CABWIZ EXE using its full path for the CAB Wizard application to run correctly 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 239 Chapter 7 Programming Troubleshooting the CAB Wizard To identify and avoid problems that might occur when using the CAB Wizard follow these guidelines 240 Use for a percent sign character when using this character in an INF file string as specified in Win32 documentation This will not work under the Strings section Do not use INF or CAB files created for Windows CE to install ap plications on Windows based desktop platforms Ensure the MAKECAB EXE and CABWIZ DDF files included with Windows CE are in the same directory as CABWIZ EXE Use the full path to call CABWIZ EXE
280. ion About the Application Bluetooth is not started automatically by default after a cold boot is per formed To run Bluetooth tap Start gt Settings gt the Connections tab gt Bluetooth the Bluetooth icon The 700 Color Computer retains the Bluetooth state when warm boots are performed for example f Bluetooth is active and a warm boot was performed the 700 Color Computer boots up with the Bluetooth state activated and Bluetooth virtual COM ports such as printing registered However you must reactivate connections as the system does not do these automatically f Bluetooth is inactive and a warm boot was performed the 700 Color Computer boots up with Bluetooth deactivated 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 189 Chapter 4 Network Support Mode The default tab activates or deactivates Bluetooth When Bluetooth is acti vated the 700 Color Computer discovers and connects to remote devices ij settings E d izsz Km y Settings e 46938 QD Bluetaoth Turn Bluetooth On to enable o this device to discover and connect to remote devices This will also disable Infrared 8 On Turn Bluetooth Off to disable connections from remote devices and to save power This will also enable Infrared Bluetooth Turn Bluetooth On to enable 0 this device to discover and connect ta remate devices On Turn Bluetooth Off to disable connections from remote devices and to save power
281. ion Type Status EJ calendar Synchronized PE contacts Synchronized Tasks Synchronized Ga Favorites Synchronized Cynbex Synchronized 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 121 Chapter 3 Installing Applications a Explore 3 Click Explore to access the Mobile Device folder on your unit 4 From your desktop select Start gt Windows Explorer then browse the C Intermec 700C Mgmt Tools CabFiles path for any CAB files needed for your 700 Color Computer Select the appropriate file right click the file for a pop up menu then select Copy 5 Within the Mobile Device directory go to the directory where you want the files located on the 700 Color Computer do a right click for a pop up menu then select Paste 6 When all of the files are pasted perform a warm boot on the 700 Color Computer When the computer reboots wait for the LED on the top left of your keypad to stop blinking Tap Start gt Programs gt File Explorer to locate the newly copied executable files then tap these files to activate their utilities Using the FTP Server The 700 Color Computer has a built in FTP Server that connects to a net work via Ethernet 802 11b or WAN Wireless Access Network This allows connections to the 700 Color Computer to perform file transfers or computer management functions Another benefit is you can create FTP scripts to automate the process of copying files to the 700 Color Comput er This option is
282. ion from your ISP Some ISPs require infor mation in front of the user name such as MSN username SP dial up access telephone number User name Password If you do not have a modem dock use a NULL modem cable and ap propriate adapters to connect an external modem to your 700 Color Com puter through the serial port To view additional information for any screen in the wizard or while changing settings tap the Help icon 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 8 1 Tap Start gt Settings gt the Connections tab gt the Connections icon In My ISP tap Add a new modem connection Connections HF Settings a iio Q Connections o To set up ar change connection information tap one of the Following links My ISP Add a new modem connection My Work Network Add a new modem connection Add a new YPN server connection Set up my proxy server Ej 2 Enter a name for the connection such as ISP Connection In the Select a modem list select your modem type If your modem type does not appear try reinserting the 700 Color Computer into your modem dock If you are using an external modem that is connected to your 700 Color Computer with a cable select Hayes Compatible on COM1 Tap Next to continue Make New Connection o Enter name For the connection ISP Connection Select a modem Hayes Compatible on COMI 700 Series Color Mobile Compute
283. ion shows the top of the 700 Color Computer on the left and of the 730 Computer on the right Note that the keypad is to the bottom 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 21 Chapter 1 Introduction Vibrator Z ES JJ la alus Data Collection 22 Note This information does not apply to the 730 Computer If your 700 Color Computer is built with an imager or scanner and the vibrator is disabled do the following instructions to enable the vibrator If you are not able to enable the vibrator then contact Customer Support For information about setting volume levels for screen taps ActiveSync alert noises etc tap Start Help Pocket PC Basics then select Notifications See Chapter 7 Programming to see how to programmatically control the vibrator See Appendix A Configurable Settings for more information about the Beeper Volume option Note Each time the 700 Color Computer is cold booted all default set tings are restored For Units With PSM Builds Older than 3 00 1 Tap Start Settings the System tab Data Collection to access its control panel applet 2 Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Beeper LED tab then tap this tab 3 Tap Beeper select the Vibrate option then tap Apply 4 Tap ok to confirm this change then tap ok to exit the Data Collection control panel applet EY settings a 461246 QQ Data Collection Beeper lt Vibrate gt
284. ion within the Network Log On screen Logon to Server en E Network Log On Resource My Connection L Save password mj Use either the onscreen keyboard or press the keys to type any of the AT commands provided Press or tap Enter to send each command The re sults of each command sent will print onscreen Note that each AT com mand must start with the at characters To see what you typed onscreen type atel to initiate the AT Echo command then press Enter 188 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Wireless Personal Area Networking Bluetooth is the name given to a technology standard using short range radio links intended to replace the cables connecting portable and fixed electronic devices The standard defines a uniform structure for a wide range of devices to communicate with each other with minimal user ef fort Its key features are robustness low complexity low power and low cost The technology also offers wireless access to LANs the mobile phone network and the internet for a host of home appliances and portable hand held interfaces Documentation Information about other Bluetooth software is in the Bluetooth Resource Kit and the Wireless Printing Development Guide via the Intermec Develop er Library IDL which is available as a download from the Intermec web via www intermec com Contact your Intermec representative for more informat
285. ion you receive with your printers or from technical support Win32 APIs are required to print di rectly to the port Directly to a Generic Serial Port To print directly to a generic serial port printer non Intermec printers e Use CreateFile to open ports COM I can be opened on most de vices Use WriteFile to send data directly to the printer Use CloseHandle when you are finished printing to close the port IrDA Printer Driver 198 IrDA printing is only available on the certain devices and is supported di rectly by the Windows CE load via the IrSock API provided by the Micro soft Win32 API without need for additional drivers Intermec 6804 6805 6806 6808 and 6820 and other IrDA printers are supported 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 5 Printer Support NPCP Printer Driver About NPCP The NPCP printer communications driver NPCPPORT DLL is a Stream Device Driver built into the operating system The driver supports only NPCP communications to and from the 6820 and 4820 printers over a selected serial port All applications use WIN32 API functions to access the drivers Basic op erations are easily implemented by applications through the CreateFile WriteFile ReadFile DevicelOControl and CloseHandle Win32 APIs Operations to upgrade printer modules perform printer diagnostics and get printer configuration are performed largely via DevicelOControl functi
286. ions List view settings Show ABC tabs Clear this to view more L show contact names only contacts per screen _ Use large Font Tap this to view larger text Country Region settings Areacode 425 Enter the three digit area code Country Region United States Select from a drop down list Edit 72 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Tasks Keeping a To Do List To switch to Tasks on your 700 Color Computer tap Start gt Tasks Use Tasks to keep track of what you have to do A variety of task informa tion can display on the Today screen If you use Microsoft Outlook on your desktop you can synchronize tasks between your device and desktop Select the category of tasks you want displayed in the list wh az o bii Select the sort order Priority of the list Use this entry bar to assign a task quickly All Tasks y Tap here to add a new task Indicates a Send status report high priority O Call Jonesboro iL L Proof articles Create Copy Delete Task Beam Task Tap to display or edit the task details Tap and hold to display a pop up menu of actions New Tools Tap to create a new task Z Note To change the way information is displayed in the list tap Tools gt Options 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 73 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 74 Creat
287. is installed FALSE indicates that no SIM card protection software is installed 254 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL HAL ITC WRITE SYSPARM Describes and enables the registry save location Usage Zinclude oemioctl h Syntax BOOL KernelloControl IOCTL HAL ITC WRITE SYSPARM LPVOID lpInBuf DWORD nInBufSize LPVOID lpOutBuf DWORD nOutBufSize LPDWORD lpBytesReturned Parameters IpInBuf A single byte that may be one of the id values See ID Field Values on the next page nInBufSize Must be set to the size of the pInBufin bytes IpOutBuf Must point to a buffer large enough to hold the data to be written to the non volatile data store nOutBufSize The size of pOurBuf in bytes IpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned by the function Return Values Returns TRUE if function succeeds Returns FALSE if the function fails GetLastError may be used to get the error value Either ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER or ERROR_INSUFFICIENT_BUFFER may be returned when this function is used to get the error 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 255 Chapter 7 Programming ID Field Values The id field of pInBuf may be one of the following values ID Field Values ITC_REGISTRY_SAVE_ENABLE This function enables or disables the save registry to non volatile media feature of the RegFlushKey function IpOutBuf must be set to zero FALSE if th
288. istory to note the telephone numbers that were previously dialed from this 761 Computer 7 Phone E o All Calls aa 319 369 3828 12 06 a add 319 369 8450 12 06 a ad 319 369 3828 12 04 a Tools a Speed Dial Tap Speed Dial to select a telephone number with which the 761 Com puter is to dial automatically To add to this list use the Contacts applica tion See Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 for more information about the Contacts application lol New 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 155 Chapter 4 Network Support 156 Phone Tools Tap Tools gt Send SMS tab to access the Inbox application and send an SMS Short Messaging Service message Be sure to have an SMS number ready to send the message this is usually the mobile phone number See Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 for information about Inbox al REST ok Send Subj lt gt Edit My Text i Phone Settings Either select Tools gt Options from the Phone application or select Start gt Settings gt the Personal tab gt the Phone icon to access the Phone Settings control panel applet Tap the Phone tab to customize your phone settings such as the ring type and ring tone to use for incoming calls and the keypad tone to use when entering phone numbers Tap Other Settings to go to the Sounds amp Notifications control panel applet ES settings Ge EE EA EER ok Phone
289. ithout entering a password 5 Tap Get Certificates to obtain or import server certificates See page 388 for more information 6 Tap Additional Settings to assign an inner PEAP authentication and set options for server certificate validation and trust See page 381 for more information Profile Wizard 4 d 2 34 ok Basic Security Advanced 8021x aaa Association Encryption Network EAP CKIP T Password Q Prompt For password Use Following password Get Certificates Additional Settings E 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Additional Settings 1 Select an authentication method from the Inner PEAP Authentication drop down list EAP MS CHAP V2 Authenticates against a Windows Domain Controller and other non Windows user databases This is Microsoft s implementation of PEAP EAP Token Card Use with token cards The password value entered is never cached This is Cisco s implementation of PEAP EAP MD5 Challenge Message Digest 5 A secure hashing authentication algo rithm 2 Check Validate Server Certificate to verify the identity of the authenti cation server based on its certificate when using TTLS or PEAP 3 Enter the Common Names of trusted servers Note that if these fields are left blank the server certificate trust validation is not performed or required 4 Click ok to return to the Security page
290. its available features and options Cisco Compatible Extensions Version 1 Version 2 Display Transflective Pixels Diagonal Colors 24 730 LEAP CKIP VLAN 730 TFT all light readable color display with LED backlight 240x320 89mm 3 5 in 64K 740 741 750 751 760 761 X future 740 741 750 751 760 761 Transflective 240x320 97mm 3 8 in 256 K 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Environmental Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity Rain and Dust Resistance Drop Specifications Expansion Slots Secure Digital SD CompactFlash CF Type II Integrated Scanner Options Area Imager Linear Imager 1D Laser PDF 417 Laser Integrated Wireless 802 11b Wi Fi certified WAN Bluetooth compatible module Keypad Options Numeric Full Alphanumeric Memory and Storage RAM Memory Flash ROM Microprocessor Modem Optional V 90 modem snaps on V 92 docking options Operating System Microsoft Windows Mobile software for Pocket PC 730 10 to 55 C 14 to 131 F 20 to 60 C 4 to 140 F 5 to 95 noncondensing IP54 compliant 1 2 m 4 drop 26 times on concrete 730 WLAN 802 11b 730 64 MB 64 MB includes ROM folder for application storage 730 Intel XScale PXA255 Application Processor 400 MHz 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 1 Introduction 740 7
291. k provider Identifies the hardware revision of the WAN radio module installed in your unit Shows the IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity number assigned to the Subscriber Identity Module SIM card installed in this 760 Computer Lists the name of the manufacturer that developed this radio module such as Sierra Wireless Shows the MDN Mobile Directory Number or DN Directory Number the number that identifies the account tied to your device You can consider this the phone number Note that the MDN and IMSI MIN numbers can be the same Lists the product name for this radio module such as Model 72 Identifies the telephone assigned to the WAN radio module Provides the version number of the Preferred Roaming List PRL Identifies the temperature of the radio module or lists Unavailable degrees if no information or temperature cannot be measured abbreviation for receive Indicates the number of bytes received over the WAN connection since the CORE WAN Module was started abbreviation for transmit Indicates the number of bytes received over the WAN connection since the CORE WAN Module was started 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 141 Chapter 4 Network Support GSM GPRS CORE Module 760 Computers with WAN Radios ATT Wireless Network Band BER flw h w Network Type Phone Number Radio ESN Registered on home network RSSI Serial Status
292. ks Tasks stored on your 700 Color Computer can synchronize with Micro soft Outlook on your desktop Task synchronization is automatically se lected in ActiveSync New items entered on one computer are copied to the other during syn chronization Handwritten notes and drawings are saved as metafiles pic tures For more information on synchronization see ActiveSync Help on the desktop 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Notes Capturing Thoughts and Ideas To switch to Notes on your 700 Color Computer tap Start gt Notes Notes helps you quickly capture your ideas notes and thoughts You can create a note using written and typed text drawings and recordings You can also share your notes with others through e mail infrared and syn chronization with your desktop et 69 18 C3 All Folders v JBusiness 9 13 a 424b JOutlook 9 14 4 420b S 1d a Tap to change the sort order of the list 338 Team meetina no Create Copy Delete Select all Tap to open a note or play a recording Tap and hold to display a Send via E mail pop up menu of actions Beam File Rename Move Tap to record e m gt U ve I Jat New Tools Tap to show or hide the Recording toolbar Tap to create a new item x Note To create documents with advanced formatting or templates such as bulleted lists and tabs use word processing softwa
293. l the ap plication 10 Go to Finishing the Installation in the next paragraph Finishing the Installation Do the following to run the SB555 Watcher application Be sure to do step 1 as it is important to perform a warm boot on your 760 Computer Upon restart the Watcher application sets up on the 760 Computer for activation 1 Tap Start Programs the Watcher icon 2 Tap Yes I accept to accept the license agreement then tap OK to con tinue Note that this license agreement does not appear again after this installation Watcher Ed License Agreement e f 1 12 fok Please read the license agreement carefully SIERRA WIRELESS SOFTWARE END ATTENTION CAREFULLY READ THIS AGREEMENT YOU INDICATE THAT YOU HAWE RI AUTHORITY TO ENTER INTO THIS TERMS AND CONDITIONS AND THA BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDI IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE a Yes I Accept O No I Decline 3 Tap OK for the 760 Computer to perform a warm boot and complete the installation WatcherLauncher To complete the installation the device will now perform a warmboot 164 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Activation 4 ES Chapter 4 Network Support Note Set the date and time before doing this activation SB555 Watcher is for activation and data provisioning Once you enable voice capability data capability or both depending on the carrier remove this program from the system by cold booting y
294. l this function to get the current link speed of the 802 11b or 802 11b g radio UINT GetLinkSpeed int amp This function accepts an int reference and your int is populated with the current link speed in Mbps rounded to the nearest whole integer for example 1 2 5 11 etc ERROR SUCCESS when successful ERR QUERY FAILED when the query failed or ERR CONNECT FAILED if connection with the radio failed Data returned is valid if ERROR SUCCESS is returned ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN GetLinkSpeed int amp else UINT GetLinkSpeed int amp fendif 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 271 Chapter 7 Programming GetMac Call this function to get the MAC address of the 802 11b or 802 11b g radio Syntax UINT GetMac TCHAR Parameters Pointer to a character array which is populated with the MAC address after a successful call Return Values ERROR_SUCCESS when successful ERR QUERY FAILED when the query failed or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed Remarks If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned your TCHAR array is populated with the formatted MAC address of the adapter as follows xx xx xx xx xx xx Definitions ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN_GetMac TCHAR else UINT GetMac TCHAR endif x Note Be sure to call RadioConnect before calling this function for this function to work properly GetNetworkMode Call this functi
295. layed beneath the Version Information title This information is useful should you need assistance Internet Explorer e 2 12 37 x file fie fwindows 16_CeMhim windows 16_OEM htm pre The 3 Internet Explorer ll a 9 38 56 fej windows 16_CEM htm 2e ntermec Version Information Version Information Software Build v4 51 Premium Software Build v4 51 Phone CDMA Patent Information Patent Information This product is covered by the following US patents This product is covered by the following US patents 4 455 523 5 410 141 5 740 356 4 553 081 5 425 051 5 790 536 4 709 202 5 469 947 5 805 807 4 737 702 5 488 575 5 862 171 4 455 523 5 410 141 5 740 386 4 553 081 5 425 051 5 790 536 4 709 202 5 469 947 5 805 807 4 737 702 5 488 575 5 862 171 730 740 750 760 Units 761 Units with CDMA For Units With PSM Builds Older than 3 00 e You can also view the latest software build by accessing the Unit Information control panel applet Select Start Settings the System tab Unit the Unit Information icon the Versions tab to view the current build Information AY settinos a 461241 AY settinos 22 461201 Q Unit Information Unit Information 700 Platform Build lt 2 12 gt E 700 Platform Build lt 3 10 gt j 9C lt gt S9C lt gt i DataCollection Build lt searaying003 085 gt i DataCollection Build searayimqa3 1237 Defaults Refre
296. le actions for an appointment tap and hold the appointment Tap Start gt Today to quickly see your appoint ments for the day Calendar o 2 44 DO Mar 30 05 sMTIrres 814 Staff Meeting o 7i Tech Pubs table This displays the ap pointment in bold Out of office Physical 1 30p 3 00p Dr Goedken s Office New Tools 1 E gH Jl Ej Tap to access the Agenda view 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 53 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Month view displays symbols to indicate the types of appointments you have on a given day An upward triangle indicates a morning appointment a downward triangle indicates an afternoon appointment If you have ap pointments in the morning and afternoon a solid square is displayed If you have an all day event not marked Free a hollow square is displayed Calendar a March 2005 This displays a morning appointment This displays an all day event not marked Free This displays appointments in both morning and afternoon This displays an afternoon appointment Tap to access the Month view 54 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Creating or Changing an Appointment To create an appointment tap New To select a new date from a pop up calendar tap the display date To enter or select a new time tap the dis play time Enter the appointment details and when finished tap OK to return to
297. lems that result when an AP gets put on the rogue AP list due to inadvertant failed authentications and not because it is a real rouge Enable mixed cell Mixed cell is a profile dependent setting If enabled you can connect to mixed cell without using WEP then you can query the cell to deter mine whether you can use encryption Enable Logging Check this box to log what activity incurs for this profile 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Other Configurable Parameters The following parameters can be configured by sending reader commands through the network or from an application See Using Reader Com mands on page 394 for more information Options Off Very quiet Quiet Normal default Loud Very loud Reader Command Description Audio Volume Changes the volume of all audio signals 1 minute 2 minutes 3 minutes default minutes 5 minutes Sets the length of time the 700 Color Computer re mains on when there is no activity When you turn on the 700 Color Computer it either resumes exactly where it was when you turned it off or boots and restarts your application Automatic Shutoff HON WN KRO NH OO 10 seconds Backlight Timeout Sets the length of time that the display backlight re mains on If you set a longer timeout value you use the battery power at a faster rate 30 seconds 1 minute default 2 minutes 3 minutes 4 minutes 5
298. less network 108 Conserving battery power 2 413 Index Contacts adding a note 68 adding a telephone number CDMA radios 149 GSM radios 155 adding to speed dial 72 assigning to a category 69 changing 67 changing options 72 copying 69 creating 65 67 deleting 71 finding 71 MSN Messenger managing 90 sending messages 91 working with 89 Pocket Outlook 64 sending a message 70 Start menu icon 31 synchronizing 65 viewing 66 Control panel applets Audio 8 backlight 2 12 clock 395 data collection 302 beeper volume 9 beeper LED 332 imager 338 symbologies 303 symbology options 324 vibrator 22 virtual wedge 343 intemec settings beeper volume 10 vibrator 23 intermec settings 302 350 phone settings CDMA radios 151 GSM radios 156 power battery status 5 RAM maintenance 6 SNMP 351 identification 359 security 352 traps 357 system wireless network 135 373 unit information 362 battery status 5 363 CAB files 364 versions 20 362 utilities 366 app launch 369 dock switch 366 registry save 129 367 wakeup mask 368 wireless network 371 Converting writing to text 39 414 Copying contacts 69 Copying text Microsoft Reader 95 CORE 137 802 11 CF module 138 802 11 radio module details 139 general 138 accessing from Programs panel 137 Today screen 138 activating 137 installing available modules 137 loading a module 137 module for 802 11 NIC 267 WAN m
299. lt Active CLSI library system Not supported wben us ing an imager RO ROUNDED O Check digit Not used default Transmitted Not transmitted Bar code length Any length Minimum length default Fixed lengths Minimum length 003 254 Minimum length 3 254 default is 6 Fixed length 1 000 254 Fixed bar code length 0 254 default is 0 Fixed length 2 000 254 Fixed bar code length 0 254 default is 0 Fixed length 3 000 254 Fixed bar code length 0 254 default is 0 L4 Note If Bar code length 1 then Minimum length is entered If Bar code length 2 then Fixed length 1 Fixed length 2 or Fixed length 3 is entered Settings euius Q Data Collection amp Codabar lt 00001006000000000 gt Decoding Not active gt E Start Stop Not transmitted CLSI library system Not supported gt Check digit Not used Symbologies Symbology Options Beepel 4 gt New Tools Accounts 1 mj 306 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Em Pd RU ok Data Collection S UPC EAN lt 1111000111111100 gt UPCA vel UPC E lt Active gt EAN 8 Acbve EAN 13 Active TE Defaults Refresh Apply Synbolsies Symbology Options peepel XT New Tools Accounts RE I Appendix A Configurable Settings UPC EAN UPC EAN are fixed length numeric continuous symbologies that use four element widths Action Tap to expand the UPC EAN paramete
300. lt n ie areata EC qoe eta le ied 32 Pop up Menus eae Ped PPP EE eee DES Ried ELE MODE Ree aes od 33 Notifications MET 33 Entering INformations desise x leet oboe aye nec e pesi Ps gun Gite ina inan itp 34 Typing With the Onscreen Keyboard 2 2 Loci ota reete e aes 25 Using Block Rec gnizer y uis oS OPERE ERO DR TRE OS PR 36 Using Letter Recognizer 2 1 ee cece e 37 Using Transcriber er o ax obe tr los ot lo Cre oc pa e 37 Selecting Typed Text 6 wale ts oed da die hook E wee Mabel ve Suk 37 Witing ODE the AE eian wack eeu sen lus aan where ven tenon 38 Selecting the Wriung ipu Lacinia pus A eis te otc VR A oa p ated 38 Converting Writing tO Text ie eke ERN EEREEGQ E PE A RE 39 Diawinv ot the Screen cua dox bebe EE EE Geek EGER KE ERE E PP e EE 41 Creatina AD FAWN Tm 41 Selecting a Drawing cake qus nae dente A iode te rated ace dad pg 41 Recording a Messages uane vdd te Ve PER PI AR ea lis Vds 42 Creating a Recording doe RO oa ORE Rd soc seq eoe Oat kde a idet d 42 Using My Text etai pde erae AN 43 Finding and Organizing Information ox exec oa E FERE REX XC e cg 44 vi 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Contents Customizing Your 700 Color Computer i noue dcbet opes bn oboe ape Adarand pays 45 Adjusting Sets ed despierta de dryer a yo tose liat ach ord i epo nre dr ie A 45 Adding or Removing Programs 34 eo Ra ear e da Puce addu BA Rot a 45 Micros O ACUTE VE er LAS ak meee Eee ae WEE eae C DU SERO RUP REF ANE TU QUE 48
301. m 5 WindowsMedia com Tap the favorite you want to view Open Add Delete Ej Tap to add or delete a folder or favorite link The page that was downloaded the last time you synchronized with your desktop opens If the page is not on your 700 Color Computer the favor ite is dimmed Synchronize with your desktop again to download the page to your 700 Color Computer or connect to the Internet to view the page Browsing the Internet 1 Set up a connection to your ISP or corporate network using Connec tions as described in Getting Connected on page 100 2 To connect and start browsing do one of the following Tap the Favorites icon and then tap the favorite you want to view Tap View gt Address Bar In the address bar that appears at the top of the screen enter the Web address you want to visit and then tap Go Tap the arrow to choose from previously entered addresses x Note To add a favorite link while using the 700 Color Computer go to the page you want to add tap and hold on the page and tap Add to Favorites 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 99 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Getting Connected You can set up connections to the Internet and corporate network at work to do such activities as browsing the Internet or intranet sending and re ceiving e mail and instant messages and synchronizing information using ActiveSync Connections can be made using a modem wireless netw
302. m puter or on a network 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 31 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Navigation Bar and Command Bar 32 The navigation bar is located at the top of the screen It displays the active program and current time and allows you to switch to programs and close screens ty ActiveSync A Avalanche HEN Calendar m Contacts amp Inbox Internet Explorer JW Notes Tasks Windows Media fra Programs fr Settings Es Find Help e aE 12 24 Tap to switch to a program that you recently used Tap to switch to a program Tap to see more programs Tap to change device settings Tap to see a Help topic for the current screen Use the command bar at the bottom of the screen to perform tasks in pro grams The command bar includes menu names icons and the Input Panel icon To create a new item in the current program tap New To see the name of an icon tap and hold the stylus on the icon Drag the stylus off the icon so that the command is not carried out New Edit Tools E Tap to display the input panel Tap to select Tap to select menu commands icon commands 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Pop up Menus Notifications Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Use pop up menus to quickly perform an action on an item For example you can use a pop up menu to delete or make a copy of an item To access a pop up menu tap and hold t
303. m the center of the screen beneath the Downloads title 5 From beneath the Sierra Wireless Watcher Application title down load any of the CAB files shown then choose your carrier CAB files Intermec recommends one of two methods with which to load these CAB files onto your 760 Computer via the Microsoft ActiveSync application next paragraph or via a CompactFlash or Secure Digital storage card next page See Chapter 3 Installing Applications for more information about these methods 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Via Microsoft ActiveSync You can transfer files from your desktop to your 760 Computer via Micro soft ActiveSync See Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 for more infor mation about ActiveSync 1 Obtain software from the Intermec web site as described earlier Down load the software to any location on your 760 Computer such as the Temp folder via the My Device root location 2 Tap the carrier CAB file to install the application 3 Go to Finishing the Installation on page 164 Via a CompactFlash or Secure Digital Storage Card x Note These instructions are based on default locations You can change the location to which to copy your CAB files s 1 Make sure the Registry Restore feature on your 760 Computer is dis abled Select Start gt Settings gt the System tab Tap the Utilities desk Utilities top icon then the Registry Save ta
304. mally Used Prints the current working directory Not Normally Used Removes a directory 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 245 Chapter 7 Programming The following extended OEM commands are supported by the SITE request For Microsoft FTP cli ents you can send site commands by preceding the command with quote such as quote site status ATTRIB Gets or sets the attributes of a given file SITE ATTRIB Usage QUOTE SITE ATTRIB R R 4 4 S S 4 H pazh filename Sets an attribute Clears an attribute Read only file attribute Archive file attribute System file attribute H Hidden file attribute To retrieve the attributes of a file only specify the file The server response will be 200 AD SHRCEIX filename If the flag exists in its position shown above it is set Also in addition to the values defined above there is also defined C Compressed file attribute E Encrypted file attribute I INROM fle attribute X XIP file attribute execute in ROM not shadowed in RAM Reboots the server OS This will cause the system on which the server is executing to reboot The FTP Server will shut down cleanly before reboot All client connections will be terminated Cold boot is default except for the PocketPC build in which the default is warm boot STTE BOOT Usage QUOTE SITE BOOT WARM COLD Copies a file from one location to another STTE COPY Usage QUOTE SITE CO
305. ments in one of several views Day Week Month Year and Agenda and set Calendar to remind you of ap pointments with a sound or other method Appointments for the day can display on the Today screen If you use Outlook on your desktop you can synchronize appointments between your device and desktop LES calendar quis x Tap to go to Today Jan 28 05 sMr wi s E Out of office Andrew s foot appointment 6 00a 7 00a Massif s office Tap to display or edit Eat with Supervisor the appointment details 12 00p 1 00p New Tools s E mj Tap to create a new appointment 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Synchronizing Calendar Calendar items stored on your device can be synchronized with calendar items on your desktop or Microsoft Exchange Server Note that you can only synchronize information directly with an Exchange Server if your company is running Microsoft Mobile Information Server 2002 or later Calendar synchronization is automatically selected in ActiveSync Calendar items entered on one computer are copied to the other during synchronization Handwritten notes and drawings are saved as metafiles pictures For more information on synchronization see ActiveSync Help on the desktop Why Use Categories in the Calendar Use categories to group related tasks contacts and appointments Then use these groupings to quickly display only the information you w
306. minute EZ1 Set Automatic Shutoff to 2 minutes EZ2 Set Automatic Shutoff to 3 minutes default 4EZ3 Set Automatic Shutoff to 4 minutes EZ4 Set Automatic Shutoff to 5 minutes EZ5 Note The Backlight Timeout parameter information is on page 393 Backlight Timeout 10 seconds DF10 Backlight Timeout 30 seconds DF30 Backlight Timeout 1 minute default DF60 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 397 Appendix A Configurable Settings Backlight Timeout 2 minutes DF120 Backlight Timeout 3 minutes DF180 Backlight Timeout 4 minutes DF240 Backlight Timeout 5 minutes DF300 Key Clicks L Note The Key Clicks parameter information is on page 393 Disable key clicks 4 KC0 Enable soft key clicks KC1 Enable loud key clicks default KC2 398 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Virtual Wedge Grid Preamble Postamble The following parameters are user configurable strings Refer to a full ASCII chart for more information Grid For Virtual Wedge Grid the first part of the bar code would be the fol lowing which can include a string of up to 240 characters Parameter in formation starts on page 348 AF Preamble For Virtual Wedge Preamble the first part of the bar code would be be low followed by a string of up to 31 characters no lt NUL gt an
307. minutes SITE TIMEOUT Usage QUOTE SITE TIMEOUT seconds EKEY Gives site command electronic key information SITE HELP Usage QUOTE SITE EKEY command EVAL Gives site command electronic value information SITE HELP Usage QUOTE SITE EVAL command GVAL Gives site command general value information SITE HELP Usage QUOTE SITE GVAL command PVAL Gives site command value information SITE HELP Usage QUOTE SITE PVAL command The remaining FTP requests specified in RFC 959 are recognized but not implemented The banner returned in the parenthetical portion of its greeting shows the version number of the FTP Server as well as the MAC address serial num ber and operating system of the machine hosting the server The FTP Server supports browsing from the latest Netscape and Microsoft web browsers Drag and drop capability is available using this environ ment The FTPDCMDS subdirectory contains commands to use from the web browser Click EXITME BIN to execute a SITE EXIT command Click REBOOTME BIN to execute SITE BOOT command Use the GET command on these files to have the FTP Server execute these commands e Security A customer configurable access control list may be installed on the 700 Color Computer This list will allow customers to restrict access via the FTP Server to users they wish and is in addition to default Intermec accounts that are disabled using the F0 option at runtime The access contr
308. mode GetAuthenticationMode ULONG amp RADIO_AUTH_MODE_OPEN 802 11 Open Authentication Indicates that the radio is using an open system RADIO AUTH MODE SHARED 802 11 Shared Authentication Indicates that the radio is using a shared key RADIO AUTH MODE AUTO Auto switch between Open Shared Indicates automatic detection is used when available RADIO AUTH MODE ERROR Defined as error value Indicates the authen tication mode was not determined at this time or is unknown NDIS RADIO AUTH MODE WPA WPA Authentication NDIS RADIO AUTH MODE _WPA_PSK WPA Preshared Key Authentication NDIS RADIO AUTH MODE WPA NONE WPA None ERROR SUCCESS when successful ERR QUERY FAILED when the query failed or ERR CONNECT FAILED ifa connection with the radio failed Data is only valid if ERROR SUCCESS is returned Also if ERROR SUCCESS is returned your USHORT reference is populated with one of the parameters listed above ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN GetAuthenticationMode ULONG amp else UINT GetAuthenticationMode ULONG amp fendif GetBSSID Call this function to get the current MAC address BSSID of the service set In ESS mode this is the MAC address of the access point the radio is associated with In IBSS mode this is a randomly generated MAC address and serves as the ID for the IBSS UINT GetBSSID TCHAR Pointer to a character array which is populated with t
309. more information about the Contacts application lt EEE ol 1 Voice Mail 000 000 9420 Call History Tap Call History to note the telephone numbers that were previously dialed from this 761 Computer EJ Phone EM CESE ok all Calls ua 45200632888566 1 04 p ad 852 3665 1 03p ad 2913193698450 1 03p Tools E b 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 149 Chapter 4 Network Support 150 Tools Use the Tools menu to send a voice mail access the Activation Wizard send an SMS email message or configure phone settings Tap Tools gt Voice Mail to call and leave a voice message Tap Tools Activation Wizard to access the wizard with which to acti vate your 761 Computer Be sure to have an activation code a phone number and MSID information ready See page 144 for instructions on using this wizard Your PCS wireless device must be activated For activation you will need to provide an Activation Code Phone Number MON and MSID information The activation process has been automated for your convenience recommended or you may use Manual Activation For Auto Activation click Suto and the wizard will connect to the verizon Wireless Network to activate the device Please make sure you are in a strong signal area before beginning this pracess Ej Sprint Networks Verizon Networks Tap Tools gt Send SMS tab to access the Inbox appl
310. mware WinCfg Configures the NRINET INI file launches the NRINet client and loads and unloads the LAN and WLAN device drivers Wireless Printing Sample Installs a sample application that developers can use for reference when they are developing their own Wireless Printing applications The source code for this application is included as part of the Bluetooth Re source Kit in the IDL which is available as a download from the Inter mec web site at www intermec com Contact your Intermec representa tive for more information ActiveX Control Tools This lists some of the CAB files that may be available with which to install ActiveX Control Tools See the online help for more information AXCommunication Communication controls that transmit or receive messages from in put connections AXFileTransfer File transfer controls that transmit and receive files using the Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP AXReaderCommand Reader command functions that modify and retrieve configuration information from your 700 Color Computer AXVWedge The virtual wedge control that retrieves scanned ADC data and sends it to the keyboard driver to interpret data as keyboard input 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 365 Appendix A Configurable Settings Utilities Control Panel Applet Dock Switch 366 i Utilities Utilities The Utilities control panel applet examines and modifies settings and op
311. n 147 Chapter 4 Network Support Phone Application 148 Z Phone Note Wait at least four hours after Sprint activation is complete before using this application Data provisioning should occur automatically Net work information about your 761 Computer needs to propogate through the Sprint Network after the activation is complete If data provisioning does not occur automatically tap Start gt Settings gt the Personal tab gt the Phone icon Tap the Data tab then tap Provision to initiate a session Tap the appropriate keys to enter a telephone number then tap Talk to dial the number Tap End to hang up the phone Phone e d 12 55 Hs a Sprint 2913193608450 ES gm Pe lo Pe fe eu Edit Tools _ Tap this to backspace one digit Tap this to dial the phone number shown above the keypad Speed Dia Tap this to select a previously dialed number Call History Tap this to view your previous calls Tap this to hang up your current call Tap this toggle the mute option Tap this to access the Contacts application Tap this to access the Notes application 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Speed Dial Tap Speed Dial to select a telephone number with which the 761 Com puter is to dial automatically To add to this list use the Contacts applica tion See Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 for
312. n 377 zero configuration WEP encryption 110 802 11 CF radio CORE module 138 installing available modules 137 loading a module 137 A Abstract Syntax Notation 1 See ASN 1 Accessory list 24 Accounts via Inbox 79 Activation wizard Phone application CDMA radios 150 phone application CDMA radios 144 146 ActiveSync ActiveSync Help 49 adding programs 46 adding programs to Start menu 47 Folder behavior connected to e mail server 78 installing applications 121 Microsoft Reader 93 Pocket Internet Explorer favorite links 96 mobile favorites 97 Mobile Favorites folder 96 replicating registry settings 124 Start menu icon 31 URL 48 Windows Mobile 48 ActiveX control tools unit information control panel CAB files 365 AD command with without data 345 Adding bookmarks Microsoft Reader 95 Adding drawings to text Microsoft Reader 95 Adding programs ActiveSync 46 Pocket Internet Explorer 46 to the Start menu 47 via ActiveSync 47 via File Explorer 47 Windows Mobile 45 Adjusting settings Windows Mobile 45 Adobe Acrobat Reader URL 184 AE command with without data 347 Aimer LED Duration configuration parameter 338 All Day events Calendar 52 creating 56 Alpha plane on keypad 293 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Alphanumeric keypad alpha blue key sequences 16 gold white key sequences 14 registry settings alpha plane 293 gold plane 293 unshifted plane 293 scan code
313. n when the scan button is pressed After this time images are captured for decoding The purpose is to position the Aimer LED on the bar code sym bol before attempting to decode the bar code Note that this is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Color Computer Action Tap the Aimer LED Duration parameter then enter a value to change this setting Note that values must be in 50 ms increments such as 500 650 or 32500 Values not entered in 50 ms increments are rounded down For example 2489 ms is rounded down to 2450 ms 149 ms is rounded down to 100 ms etc SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 3 1 1 21 1 Options 0 65500 ms Default is 0 Settings exin D Data Collection Aimer LED Duration msecs lt gt E Sticky Aimer Duration msecs lt 1000 gt amp Image Dimension 000639000479 gt Lighting Made LED Priority gt 1D OmniDir Decode Enable Mot Available eee B Aimer LED Duration msecs a Beeper LED Imager Virtual Wedge ale New Tools Accounts 1 mlj 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Sticky Aimer Duration The Sticky Aimer Duration controls the time the Aimer LED stays on af ter the a bar code read completes or after the trigger button is released Note that this is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Col or Computer Action Tap the Sticky Aimer Duration parameter then enter a valu
314. n an SNMP enabled network The 700 Color Computer supports four proprietary Management Infor mation Bases MIBs and Intermec Technologies provides SNMP support for MIB II through seven read only MIB II RFC1213 MIB Object Identifiers OIDs 6 Note You can only query these seven OIDs through an SNMP manage ment station Management Information Base The Management Information Base is a database that contains information about the elements to be managed The information identifies the manage ment element and specifies its type and access mode Read Only Read Write MIBs are written in ASN 1 Abstract Syntax Notation 1 a ma chine independent data definition language Note Elements to be managed are represented by objects The MIB is a structured collection of such objects You will find the following MIB files either in the 700 Color Management Tools or on the web via www intermec com INTERMEC MIB Defines the root of the Intermec MIB tree e ITCADC MIB Defines objects for Automated Data Collection ADC such as bar code symbologies ITCSNMP MIB Defines objects for Intermec SNMP parameters and security methods such as an SNMP security IP address ITCTERMINAL MIB Defines objects for 700 Color parameters such as key clicks 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 195 Chapter 4 Network Support Object Identifiers Each object has a unique identifier called an OID which consist of a se que
315. n is returned The buffer points to various structure types defined in nled h depending on the value of 2 4 as detailed in the following table Value of nID LED COUNT INFO NLED SUPPORTS INFO NLED SETTINGS INFO NLEDSetDevice Usage include nled h Syntax Structure in pOutput NLED_COUNT_INFO NLED_SUPPORTS_INFO NLED_SETTINGS_INFO BOOL NLEDSetDevice UINT nDeviceld void pInput Parameters nDeviceld Integer specifying the device identification The following is defined NLED SETTINGS INFO ID Contains information about the desired LED settings plnput Pointer to the buffer that contains the NLED SETTINGS INFO structure 290 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 7 Programming Reboot Functions There are several methods via Kernel I O Control functions that an ap plication program can use to force the 700 Color Computer to reboot IOCTL HAL REBOOT IOCTL HAL REBOOT performs a warm boot See page 263 IOCTL HAL COLDBOOT Invoking the KernelIOControl function with IOCTL HAL COLDBOOT forces a cold reboot This resets the 700 Color Computer and reloads Windows CE as if a power up was performed The contents of the Windows CE RAM based object store are discarded See page 260 IOCTL HAL WARMBOOT This function is supported on 700 Color Computers It performs a warm boot of the system preserving the object store See page 260 700 Series Color Mobile Computer U
316. n profile 152 view current phone settings 153 voice mail 150 GSM radios 154 adding contact to speed dial 155 call history 155 customizing phone settings 156 finding setting selecting networks 158 sending SMS messages 156 service settings 157 view current phone settings 158 Phone Info Phone application CDMA radios 153 WAN info GSM radios 158 Phone jack position control panel applet 366 419 Index Phone settings control panel applet CDMA radios 151 GSM radios 156 customizing via Phone application CDMA radios 151 GSM radios 156 network settings GSM radios 158 view current settings via Phone application CDMA radios 153 view current settings via WAN info GSM radios 158 PhoneUtility 159 ring 160 vibrate 160 Physical dimensions specifications 26 Planes keypad 292 Plessey configuration parameter 312 user ID 327 Pocket Excel about 86 creating a workbook 86 Pocket Internet Explorer about 96 adding programs 46 AvantGo channels 98 browsing the Internet 99 favorite links 96 getting connected 100 mobile favorites 97 Mobile Favorites folder 96 software build 20 Start menu icon 31 viewing mobile favorites and channels 99 Pocket Outlook 50 Calendar 50 Pocket Word about 82 creating a document 82 drawing mode 85 recording mode 84 synchronizing 85 tips 87 typing mode 83 writing mode 84 POP3 Folder behavior connected to e mail server 78 Postamble configuration parame
317. n the query failed or ERR CONNECT FAILED if a connection with the radio failed If ERROR SUCCESS is returned your TCHAR array contains a string formatted as follows IP DHCP Enabled nxxx xxx xxx xxx n Or IP DHCP Disabled nxxx xxx xxx xxx n ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT PFN GetRadioIpAddress TCHAR else UINT GetRadioIpAddress TCHAR fendif GetCCXStatus Call this function to get information about the current CCX status of the adapter UINT GetCCXStatus ULONG amp NDIS NETWORK EAP MODE OFF Disable EAP mode NDIS NETWORK EAP MODE ON Enable EAP mode ERROR SUCCESS when successful ERR QUERY FAILED when the query failed or ERR CONNECT FAILED if a connection with the radio failed If ERROR SUCCESS is returned your ULONG reference is populated with one of parameters listed above ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN GetCCXStatus ULONG amp else UINT GetCCXStatus ULONG amp fendif 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 277 Chapter 7 Programming Set Information Functions AddWep Call this function to add a WEP key to the radio Call this function multi ple times when adding more than one WEP key Save the default key for last For example when adding four keys and the second key is the default transmit key add keys 1 3 and 4 before you add key 2 Z Note Add the default transmit key last Syntax UINT AddWep ULONG BOOL TCHAR P
318. n to Windows Mobile 2003 upgraded all illustra tions to gray scale added new Imager functions moved the Automatic Data Collection COM Interface material to the SDK User s Manual Added 730 Computer information revised CDMA Setup information and revised Wire less Area Network Printing information Updated 802 11 security supplicant information Added new network selection APIs Incorporated information about the Intermec Settings control panel applet for PSM Builds 3 00 or newer Added information about the PhoneUtility application Revised Chapter 4 Network Support Added tethered scanner and internal scanner configura tion and troubleshooting information to Chapter 6 Scanner Support Added information about resetting the 700 Series Computer Updated the Profile Wizard information in Appendix A Configurable Settings Revised information about using Sprint Watcher and added information about a Phone application for units with COMA or GSM radios in Chapter 4 Network Support Added information about the 741 751 and 761 Computers and the MC46 Radio Added information on performing a warm boot LED status replicating settings using the registry troubleshooting and specifications 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual iii 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Contents Contents Before You Debit a uri oar at oar wie AA xix SAO eet s eu a E ee RO LAE E P E EL LLL P E xix D
319. n32 APIs The driver supports communications to 6804DM 6804T 6805A 6806 6808 681T and PB20 printers over a selected serial port DTR Driver Installation and Removal Your application must install the device driver by using the RegisterDe vice function The driver name is ONEIL DLL We recommend that you use DTR for the Device Name parameter 1 for the Device Driv er index parameter and use any of the following strings for the last param eter NULL 220 Defaults to COMI 9600 e COMI only COM port specified defaults to 9600 e COM1 9600 sets to COM port and specified bit rate e COM1 19200 sets to COM port and specified bit rate Use the HANDLE returned by RegisterDevice as the parameter to DeregisterDevice The correct usage of the RegisterDevice function call is demonstrated below You may use DeregisterDevice to uninstall the driver Install HANDLE hDevice TCHAR port 6 port 0 TCHAR C port 1 TCHAR O port 2 TCHAR M port 3 TCHAR 1 port 4 TCHAR port 5 TCHAR 0 hDevice RegisterDevice DWORD port 204 TEXT DTR 1 TEXT NNWINDOWSNNONEIL DLL 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 5 Printer Support Opening the DTR Driver The application opens the DTR driver by using the CreateFile function The call can be implemented as follows hFile Cr
320. name hProcList CreateToolhelp32Snapshot TH32CS SNAPPROCESS O0 if hProcList INVALID HANDLE VALUE return FALSE end if memset amp peProcess 0 sizeof peProcess peProcess dwSize sizeof peProcess if Process32First hProcList amp peProcess CloseToolhelp32Snapshot hProcList return FALSE end if thDeviceProcessID 0 do tcslwr peProcess szExeFile if tcsstr peProcess szExeFile lpname thDeviceProcessID peProcess th32ProcessID break end if while Process32Next hProcList amp peProcess if GetLastError ERROR NO MORE FILES amp amp thDeviceProcessID 0 yy o CloseToolhelp32Snapshot hProcList return FALSE end if CloseToolhelp32Snapshot hProcList return TRUE IsProcessRunning COdeINSTALL INIT Install Init HWND hwndParent BOOL fFirstCall BOOL fPreviouslyInstalled LPCTSTR pszInstallDir return CcodeINSTALL INIT CONTINUE E codeINSTALL_EXIT Install_Exit HWND hwndParent LPCTSTR pszInstallDir WORD cFailedDirs WORD cFailedFiles WORD cFailedRegKeys 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 237 Chapter 7 Programming WORD cFailedRegVals WORD cFailedShortcuts HANDLE h TCHAR srcfile MAX PATH TCHAR dstfile MAX PATH if cFailedDirs cFailedFiles
321. nc see ActiveSync Help Once installation is complete tap Start gt Programs and then the program icon to switch to it Adding a Program Directly from the Internet 1 Determine your 700 Color Computer and processor type so that you know which version of the software to install Tap Start gt Settings gt the System tab gt About gt the Version tab then make a note of the information in Processor Download the program to your 700 Color Computer straight from the Internet using Pocket Internet Explorer You may see a single XIP EXE or ZIP file a SETUP EXE file or several versions of files for different 700 Color Computer types and processors Be sure to select the program designed for the Windows Mobile and your 700 Color Computer processor type Read program installation instructions Read Me files or other docu mentation Many programs provide installation instructions 4 Tap the file such as a XIP or EXE file to start the installation wi zard Follow the directions on the screen 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Adding a Program to the Start Menu Tap Start gt Settings gt Menus gt the Start Menu tab and then the check box for the program If you do not see the program listed you can either use File Explorer on the 700 Color Computer to move the program to the Start Menu folder or use ActiveSync on the desktop to create a shortcut to the program
322. nce of integer values represented in dot notation Objects are stored in a tree structure and OIDs are assigned based on the position of the object in the tree For example the internet OID is equal to 1 3 6 1 Seven MIB OIDs are shown in the following table MIB Object Identifiers MIB II Item OID Group or Table Description ifNumber 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 1 0 Interfaces Group Indicates the number of adapters present in the system For the 700 Color Computer if one adapter is present in the system then Num ber 1 and iflndex 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 ifIndex Interfaces Table ifTable A unique value for each interface The value ranges between 1 and the value of ifNumber ifDescr 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 ifIndex Interfaces Table ifTable A textual string containing informa tion about the interface ifType 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 3 ifIndex Interfaces Table ifTable An integer containing information about the type of the interface It is equal to 1 for Other ipAdEntAddr 1 3 6 1 2 1 4 20 1 1 IpAddress IP address Table The IP address to which this entry s ipAddrTable addressing information pertains same as 700 IP address where IP Address is the valid non zero IP ad dress of the 700 Color Computer ipAdEntflndex 1 3 6 1 2 1 4 20 1 2 IpAddress IP address Table The index value that uniquely iden ipAddrTable tifies the interface to which this entry is applicable same as ifIndex ipAdEntNetMask 1 3 6 1 2 1 4 20 1 3 IpAddress IP addr
323. nction to set the desired power mode UINT SetPowerMode ULONG mode NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_CAM Continuous Access Mode ze always on NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_PSP Power Saving Mode NDIS_RADIO_POWER_UNKNOWN Unknown power mode NDIS_RADIO_POWER_AUTO Auto Available for 730 Computers NDIS RADIO POWER MODE FAST PSP Fast PSP good savings fast ERROR SUCCESS when successful ERR QUERY FAILED when the query failed or ERR CONNECT FAILED ifa connection with the radio failed None ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN SetPowerMode ULONG mode else UINT SetPowerMode ULONG mode fendif 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 281 Chapter 7 Programming Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions 282 SetSSID Call this function with a pointer to a null terminated TCHAR array con taining the desired SSID to set the desired SSID of the adapter UINT SetSSID TCHAR Pointer to a character array that contains the desired SSID This should be null terminated ERROR SUCCESS when successful ERR QUERY FAILED when the query failed or ERR CONNECT FAILED if a connection with the radio failed If an ANY network is desired pass in _T ANY ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN SetSSID TCHAR else UINT SetSSID TCHAR
324. nd is identified with an CycleAdjust of 1 The vibrate option is only available in the notifications panel when the vibrator is pres ent in the system Regarding an applications interface to NLED DLL LEDs must be avail able for use by applications This is possible via two functions exported by the COREDLL DLL file To use the LED functions declare these as ex tern C as follows extern C BOOL WINAPI NLEDGetDevicelnfo UINT nInfoId void pOutput extern C BOOL WINAPI NLEDSetDevice UINT nDeviceId void pInput The LEDs are enumerated for access through the data structures associated with these APIs e Notification LED 0 Radio On LED 1 does not apply to the 730 Computer Alpha Lock LED 2 e Scanner LED 3 Low Battery 4 Vibrator 5 does not apply to the 730 Computer 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 289 Chapter 7 Programming NLEDGetDevicelnfo Usage include nled h Syntax BOOL NLEDGetDeviceInfo UINT nInfold void pOutput Parameters Integer specifying the information to return These values are defined NLED COUNT INFO NLED SUPPORTS INFO ID NLED SETTINGS INFO ID Indicates the pOutput buffer specifies the number of LEDs on the device Indicates the pOutput buffer specifies information about the capabilities supported by the LED Indicates the pOutput buffer contains information about the LED current settings Pointer to the buffer to which the informatio
325. nge this parameter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 4 1 6 1 Options x where x is a single ASCII character Default is A UPCE User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter you can set your own ASCII character to identify UPC E bar code data Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer Action Tap to expand the Symbology ID parameter select the UPC E user ID parameter then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 4 1 7 1 Options x where x is a single ASCII character Default is E 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 327 Appendix A Configurable Settings Action SNMP OID Options Action SNMP OID Options Action SNMP OID Options Action SNMP OID Options 328 EAN 8 User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter you can set your own ASCII character to identify EAN 8 bar code data Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer Tap 4 to expand the Symbology ID parameter select the EAN 8 user ID parameter then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 4 1 8 1 x where x is a single ASCII character Default is xFF EAN 13 User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter you can set your own ASCII character to identify EAN 13 European Article Numbering
326. ngs up an Open File dialog and browse SD or CF storage cards for new applications To disable or unmap a currently mapped application from a correspon ding button select unassigned from the applicable drop down list To restore these buttons to their defaults tap Defaults in the lower right corner 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 369 Appendix A Configurable Settings Z Note You cannot map an application to more than one button Should you assign the same application to two buttons a verification prompt will appear after the second button to confirm whether you want to remap the application If you tap Yes the applet changes the first button to unas signed and map the application to the second button oe Note All changes are activated immediately upon selection 370 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Wireless Network Control Panel Applet Z Note See Chapter 4 Network Support for information about the 802 11b or 802 11b g radio module About the Wireless Network Terminology Your wireless adapter network interface card connects to wireless net works of two types infrastructure networks and ad hoc networks Infrastructure networks get you onto your corporate network and the internet Your 700 Color Computer establishes a wireless connection to an access point which links you to the rest of the network When you co
327. ning 285 isZeroConfigEnabled 284 ITC_ DOCK SWITCH 256 ITC_ WAKEUP MASK 256 ITC AMBIENT FRONTLIGHT 256 ITC AMBIENT KEYBOARD 256 ITC DEVID 80211RADIO INTEL 2011B 253 ITC DEVID 80211RADIO MAX values ITC DEVID 80211RADIO INTEL 2011B 253 ITC DEVID 80211RADIO NONE 253 ITC DEVID 80211RADIO NONE 253 ITC DEVID INTERMEC EVIO 253 ITC DEVID INTERMEC2D IMAGER 253 ITC DEVID OEM2D IMAGER 253 ITC DEVID SCANHW MAX values ITC DEVID INTERMEC EVIO 253 ITC DEVID INTERMEC2D IMAGER 253 ITC DEVID OEM2D IMAGER 253 ITC DEVID SCANHW NONE 253 ITC DEVID SE900 LASER 253 ITC DEVID SE900HS LASER 253 ITC DEVID SCANHW NONE 253 ITC DEVID SE900 LASER 253 ITC DEVID SE900HS LASER 253 ITC DEVID WANRADIO NONE 253 ITC DEVID WANRADIO SIEMENS MC4AS 253 406 ITC DEVID WANRADIO SIEMENS MC4AG 253 ITC DEVID WANRADIO SIERRA SB555 253 ITC DEVID WANRADIO XIRCOM GEM3503 253 ITC IFTP STOP 248 ITC NVPARM 80211 INSTALLED 253 ITC NVPARM 80211 RADIOTYPE 253 ITC NVPARM ANTENNA DIVERSITY 252 ITC NVPARM BLUETOOTH INSTALLED 254 ITC NVPARM CONTRAST 252 ITC NVPARM DISPLAY TYPE 252 ITC NVPARM ECN 252 ITC NVPARM EDBG SUBNET 252 ITC NVPARM EDG IP 252 ITC NVPARM ETHERNET ID 251 ITC NVPARM INTERMEC DATACOLLEC TION HW 253 ITC NVPARM INTERMEC DATACOLLEC TION SW 253 ITC NVPARM INTERMEC SOFTWARE CON TENT 252 ITC NVPARM LAN9000 INSTALLED 254 ITC NVPARM MANF DATE 251 ITC NVPARM MCO
328. nnect to a network via an access point you are using the 802 11b or 802 11b g infrastructure mode e Ad hoc networks are private networks shared between two or more cli ents even with no access point Each wireless network is assigned a name or Service Set Identifier SSID to allow multiple networks to coexist in the same area without in fringement Intermec Technologies recommends using security measures with wireless networks to prevent unauthorized access to your network and to ensure your privacy of transmitted data The following are required elements for secure networks Authentication by both the network and the user Authentication is cryptographically protected Transmitted data There are many schemes available for implementing these features Below are terms you may encounter as you configure your wireless net work CKIP Cisco Key Integrity Protocol This is Cisco s version of the TKIP protocol compatible with Cisco Airnet products EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol 802 11b or 802 11b g uses this protocol to perform authentication This is not necessarily an authentication mechanism but is a common framework for transporting actual authentication protocols Intermec Technologies provides a number of EAP protocols for you to choose the best for your network 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 371 Appendix A 372 Configurable Settings TKIP Temporal Key Integrity Proto
329. nner firmware Reset Factory Defaults Scan the EasySet software bar code label Reset Factory Default to restore all of your scanner s configurations to their factory defaults When this command label is scanned reinitialize the tethered scanner such as disable the scanner port state then enable it on the 700 Computer Otherwise the online configuration and scanning on the 700 Computer are not func tional In general scan this label only to initially reset the scanner Do not scan EasySet command labels to change the following settings Symbologies code mark Code 128 EAN29 Identifier Preamble and Postamble Enable Disable symbologies Symbology ID transmit option In some cases scanning EasySet Command labels cause the current setting on the user interface to be out of sync with the scanner settings However in some cases scanning these labels does corrupt scanned data The Open COMx error 0x00000037 message appears if the COM port cannot open due to another application using the port Disable that ap plication to free up the COMI port before you can enable the scanner x is the COM port number such as 1 2 or 3 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 221 Chapter 6 Scanner Support Tethered Scanner Supported Symbologies Symbologies Code39 UPC EAN Code 128 Interleaved 2 of 5 Code 93 Codabar Code 2 of 5 MSI Plessey Code 11 Matrix 2 of 5 Telepen PDF417 Micro PDF417 MaxiCode D
330. nner port Symbologies Symbology Options Scanner Settings Scanner model 1591E t ASCII Decode Security virtual Wedge Magstripe Reader File Edit view Help la Ej 5 Make sure a scanner is properly connected to your 700 Computer tap to check Enable scanner port then tap File gt Save Settings from the bottom of the screen These changes take several moments to reset Mari mb gt fgg Intermec Settings er m 2 18 hata Collection H Internal Scanner Symbologies H Symbology Options J Scanner Settings Scanner model 15516 Hardware trigger Fe Number of good read beeps Scanner Port Settings Imager Settings Decode Security Virtual Wedge 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 219 Chapter 6 Scanner Support 220 1551E or 1553 Selected for Scanner Model When 1551E or 1553 is selected from the Scanner model option see step 4 above and the port state is already enabled see step 5 the process will take several moments to reset When 1551E or 1553 is successfully connected during this step the unit will emit some beeps Here the termi nal is initializing the scanner at 9600 for the baud rate 7 data bits even parity and 2 stop bits and synchronizing the terminal s configuration with the attached scanner With 1551E or 1553 selected Symbologies Symbology Options Hardware Trigger and Scanner Port se
331. ns 000006 gt Code 128 FNCL character lt gt amp Plessey lt OO0006 gt amp MSI lt 000006 gt Symbologies Symbology Options Beepel 4 gt mj This illustration is from a 700 Color Computer using a laser scanner 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 309 Appendix A Configurable Settings Code 128 Options Set the following for the Code 128 parameter Note that the EAN 128 CI and CIP 128 French Pharmaceutical options are not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer Action Tap to expand the Code 128 Options parameter select a setting then select an option to change this setting SNMP OID None Options EAN 128 C1 Identifier Remove default Not supported when using an Include imager CIP 128 French Pharmaceutical Not active default Not supported when using an Active imager Bar code length Any length default Minimum length Minimum length 001 254 Minimum length 1 254 default is 6 AY settinos cio Data Collection i amp Code 128 options 000006 gt 00 DEAN 128 C1 Identifier Remove CIP 128 French Pharmaceutical lt h Bar code length lt Any length Minimum length 6 AA Change Code 93 Setting ee Mot active D Active Symbologies Symbology Options Beepel 4 gt This illustration is from a 700 Color Computer using a laser scanner 310 700 Series Colo
332. ns 25 integrated wireless 25 keypad options 25 memory and storage 25 microprocessor 25 modems 25 operating system 25 physical dimensions 26 power 26 regulatory approvals 26 standard communications 26 Speed dial Phone application CDMA radios 149 GSM radios 155 Sprint activation process 172 SSID network name 802 11 radio module 374 Standard 2 of 5 configuration parameter 305 user ID 327 Standard communications specifications 26 Start Menu adding programs 47 via ActiveSync 47 via File Explorer 47 Static IP replicating registry settings 123 Status icons Windows Mobile 30 Sticky Aimer Duration configuration parameter 339 Storage media 21 specifications 25 Stream device driver NPCPPORT DLL 199 ONEIL DLL 204 Suffix configuration parameter 331 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Symbologies internal scanner supported symbologies 212 scanning labels 396 tethered scanner supported symbologies 222 user IDs Codabar 325 Code 11 329 Code 128 325 Code 39 325 Code 93 326 EAN 13 328 EAN 8 328 Interleaved 2 of 5 326 Matrix 2 of 5 328 MSI 326 PDF417 326 Plessey 327 Standard 2 of 5 327 Telepen 328 UPC A 327 UPC E 327 when not available imager 312 313 314 316 318 319 320 laser scanner 321 322 323 Synchronizing AvantGo channels 98 Calendar 51 contacts 65 e mail messages 77 favorite links 96 mobile favorites 97 notes 76 Pocket Word 85 Tasks
333. nt You can cut copy and paste selected drawings by tapping and holding the selected drawing and then tapping an editing command on the pop up menu or by tapping the command on the Edit menu To resize a drawing make sure the Pen icon is not selected and drag a selection handle 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 41 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Recording a Message 42 In any program where you can write or draw on the screen you can also quickly capture thoughts reminders and phone numbers by recording a message In the Inbox program you can add a recording to an e mail message In Calendar Tasks and Contacts you can include a recording in the Notes tab In the Notes program you can create a stand alone recording or add a recording to an open note Creating a Recording 1 Hold the 700 Color Computer s microphone near your mouth or source of sound 2 Tap e and make your recording 3 Tap m when finished If you are recording in an open note an icon appears in the note If you are creating a stand alone recording it ap pears in the note list 4 To play a recording tap the recording icon in the open note or tap the recording in the note list Note To quickly create a recording hold down the Record hardware icon When you hear the beep begin your recording Release the icon when you are finished The new recording is stored in the open note or as a stand alone recording if no note is
334. nterface Specification tray application Built in Ethernet Wireless 802 11 No networking AutoFTP On AutoFTP Off J then the Ethernet icon shown to the left appears in the System Tray as circled in the following illustration e d 9 05 Friday February 11 2005 Tap here to set owner information ga 9 154M 10 154M No unread messages 3 Active tasks 1 High priority Wireless 802 11 Communications When Wireless 802 11 is selected via the NDISTRAY pop up menu Built in Ethernet Wireless 802 11 No networking AutoFTP On AutoFTP Off 134 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Y the Wireless 802 11 antenna icon shown to the left appears in the system tray as circled in the following illustration Start LIE Friday February 11 2005 Tap here to set owner information 9 154M 10 154M Ma unread messages 3 Active tasks 1 High priority ZP To configure wireless 802 11 communications on the 700 Color ee Computer tap Start gt Settings gt the System tab gt the Wireless Network Wireless icon to access the Profile Wizard for the 802 11b or 802 11b g radio Network module Go to Appendix A Configurable Settings for information No Networking Jg When No networking is selected from the NDISTRAY pop up menu the disconnected icon shown to the left appears in the system tray as circled in the following illustration Start t d 11 08
335. ntermec rec ommends using the following for establishing and maintaining connection to the WAN radio Custom application using Intermec WWAN Toolkit API Custom customer application using Connection Manager Interface Telus and Bell Mobility Activation Activation of Bell Mobility and Telus are similar to the first portion of the Sprint activation process Follow the instructions for manual activation using the Bell Mobility Watcher CAB or Telus Watcher CAB file to install the applicable application Enter the activation lock codes and phone num bers as requested Username Password SID Information Username Password Bell Mobility 10 digit phone number 1xbell ca Original Voice Mail system pass word usually a 4 digit number This is available from the activat ing organization 16420 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Telus 10 digit phone number 1x telusmobility com The 11 digit ESN printed inside the 760 Computer battery compartment begins with 099 16422 183 Chapter 4 Network Support AT Command Interface 760 Computers This interface specification is based on the following recommendation ETSI GSM 07 05 European Digital Cellular Telecommunication System phase 2 Use of DTE DCE interface for Short message and cell broadcast service ETSI GSM 07 07 European Digital Cellular Telecommunication System phase 2 AT command set for GSM Mobile Equipment ITU T R
336. o not repair or adjust along a talent vaca Nop equa DARE ERA xix Firstaid i iau wpa tata URL ep A escam dua xix Resuscitation ce Seer ipee egeret n den al RS ER xix Energized equipment 1 ca xix rade M PD Ere Xx Global Services and SIPPSS NA xxi Warranty Information o ao odeack eos Faden deck eC ER ds Sa nce E Rs xxi Web SUDDOLD ep Sie cede OS Ra o Rt a A xxi Telephone Supports A xxi Who Should Read this Manual 4 1 ercer ee xxii Related DOGMAS itise anen Parco ue tate d gala rao Pueri de is a Sue am xxii Patent Information id E aee b a RD RD pee Bae eee wae Bee re E xxiii 1 IntFOGU CHOR osito carl Lepus Lu Psion darn dti sioe 1 Ambient Light Se sor AS EE E eque P wees ea erae ARE 2 A dio System deca a cre sca a raid pes e qu REP A QU RES EE RERURASS ON ERE 3 Speaker ce pA tele E ie edel solae T A D eel denies MEA LA 3 Microphone sesde ds dat dot Mas babe dap h 4 External Headset Jack ee nie e cues Wad Cs OR EN BR KI Peel 4 Battery ini A BIS PME Se RS ob ep ee Edu 5 Beeper Bhi c RU ARI PR EMT UP T 7 Enable the Desperate s HE ES oi Alcs datas cr ot ab ao tod 7 Disable the Scanner Mita ae toad EO e ind 8 Selecta Beeper Volumes P eos tla een E II h 9 Disable the Beepen ue Sa a era ee a io cad O gd 11 Ki ee ee I I ee T I tate Core I I Ic TT 12 Backlight for Keypad se sacs es es ae Ses oes Ae RU a EP eee AE qiia 12 Key SEQ ences n Rob A MR EE band rt ed ees 13 Gold or Gold White Plane Keys 00 cece eee cece eens
337. ol list is named FTPDCE TXT and is placed in the same directory on the 700 Color Computer as the FTPDCE EXE server The FTP Server encrypts this file to keep the information safe from unauthorized users This file is encrypted when the FTP Server is started so a file that is placed onto the 700 Color Computer after the FTP Server starts will require a restart of the FTP Server to take effect 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 247 Chapter 7 Programming The format of the FTPDCE TXT is as follows FTPDCE userl passwdl cr lf user2 passwd2 cr lf user3 Ipasswd3 lt cr gt lt lf gt a Note The user accounts and passwords are case sensitive Once the access control list is encrypted on the 700 Color Computer the FTP Server hides this file from users Once an access control list is installed on the 700 Color Computer a new one is not accepted by the FTP Server until the previous one is removed Encrypted access control lists are not portable between 700 Color Computers Stopping the FTP Server from Your Application Autostart FTP 248 aL To allow application programmers the ability to programmatically shut down the FTP Server the FTP Server periodically tests to see if a named event is signaled The name for this event is ITC IFTP STOP no quotes For examples on how to use events consult the Microsoft Developer Net work Library at www msdn com The MSDN Library is an essential re source for de
338. old Phone App en p old 3193693811 wol Mic wol Mic E m Audio Mode 8 Handset E O Speakerphone o ext settinas a Handset Audio Mode 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 1 mE Audio Mode C Handset TE Speakerphone o ext settings mj Speakerphone Audio Mode 159 Chapter 4 Network Support Notification Tap Settings to set your 760 Computer to either ring or vibrate or do both then tap OK or ok to return to the Audio Mode screen If you need to adjust the audio settings tap Advanced Audio to continue EY Phone App Pam 8 38 old Notification Ring vibrate Ss ENS Advanced Audio Tap ok to close the warning and continue Phoneutility Warning Adjusting these levels can cause audio to feedback Use caution when adjusting levels 160 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Drag the appropriate slider bars left or right to adjust the output and in put levels Tap Defaults to return the handset or speakerphone levels to their factory defaults Click OK or ok to return to the Notification screen Phone App an DES old Dutput Levels speaker To Radio 1 Audio Mode Handset mj Handset Output Input Levels Phone App af E 9 02 ok Dutput Levels Speaker 26 To Radio 27 PCM 31 Input Levels From Radio 23 From Mic 13 Audio Mode Speakerphon
339. older instead of the Storage Card folder if a Secure Digital storage card is present in the system If the application uses the RegFlushKey API it must first verify that the proper media is available in the system and call the special API men tioned in Step 7 on the previous page If the application is using the 700 Color switchable dock use the IOCTL DOCK SWITCH value from the IOCTL HAL ITC WRITE SYSPARM function to set the proper port on the dock before communications See more information about this KernellOControl function in Chapter 7 Programming e Some WAN radio options have changed Review the WAN radio infor mation in Chapter 4 Network Support to determine if any changes are required in your application Arrow and tab keys are reversed from the 700 Monochrome Computer Keyboard remapping is available on the 700 Color Computer should you need to map these keys like that of the 700 Monochrome Comput er see page 127 Special Resource Kits are not needed to compile applications for the Xscale processor Targeting the SA1110 processor creates applications that run on the 700 Color Computer Installing Cabinet Files 130 CAB files short form of cabinet files are compressed folders as defined by Microsoft A cabinet file is a single file usually suffixed with CAB that stores compressed files in a file library A compressed file can be spread over several cabinet files During installation
340. olor pertains to 740 741 750 751 760 and 761 Com puters unless otherwise noted 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 223 Chapter 7 Programming Creating CAB Files The Windows CE operating system uses a CAB file to install an applica tion on a Windows CE based device A CAB file is composed of multiple files that are compressed into one file Compressing multiple files into one file provides the following benefits All application files are present A partial installation is prevented The application can be installed from several sources such as a desktop computer or a Web site Use the CAB Wizard application CABWIZ EXE to generate a CAB file for your application Creating Device Specific CAB Files 224 Required Do the following to create a device specific CAB file for an application in the order provided 1 Create an INF file with Windows CE specific modifications page 224 2 Optional Create a SETUP DLL file to provide custom control of the installation process page 236 3 Use the CAB Wizard to create the CAB file using the INF file the optional SETUP DLL file and the device specific application files as parameters page 239 Creating an INF File An INF file specifies information about an application for the CAB Wi zard Below are the sections of an INF file Version This specifies the creator of the file version and other relevant informa tion
341. olor Screen 730 Screen 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Battery Status You can view the battery status for your 700 Color Computer by accessing the Unit Information control panel applet To access the settings from the 700 Color Computer tap Start gt Settings gt the System tab gt Unit Information gt the Battery Status tab to view the Unit current status Tap ok to exit this information Information Unit Information Defaults Refresh Apply Versions Battery Status cas ries Files mlj 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 363 Appendix A CAB Files 364 Configurable Settings o Unit Information You can view the latest developer or released version of each CAB file from Intermec Technologies Corporation that are installed in your 700 Color Computer via the Unit Information control panel applet Custom CAB files are not displayed in this applet See the Software Tools Users Manual for more information about these files To access the information from the 700 Color Computer tap Start gt Settings the System tab Unit Information the CAB Files tab to view the current CAB file versions Tap ok to exit this information AY settings eeu Q Unit Information BtMainStack 1 4 3 127 E Defaults Refresh Apply Versions Battery status Status CAB Files mj
342. om the drop down list SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 1 1 35 1 Options Decoding 0 Not active 1 Active default AY settinos euius Data Collection ES Interleaved 2 of 5 lt 001006000000000 Be i Decoding lt Active gt amp Data Matrix lt 1 gt amp Maxicode 12 Symbologies Symbology Options Beepel 4 gt New Tools Accounts 1 mlj 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 321 Appendix A 322 Configurable Settings Data Matrix A two dimensional matrix symbology which is made of square modules arranged within a perimeter finder pattern The symbology utilizes Error Checking and Correcting ECC algorithm with selectable levels for data error recovery and Cyclic Redundancy Check algorithm to validate the data The character set includes either 128 characters conforming to ISO 646 ANSI X3 4 1986 or 256 extended character set Maximum capac ity of a symbol is 2335 alphanumeric characters 1556 8 bit byte charac ters or 3116 numeric digits Note that this is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Color Computer or if you are using a 730 Com puter Action Tap to expand the Data Matrix parameter select the setting to be changed then tap an option to change this setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 1 1 34 1 Options Decoding 0 Not active 1 Active default EY settings eui Data Collection SQR Code 17 Decoding Active gt B Data Ma
343. ompactFlash Card 32K Minimum i 2 Secure Digital Card 32K amp i D Demos DK selected All H 0 Programs 0K selected None Total Size Selected 32K 4 Click Install to install the AUTORUN files onto the storage card 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 3 Installing Applications 5 Create a CabFiles folder on the storage card Copy any CAB files that are to be extracted on every startup into this folder 6 In the 2577 directory add your custom AUTOUSER DAT file See the Recovery Help for more information on how to set up an AUTOUSER DAT file 7 If you are using the RegFlushKey API the application must use a spe cial API to make sure the registry is written to the appropriate card or you can use the Utilities control panel applet as follows See Appendix A Configurable Settings for more information about this applet a From the 700 Series Computer tap Start gt Settings gt the System tab the Utilities icon the Registry Save tab UNIES db Tap Enable Registry Storage to save the registry in the Flash File Sys tem PSM via the Flash_File_Store Registry path Tap ok to save your entry and exit the Utilities control panel applet E settings EM d 8 35 lok 3 Settings Y d 8 48 fol Utilities Utilities Registry settings can be saved between cold boots The registry is saved during device resets or when appli
344. on Example 0 SCE2 Windows 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 7 Programming CopyFiles This section under the DefaultInstall section describes the default files to copy to the target device Within the DefaultInstall section files were listed that must be defined elsewhere in the INF file This section identi fies that mapping and may contain flags Required Yes copyfile_list_section destination_filename source_filename The source_filename parameter is optional if it is the same as destina tion_filename copyfile_list_section flags The numeric value that specifies an action to be done while copying fi les The following table shows values supported by Windows CE Flag Value Description COPYFLG_WARN_IF_SKIP 0x00000001 Warn user if skipping a file is attempted after error COPYFLG_NOSKIP 0x00000002 Do not allow a user to skip copying a file COPYFLG_NO_OVERWRITE 0x00000010 Do not overwrite files in destination directory COPYFLG_REPLACEONLY 0x00000400 Copy the source file to the destination directory only if the file is already in the destination directory CE COPYFLG NO DATE DIALOG 0x20000000 Do not copy files if the target file is newer CE_COPYFLG_NODATECHECK 0x40000000 Ignore date while overwriting the target file CE_COPYFLG_SHARED 0x80000000 Create a reference when a shared DLL is counted Example DefaultInstall SH3 CopyFiles Files Common Files SH3 D
345. on displays lines on the screen to help you write New Edit Tools Ej Tap to use your stylus like a pen Le Note Some programs that accept writing may not have the Pen icon See the documentation for that program to find out how to switch to writing mode Selecting the Writing If you want to edit or format writing you must select it first 1 Tap and hold the stylus next to the text you want to select until the in sertion point appears 2 Without lifting drag the stylus across the text you want to select If you accidentally write on the screen tap Tools gt Undo and try again You can also select text by tapping the Pen icon to deselect it and then dragging the stylus across the screen You can cut copy and paste written text in the same way you work with typed text tap and hold the selected words and then tap an editing com mand on the pop up menu or tap the command on the Edit menu 38 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Converting Writing to Text You can convert words you write in print or cursive to text by tapping Tools gt Recognize If a word is not recognized it keeps its original form If you want to convert only certain words tap Pen to disable the writing function tap twice over the word or phrase to highlight then tap Tools gt Recognize 4 1203 ol Recognize Alternates Send via E mail Beam Note
346. on to get the current Network Mode SSID for the 802 11b or 802 11b g radio Syntax UINT GetNetworkMode ULONG amp Parameters NDIS NET MODE IBSS 802 11 Ad Hoc Mode NDIS NET MODE ESS 802 11 Infrastructure Mode NDIS NET MODE UNKNOWN Anything Else Unknown Error NDIS NET AUTO UNKNOWN Automatic Selection Use of this option is not supported or recommended NDIS NET TYPE OFDM 5G 5 Gigahertz 54 Mbps NDIS NET TYPE OFDM 2 4G 802 11 2 4 Gigahertz Return Values ERROR SUCCESS when successful ERR QUERY FAILED when the query failed or ERR CONNECT FAILED ifa connection with the radio failed Remarks If ERROR SUCCESS is returned your ULONG reference is populated with one of the parame ters listed above Definitions ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN GetNetworkMode ULONG amp else UINT GetNetworkMode ULONG amp fendif 272 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions Chapter 7 Programming GetNetworkType Call this function to get the current network type of the radio Do not confuse this with GetNetworkMode UINT GetNetworkType ULONG NDIS_NET_TYPE_FH Indicates this is a frequency hopping radio NDIS_NET_TYPE_DS Indicates that this is a direct sequence radio NDIS NET TYPE UNDEFINED Indicates this radio type is unknown or undefined ERR
347. onitor GSM GPRS 142 WAN radio module CDMA 1xRTT 140 general 142 Creating D a modem connection to an ISP 100 to work 105 a VPN server connection to work 113 a wireless network connection 108 CAB files 224 with CAB Wizard 239 contacts via Contacts 65 document via Pocket Word 82 drawing via Notes 41 INF files 224 note via Notes 75 task via Tasks 74 workbook via Pocket Excel 86 Data Phone application CDMA radios 152 Data collection configuration parameters 1D OmniDir decode enable 342 aimer LED duration 338 beeper 333 beeper frequency 335 beeper volume 334 codabar 306 codabar user ID 325 code 11 320 code 11 user ID 329 code 128 309 code 128 FNCI character 311 code 128 user ID 325 code 39 304 code 39 user ID 325 code 93 308 code 93 length 308 code 93 user ID 326 datamatrix 322 EAN 13 user ID 328 EAN 8 user ID 328 good read beep duration 337 good read beeps 336 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual image dimension 340 interleaved 2 of 5 317 interleaved 2 of 5 user ID 326 lighting mode 341 macro PDF 314 matrix 2 of 5 318 matrix 2 of 5 user ID 328 maxicode 323 micro PDF417 316 MSI 313 MSI user ID 326 PDF417 314 PDF417 user ID 326 plessey 312 plessey user ID 327 prefix 330 QR code 321 standard 2 of 5 305 standard 2 of 5 user ID 327 sticky aimer duration 339 suffix 331 telepen 319 telepen user ID 328 UPC E user ID 327 UPC A u
348. onnect event Syntax UINT RadioDisassociate Parameters None Return Values ERROR SUCCESS when successful otherwise ERR CONNECT FAILED Remarks None Definitions ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN RadioDisassociate else UINT RadioDisassociate fendif Query Information Functions GetAssociationStatus Call this function to obtain the radio s current association status with a service set Syntax UINT GetAssociationStatus ULONG amp Parameters NDIS RADIO ASSOCIATED Indicates the radio is associated with an access point NDIS RADIO SCANNING Indicates the radio is looking for an access point with which to associate Return Values ERROR SUCCESS when successful ERR QUERY FAILED when the query failed or ERR CONNECT FAILED ifa connection with the radio failed Remarks Data is only valid if the function returns ERROR SUCCESS Also if ERROR SUCCESS is re turned your ULONG reference is populated by one of the parameters listed above Definitions ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN GetAssociationStatus ULONG amp else UINT GetAssociationStatus ULONG amp fendif 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 269 Chapter 7 Programming Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions 270 GetAuthenticationMode Call this function to obtain the radio s current authentication
349. ons NPCP Norand Portable Communications Protocol is a proprietary protocol that provides session network and datalink services for Intermec mobile computers in the Intermec LAN environment used with printers and data communications NPCP Driver Installation and Removal Use LPT9 for the NPCP printer device and COM1 for the last parame ter COM1 is the connection available via the 700 Color Computer Applications use the RegisterDevice function to install the driver DeregisterDevice uninstalls the device driver and frees memory space when the driver is not required Use the HANDLE returned by RegisterDevice as the parameter to DeregisterDevice Use the RegisterDevice function call as demonstrated below Specify the full path name to the driver starting at the root for the RegisterDevice function to work properly The last parameter to RegisterDevice is a DWORD that represents the name of the port for the NPCP stream driver to use Build this parameter on the stack if it is not to be paged out during the call The first parameter LPT Device Name and the second parameter 9 index indicate the name of the registered device such as LPT9 This is used in the CreateFile function call Install HANDLE hDevice TCHAR port 6 port 0 TCHAR C port 1 TCHAR 0 port 2 TCHAR M port 3 TCHAR 1 port 4 TCHAR port 5 TCHAR 0 hDevice RegisterDevi
350. ood recognition 40 NPCP printing 199 about 199 closing driver 200 COMI parameters 199 communications 202 driver I O controls 201 installation 199 LPT9 199 opening driver 200 reading from driver 200 removal 199 sample code 202 unit information control panel NPCPTEST CAB file 364 writing to driver 200 Numeric keypad alpha blue key sequences 15 gold key sequences 13 registry settings alpha plane 293 gold plane 293 unshifted plane 293 scan codes 295 O Neil printing See also D TR printer installing driver 204 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Pocket Excel 87 Windows Mobile settings 45 Patent information xxiii PB20 printers printer support 197 PDF417 about the laser scanner 207 configuration parameter 314 user ID 326 PEAP 802 11 radio module network EAP 380 WPA encryption 379 profile security information 378 WEP encryption 378 Performing a cold boot 19 Performing a warm boot 19 Persistent Storage Manager See PSM Phone application CDMA radios 144 activation wizard 144 146 150 adding contact to speed dial 72 149 call history 149 customizing phone settings 151 enable Call Guard alert while roaming 153 hiding your location except from 911 151 letting your location be visible for everyone 151 reset connection settings for PCS Vision 152 sending SMS messages 150 toggle between automatic or Sprint roaming 153 update your PCS Visio
351. oot on your 760 Computer to load the CAB file lt i 6 From the Today screen tap the LAN Network icon in the System Tray circled in the following illustration Start e d 9 05 Friday February 11 2005 Tap here to set owner information 9 154M 10 154M No unread messages 3 Active tasks 1 High priority 7 In the NDISTRAY pop up menu the Network Driver Interface Speci fication tray application select No Networking and Auto FTP Off Tap anywhere on the screen to close the menu Built in Ethernet Wireless 802 11 No networking AutoFTP On AutoFTP Off v 8 Tap Start gt Programs gt the Watcher icon to launch the SB555 Watch er program Watcher 174 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 4 Network Support 9 Tap Yes I accept to accept the license agreement then tap OK to con tinue This license agreement does not appear again after this installation Ey License Agreemen e f 12 06 fok Please read the license agreement carefully SIERRA WIRELESS SOFTWARE END ATTENTION CAREFULLY READ THIS AGREEMENT YOU INDICATE THAT YOU HAVE RI AUTHORITY TO ENTER INTO THIS TERMS AND CONDITIONS AND THA BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDI IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE a Yes I Accept O No I Decline Tap OK for the 760 Computer to perform a warm boot and complete the installation WatcherLauncher To complete the installation the device will now perform a warmboot 7
352. open To play a recording tap it in the list or tap its icon in the note Indicates an em bedded recording Adam Tap to show or hide the Recording toolbar Tap to begin recording 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Using My Text When using Inbox or MSN Messenger use My Text to quickly insert pre set or frequently used messages into the text entry area To insert a mes sage tap My Text and tap a message To quickly add common messages tap My Text and tap a desired mes sage To edit a My Text message tap Tools gt Edit My Text Messages Tap the message you want to edit and enter new text at the bottom of the screen 431235 Q 3 To Adam Send Subj Finance Meeting Hi can y ou meet at 2 00 Yes No Thanks Please call my mobile Please call my assistant I ll be right there I m running late I ll get back to you Ilove my Pocket PC Edit My Text El Ej Tap to select a prewritten message 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 43 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Finding and Organizing Information 44 Z P File Explorer Es The Find feature on your 700 Color Computer helps you quickly locate information Tap Start gt Find Enter the text you want to find select a data type and then tap Go to initiate the search Note To quickly find information that is taking up sto
353. ork or Ethernet You can use a modem connection to set up connections with an external modem or through your mobile phone network using a cellular line or GPRS Your 700 Series Computer has two groups of connection settings My ISP and My Work Network Use My ISP settings to connect to the Internet Use My Work Network settings to connect to any private network such as a corporate network used at work My ISP Once connected you can send and receive e mail messages by using Inbox and view Web or WAP pages by using Pocket Internet Ex plorer The communication software for creating an ISP connection is already installed on your 700 Series Computer Your service provider provides the software needed to install other services such as paging and fax services If this is the method you want to use see Connecting to an Internet Service Provider on page 100 My Work Network Connect to the network at your company or orga nization where you work Once connected you can send and receive e mail messages by using Inbox view Web or WAP pages by using Pocket Internet Explorer and synchronize with your desktop If this is the method you want to use see Connecting to Work on page 104 Connecting to an Internet Service Provider 100 You can connect to your ISP and use the connection to send and receive e mail messages and view Web or WAP pages You can connect to your ISP via a modem connection Obtain the following informat
354. os Q ij settings il M 1225 Q By clicking the Reset Connection button your device will reset the connection settings for PCS Vision By clicking the Reset Connection button your device will reset the connection settings for National amp ccess Reset Connection Reset Connection By clicking the Provision button your device will attempt to auto update your vision profile Phone Data Phone Info Ej Sprint Networks Verizon Networks 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Tap the System tab to select the applicable function Phone Roaming Automatic Sprint O Enable Call Guard alert when roaming Phone Data System Phone Info Ej Sprint Networks Chapter 4 Network Support System Select O Automatic C Automatic A EE EET ol C3 Hame Only 8 Automatic B Voice Privacy amp Enhanced O Standard rae con psa von Ej Verizon Networks Tap the Phone Info tab to view the phone settings Settings e Phone ESN Ox6013760C T e My Phone Number 000 000 9420 MSID 000 000 9420 Modern FW ver B 0 46 0 RIL SW ver 1 39 0 0 PRL Version 10023 PCS Vision Username UserName Mot Available Sprint Networks 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Ej m ig Settings ESN My Phone Number MSIN Modern Fw ver RIL SY ver PRL Version ERI Version ej d
355. our computer Intermec Technologies does not recommend using the SB555 Watcher program to make data and voice calls on a daily basis for these reasons The SB555 Watcher application is a third party application unaware of certain power management methods used in your 760 Computer Therefore the application consumes more power than necessary The application size consumes memory better used for your application data The process of setting up the account with your carrier and enabling the CDMA WAN radio in your 760 Computer is called activation To proper ly function program the CDMA device with the necessary information and set up the network carrier account If either piece has errors the de vice does not function on the CDMA network The CDMA radio is pre programmed for a specific carrier such as Sprint Telus Bell Mobility Verizon etc Therefore information about your radio should already be in your carrier s database You need to notify the carrier and set up mobile accounts for each unit you are activating The Electronic Serial Number ESN hex 63xxxxxx that you need to supply to your carrier is located in two places On the outside of the 760 Computer shipping box On the inside of the 760 Computer battery compartment The label would include the term ESN and a bar code along with the serial number The ESN comes in both decimal and hexadecimal formats Most carriers accept either format but with a prefer
356. our desktop from the Windows Mobile Companion CD For more information on installing ActiveSync see your Quick Start card ActiveSync is already installed on your 700 Color Computer After installation is complete the ActiveSync Setup Wizard helps you con nect your 700 Color Computer to your desktop set up a partnership so you can synchronize information between your 700 Color Computer and your desktop and customize your synchronization settings Your first syn chronization process automatically begins when finished using the wizard After your first synchronization look at Calendar Contacts and Tasks on your 700 Color Computer Notice that information you have stored in Microsoft Outlook on your desktop was copied to your 700 Color Com puter and you did not have to type a word Disconnect the 700 Color Computer from your computer and you are ready to go 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Once you have set up ActiveSync and completed the first synchronization process you can initiate synchronization from your 700 Color Computer To switch to ActiveSync on your 700 Color Computer tap Start gt ActiveSync Note that if you have a wireless LAN card you can synchronize remotely from your 700 Color Computer For information about using ActiveSync on your desktop start ActiveSync on your desktop and then see ActiveSync Help fg ActiveSync t m 1 01 x View connection s
357. ource filename 231 CreateEvent 294 CreateFile DTR printing 204 205 IrDA printing 198 NPCP printing 199 200 D DefaultInstall AddReg 228 CESelfRegister 228 CESetupDLL 228 CEShortcuts 228 Copyfiles 228 Deprecated functions 288 DeregisterDevice 199 DTR printing 204 DestinationDirs file_list_section 230 DeviceIOControl 266 DTR printing 204 NPCP printing 199 DeviceloControl NPCP printing 200 201 DeviceName FTP Server 243 DeviceURL FTP Server 243 disk_ordinal SourceDiskNames 228 DllRegisterServer 228 DllUnregisterServer 228 E EnableSuppLogging 287 EnableWep 278 EnableZeroConfig 284 EncryptionStatus 279 Encrypt WepKeyForRegistry Deprecated 288 ERROR_INSUFFICIENT_BUFFER IOCTL HAL ITC READ PARM 251 IOCTL HAL ITC WRITE SYSPARM 255 ERROR INVALID PARAMETER IOCTL HAL ITC READ PARM 251 IOCTL HAL ITC WRITE SYSPARM 255 F File Transfer Protocol See FTP file list section CopyFiles destination filename 231 flags 231 source filename 231 DestinationDirs 230 filename SourceDiskFiles 229 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual FTP client 245 configurable parameters 243 BlockSize 243 DeviceName 243 DeviceURL 243 PauseAtStartup 244 FTPDCMDS subdirectory 247 RTC 959 247 server 245 server requests CDUP 245 CWD 245 DELE 245 HELP 245 LIST 245 MKD 245 MODE 245 NLST 245 NOOP 245 PASS 245 PWD
358. ously pressed with the Gold key on the numeric keypad or the Gold White key on the alphanumeric keypad such as the following Press the Keys Numeric Keypad Alphanumeric Keypad To Enter This Gold Gold White amp Ez Send Gold Gold White amp A3 Gold Gold White E PgDn 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 7 Programming Alpha Blue Plane The alpha plane contains values from the keypad when the keypad has been placed in alpha mode by pressing the blue alpha key such as the fol lowing Press the Keys Numeric Keypad Alphanumeric Keypad To Enter This Alpha Alpha amp Caps Alpha Alpha j Alpha Alpha v7 w Key Values Key values for each plane are stored in the registry All units ship with a default key mapping already loaded in the registry Applications that wish to change the default mapping need to read the appropriate key from the registry into an array of Words modify the values required and then write the updated values back into the registry The registry access can be done with standard Microsoft API calls such as RegOpenKeyEx RegQueryValueEx and RegSetValueEx Numeric Keypad For the 700 Color Numeric Keypad the following registry keys contain the plane mappings The unshifted plane mapping can be found in the registry at HKEY LOCAL MACHINENHARDWARENDEVICEMAPNKEYBDNVkey The gold plane mapping can be found in
359. p gt Calendar to see Calendar Help and tap Start gt Help gt Inbox to see Inbox Help 1 Tap New then enter the meeting information 2 Hide the onscreen keyboard if needed then tap Attendees Only those contacts with e mail addresses are displayed Select the contacts you want to invite then tap ok to return to the appointment 3 Select other desired options and then tap ok 4 Inbox automatically creates a meeting request and sends it to the atten dees the next time you synchronize with your desktop Textual notes entered in the Notes tab excluding writing or recordings are sent also C Gruber Jim gnc integr Gruber Jim jgruber2 n Gruber Mike mpgs5540a C Gruber Mike mpg5540 L Hosford Chuck chuck hosf Jasa Jaz JazHot5hot L klees Dottie dale klees C Kurth Judy heyjude082 Linda Bahr bahr linda O MAAS ROBERTA dudnbert2 L Marer Jenny jlmayer 580 L Mayer Jenny JLMayer58 Retchless Nathan nathan retc O Yelarde Susan Susan Velar A check mark indicates a selected attendee Z Note If you are sending the meeting request through a connection to an ISP or the network rather than through synchronization with your desk top tap Tools gt Options From the Send meeting requests via drop down list tap the service to use to send the meeting request 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 61 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003
360. p Additional Settings to assign an inner TTLS authentication and an inner EAP and set options for server certificate validation and trust See page 387 for more information Profile Wizard PE ESTEE Base Security advanced 8021x Security ris Association Encryption Open WEP T Password O Prompt for password Use d i assword Get Certificates Additional Settings Ej 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 385 Appendix A 386 Configurable Settings To Enable TTLS with WPA Encryption 1 2 Set 8021x Security as TTLS Set Association to WPA See page 372 for information about WPA encryption Skip Encryption as it is automatically set to TKIP See page 372 for more information about TKIP Enter your unique user name and password to use this protocol Select Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each time to access the protocol or leave Use following password as selected to auto matically use the protocol without entering a password Tap Get Certificates to obtain or import server certificates See page 388 for more information Tap Additional Settings to assign an inner TTLS authentication and an inner EAP and set options for server certificate validation and trust See page 387 for more information Ei Profile Wizard PE TESTE Basic Security Advanced 5021x Security ims
361. pe Channel Ad Hoc 3 551D Network Mame INTERMEC Enable Power Management E 374 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Security The following are available from the 8021x Security drop down list Note that the last four methods are available if you have purchased the security pack age Contact your Intermec representative for information None below PEAP page 378 TLS page 382 TTLS page 385 LEAP page 389 None Use None to disable 802 11b or 802 11b g Security and enable either WEP or WPA PSK encryption To Disable 802 1x Security 1 Set 8021x Security as None 2 Set Association to Open 3 Set Encryption to None EF Profile Wizard 43 d 1 24 folky Basic Security advanced B021x a Association Encryption 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 375 Appendix A Configurable Settings To Enable WEP Encryption 1 Set 8021x Security as None 2 Set Association to either Open if WEP keys are not required or Shared when WEP keys are required for association 3 Set Encryption to WEP See page 372 for information about WEP encryption 4 If you had set Association to Shared then select a data transmission key from the Data TX Key drop down list near the bottom of this screen then enter the encryption key for that data transmis
362. pendix A Configurable Settings Wakeup Mask ep From the 700 Color Computer tap Start gt Settings gt the System tab gt Utilities gt the Wakeup Mask tab to access the Wakeup Mask control pan Utilities el applet This applet programs three scanner buttons and the A1 and A2 application keys to be wakeup or resume keys That is to prompt the 700 Color Computer to wake up or resume activity after going to sleep as a result of being inactive after a length of time This information will remain be tween warm and cold boots Check the appropriate box then tap ok to apply your settings 9 Settings 7 FEE FER ok utilities You can enable wakeup From certain keys Check the keys you want programmed as wakeup keys _ Middle Scanner Button Left Scanner Button L Right Scanner Button L GOLD A1 Application 1 _ GOLD A2 Application 2 Registry Save Wakeup Mask App Laund 4 gt E Based on your setting do the following to wake up the 700 Color Com puter Then do this on Then do this on If you select Numeric Keyboard Alphanumeric Keyboard Middle Scanner Button Squeeze the button on the Scan Handle Squeeze the button on the Scan Handle Left Scanner Button Squeeze the left scanner button Squeeze the left scanner button Right Scanner Button Squeeze the right scanner button Squeeze the right scanner button GOLD A1 Application 1 Press Gold Press Gold White 29 GO
363. performed by the FWL1 device in the system by performing DeviceIO Control calls to the driver Loading and unloading of the driver for the built in Ethernet adapter is performed by the SYI1 device in the system by performing DevicelOControl calls to the driver For loading an NDIS driver associated with an adapter the IOCTL is IOCTL LOAD NDIS MINIPORT For unloading NDIS drivers associated with an adapter the IOCTL is IOCTL UNLOAD NDIS MINIPORT Example finclude winioctl h finclude sysio h void DoLoad int nDevice LPTSTR devs _T SYI1 _T FWL1 HANDLE hLoaderDev DWORD bytesReturned hLoaderDev CreateFile devs nDevice GENERIC_READ GENERIC_WRITE 0 NULL OPEN_EXISTING 0 NULL if hLoaderDev INVALID HANDLE VALUE if DeviceloControl hLoaderDev IOCTL LOAD NDIS MINIPORT NULL 1 NULL 0 amp bytesReturned NULL MessageBox NULL TEXT SYSIO IoControl Failed TEXT Network loader MB ICONHAND if hLoaderDev INVALID HANDLE VALUE CloseHandle hLoaderDev hLoaderDev INVALID HANDLE VALUE bad handle jelse CloseHandle hLoaderDev void DoUnload int nDevice LPTSTR devs T SYI1 _T FWL1 HANDLE hLoaderDev DWORD bytesReturned hLoaderDev CreateFile devs nDevice GENERIC READ GENERIC WRITE 0 NULL OPEN EXISTING 0 NULL if hLoaderDev INVALID HANDLE VALUE if DeviceloControl hLoaderDev IOCTL UNLOAD NDIS MINIPORT NULL
364. phenated words foreign words that use special characters such as ac cents and some punctuation cannot be converted If you add writing to a word to change it such as changing a 3 to an 8 after you attempt to recognize the word the writing you add is not included if you attempt to recognize the writing again 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Drawing on the Screen You can draw on the screen in the same way that you write on the screen The difference between writing and drawing on the screen is how you se lect items and how they are edited For example you can resize selected drawings while you cannot resize writing Creating a Drawing Cross three ruled lines on your first stroke A drawing box appears Sub sequent strokes in or touching the drawing box become part of the dra wing Drawings that do not cross three ruled lines are treated as writing e i220 The drawing box indicates the boundaries of the drawing New Edit Tools E Pen icon Z Note You may want to change the zoom level so that you can more easily work on or view your drawing Tap Tools and then a zoom level Selecting a Drawing If you want to edit or format a drawing you must select it first Tap and hold the stylus on the drawing until the selection handle ap pears To select multiple drawings deselect the Pen icon and then drag to select the drawings you wa
365. plicant is running Syntax UINT isSupplicantRunning Parameters None Return Values TRUE if the security supplicant is running FALSE if it is not running Remarks None Definitions ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN isSupplicantRunning else UINT isSupplicantRunning endif StartScanList If a scan list is configured on the system this causes the API to begin the process of scanning for an available network This call can take quite a while to process depending upon the length of the scan list and how long it takes to find a valid network you may wish to call it from a separate thread Syntax UINT StartScanList Parameters None Return Values ERROR SUCCESS when successful Remarks Call this function to start the scan list functionality of the system Definitions ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN StartScanList else UINT StartScanList fendif StartSupplicant Call this function to start the supplicant service if it is installed on the sys tem Syntax UINT StartSupplicant Parameters None Return Values ERROR SUCCESS when successful Remarks None Definitions ifdef DYNAMIC LOADING typedef UINT PFN_StartSupplicant else UINT StartSupplicant endif 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 285 Chapter 7 Programming StopSupplicant Call this function to stop the supplicant service Syntax UINT StopSupplicant
366. pment can cause death If you must perform authorized emergency work on energized equipment be sure that you comply strictly with approved safety regulations 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual xix Before You Begin Safety Icons A Wanning This section explains how to identify and understand dangers warnings cautions and notes that are in this manual You may also see icons that tell you when to follow ESD procedures and when to take special precautions for handling optical parts A warning alerts you of an operating procedure practice condition or statement that must be strictly observed to avoid death or serious injury to the persons working on the equipment Avertissement Un avertissement vous avertit d une proc dure de fonctionnement d une m thode d un tat ou d un rapport qui doit tre strictement respect pour viter Poccurrence de mort ou de blessures graves aux personnes manupulant l quipement A caution alerts you to an operating procedure practice condition or statement that must be strictly observed to prevent equipment damage or destruction or corruption or loss of data Attention Une pr caution vous avertit d une proc dure de fonctionnement d une m thode d un tat ou d un rapport qui doit tre strictement respect pour emp cher l endommagement ou la destruction de l quipement ou Palt ration ou la perte de donn es Note Notes either provide extra information abo
367. ptionStatus 279 GetWepStatus 276 NDIS_ENCRYPTION_DISABLED EncryptionStatus 279 GetWepStatus 276 NDIS_ENCRYPTION_NOT_SUPPORTED EncryptionStatus 279 GetWepStatus 276 YDIS_MIXED_CELL_OFF SetMixedCellMode 282 iDIS MIXED CELL ON SetMixedCellMode 282 ipIS NET AUTO UNKNOWN GetNetworkMode 272 SetNetworkMode 281 NDIS_NET_MODE_ESS GetNetworkMode 272 SetNetworkMode 281 NDIS NET MODE IBSS GetNetworkMode 272 SetNetworkMode 281 NDIS NET MODE UNKNOWN GetNetworkMode 272 SetNetworkMode 281 NDIS_NET_TYPE_DS GetNetworkType 273 NDIS_NET_TYPE_FH GetNetworkType 273 NDIS_NET_TYPE_OFDM_2_4G GetNetworkMode 272 SetNetworkMode 281 NDIS NET TYPE OFDM 5G GetNetworkMode 272 SetNetworkMode 281 NDIS_NET_TYPE_UNDEFINED GetNetworkType 273 NDIS_NETWORK_EAP_MODE_OFF GetCCxXStatus 277 SetCCXStatus 282 NDIS_NETWORK_EAP_MODE_ON GetCCxXStatus 277 SetCCXStatus 282 NDIS POWER LEVEL 1 GetTXPower 275 NDIS POWER LEVEL 15 GetTXPower 275 NDIS POWER LEVEL 530 GetTXPower 275 N N ZZZ YDIS_POWER_LEVEL_5 GetTXPower 275 NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_63 GetTXPower 275 407 Index NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_UNKNOWN GetTXPower 275 NDIS_RADIO_ASSOCIATED GetAssocationStatus 269 NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_AUTO GetAuthenticationMode 270 SetAuthenticationMode 280 NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_ERROR GetAuthenticationMode
368. r General Jil ever RE PEERS Te 14 eben te Oita det 140 WAN Monitor Details 0 a uo aed each esi Al 141 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual ix Contents GSM GPRS CORE Module 760 Computers with WAN Radios 142 WAN Monitor General et boxe gmdate tege ht root pei ar oe t anc ird Dad 142 WAN Monitor Details 452224 Stu A ev Ra hrsg Foo E Suh dm Ra ER dd 143 Microsoft Phone Application 761 Computers with CDMA Radios esses 144 Data Provisioning Sprint bes op cts uin RS olt afe imo eU dete Rao ct E wha 144 Data Provisioning Verizon secessus ee ARE NOR EA ie 146 PRONE Application a A tut oue Need ES MA aie 148 Speed Dial os dao aie DS oe ER De dudar Sa Ouen poni May dank 149 Call Fistor ues seo Viso Rat PRESA SON erates Spe a aede ie ia it obe Samar 149 TOOLS een afin sce tr sns fatetur oe O 150 Phone Settings Peces acia pi ee mie ist aye dln la Burkes GR PN a 151 Microsoft Phone Application 761 Computers with GSM Radios 0 000 154 ACUVATION idet gt te teh eee 154 Phone Application app icles exa uec E aoro ec E bah wan UR deni im Mec R 154 Call Piston A tee EPA CR RR A ER 155 Speed Dial zs es guo oh e esca a ined Een Bans wavs hen RUE eu eed 155 J618 15952 144a DES qu Dh oa Bek aah A 156 Phone Settilios at vds Dea eB RN EROR SURE a O e Opa a ee en 156 PHONE Informatof senie Pai xa dati tate Ue qub Vnde Eq oco Dci ad xd de ed 158 PhoneUtility 760 Computers with
369. r Keyboard e mj 12 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Key Sequences Chapter 1 Introduction Use the following key sequences to enter characters into your 700 Color Computer using either a numeric keypad or an alphanumeric keypad Gold or Gold White Plane Keys The Gold plane key numeric keypad or the Gold White 6 plane key alphanumeric keypad provides you access to display controls special characters and Pocket PC options Press the Gold O key or the Gold White key for each gold plane key stroke you wish to make For example to turn on the front light press and hold the Gold key plus the key on the numeric keypad or press and hold the Gold White key plus the key on the alphanu meric keypad To turn the front light off press the appropriate keys again Below and on the next page are the key sequences Numeric Keypad The following table lists sequences that use the Gold plane key See Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 for information about the Pocket PC applications Press the Keys To Do This Gold Toggle the backlight on or off also goes through backlight power levels if held down Gold Gold Gol Access the Pocket PC Record application see Note Access the Pocket PC Calendar application see Note e Access the Pocket PC Contacts application see Note Access the Pocket PC Tasks application see Note eo LI Move up one page
370. r 32 Notes 75 notifications 33 Pocket Excel 86 Pocket Word 82 pop up menus 33 programs 31 status icons 30 support URLs 29 Tasks 73 Today screen 30 where to find information 29 Windows Media Player 92 writing on the screen 38 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Wireless network 135 373 creating a connection 108 specifications 25 Wireless printing Bluetooth compatible module 189 unit information control panel WP_SAMPLE CAB file 365 Wireless WAN AT command interface CDMA IxRTT SB555 184 GPRS GSM MC45 184 GPRS GSM MC46 184 CDMA 1xRTT 140 GSM GPRS 142 testing AT commands 185 Work creating a modem connection 105 a VPN server connection 113 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Index getting connected 104 WPA authentication 802 11 radio module Zero Configuration 111 with pre shared key Zero Configuration 112 WPA encryption 802 11 radio module 377 LEAP security method 390 PEAP security method 379 TLS security method 383 TTLS security method 386 WPport 191 Writing mode Pocket Word 84 Writing on the screen See also Notes Pocket Word 84 Writing to drivers DTR 205 NPCP 200 425 Index Files Index Numbers 80211API DLL 267 80211CONF EXE 267 80211SCAN EXE 267 802PM DLL 267 A AUTOUSER DAT 122 123 C CABWIZ DDF 239 CABWIZ EXE 224 239 CEIMAGER EXE 128 COREDLL DLL 289 CPL802 CPL 267 D DEVICEID H 257 E EXITME BIN 24
371. r select the setting to be changed then select an option to change this setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 1 1 6 1 Options UPCA Not Active Active default Not Active Active default Not Active Active default Not Active Active default Not required default Required UPC E EAN 8 EAN 13 Add on digits Add on 2 digits Not active default Active Not active default Active Add on 5 digits Not supported wben us ing an imager UPC A check digit Ro O Ro Ro Not transmitted Transmitted default UPC E check digit Not transmitted Transmitted default Not transmitted Transmitted default EAN 8 check digit EAN 13 check digit Not transmitted Transmitted default Not transmitted Transmitted default JPC A number system Not transmitted Transmitted default UPC A transmitted as UPC A UPC A transmitted as EAN 13 default UPC E transmitted as UPC E default UPC E transmitted as UPC A EAN 8 transmitted as EAN 8 default EAN 8 transmitted as EAN 13 JPC E number system JPC A re encoding JPC E re encoding EAN 8 re encoding 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 307 Appendix A Configurable Settings Code 93 Code 93 is a variable length continuous symbology that uses four element widths Action Tap the Code 93 parameter then select an op
372. r 1 Introduction Disable the Scanner Mute 4 Note This information does not apply to the 730 Computer To disable the mute feature on the scanner E 1 Tap Start Settings the System tab the Audio icon then select User defined audio settings Audio ewe o Audio Select audio configuration option For manual audio setup use User defined audio settings option CO set up audio for a Phone call O Play wave to Speaker C Play wave to Radio O Set up audio for Speaker Phone O Default audio settings a User defined audio settings Set Parameters Input Mixing Output se Ej 2 Tap the Input Mixing tab then clear the SCAN Mute box 3 Drag its slider bar to the appropriate level of loudness with the left side being the most loud and the right side being the most quiet Tap ok to exit this applet 94 056 Gp Radio 1 Mute a MIC ivl Mute E Boos _ 20 dB SCAN O Mute Wave 7 Mute Wave to Speaker G Wave to Radio 4 7 Set Parameters Input Mixing Output se 4 gt Ej 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Select a Beeper Volume ES l 3 ll Data Collection Settings Data Collection Beeper volume High Beeper Frequency lt 2090 gt Good read beeps lt 1 gt Good read beep duration lt 80 gt Change Beeper volume Setting Note The 730 Computer does not suppor
373. r Codes on page 203 IOCTL NPCP FLUSH This command allows the application to poll the printer for errors while the report is completing the print process at the printer If an error oc curs during the polling process the operation will return FALSE and the application can get the extended error code by using IOCTL NPCP ERROR No parameters are required 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 201 Chapter 5 Printer Support NPCP Printer Communications Sample Code 202 All NPCP printer communications should be based on the following flow 1 2 Use CreateFile to open the printer driver Use IOCTL_NPCP_BIND to bind a session with the printer IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR to check for errors on the bind to ensure suc cess and IOCTL_NPCP_CANCEL to cancel any outstanding print jobs Use IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH to poll the printer to free up printer buff er resources Use IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH to poll the printer s status If an error is reported by the IOCTL then use IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR to get the error and determine the correct recovery procedure Use WriteFile to write your data to the printer Check for errors and that all data were written Use IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR to get the ex tended error If the error is critical in nature use IOCTL_NPCP_CLOSE followed by CloseFile to end the commu nications session Start a new session beginning with step 1 to ensure proper printing For noncritical errors display the error and retry
374. r Command Reference Manual The online manual is available from the Intermec web site at www intermec com See the Data Collection Resource Kit in the IDL for information about data collection functions The IDL is available as a download from the In termec web site at www intermec com Contact your Intermec representa tive for more information e To access the settings from the 700 Color Computer tap Start Settings the System tab Intermec Settings to access its control panel applet Intermec Settings Ed Intermec Settings e f 11 11 Data Co on Communications Device Settings Smart System Information TON Configuration 350 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings SNMP Control Panel Applet x Note This applet is not available in units with PSM Build 3 00 or newer To determine your PSM build version tap Start gt Programs gt File Explorer gt the PSMinfo text file e If your unit has PSM Build 3 00 or newer then you may have the Intermec Settings control panel applet in place of the SNMP applet Information about the settings you can configure with the Intermec Settings applet is described in the ntermec Computer Command Reference Manual The online manual is available from the Intermec web site at www intermec com Intermec Settings Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP parameters include iden tification information security encryption secu
375. r Computer Action Tap to expand the Symbology ID parameter select the Code 128 user ID parameter then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 4 1 5 1 Options x where x is a single ASCII character Default is asterisk Codabar User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter you can set your own ASCII character to identify Codabar bar code data Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer Action Tap to expand the Symbology ID parameter select the Codabar user ID parameter then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 4 1 2 1 Options x where x is a single ASCII character Default is D 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 325 Appendix A Configurable Settings Action SNMP OID Options Action SNMP OID Options Action SNMP OID Options Action SNMP OID Options 326 Code 93 User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter you can set your own ASCII character to identify Code 93 bar code data Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer Tap to expand the Symbology ID parameter select the Code 93 user ID parameter then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 4 1 4 1 x where x is a single ASCII character Default is a
376. r Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Code 128 FNC1 Character The Code 128 FNC1 character EAN 128 norms can be any ASCII char acter and is used as a separator when multiple identifiers and their fields are concatenated Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer Non printable ASCII characters can be entered using the following syntax where HH is the hexadecimal value of the character xHH For example the GS character whose hexadecimal value is 1D would be entered as NX 1D In addition the following characters have their own identifiers BEL la BS b e FF W e LF n e CR V e HT X e VT Ww Action Tap to expand the Code 128 parameter then type the ASCII charac ters to be set for the Code 128 FNCI character parameter SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 1 1 21 1 Options Any ASCII character default is the GS function character ID hex AY settings tc Q Data Collection i amp Code 128 options 000006 gt E Code 128 FNC1 character lt gt amp Plessey lt 000006 gt MSI lt 000006 gt a PDF 417 lt Mot active gt Emm ee EROR xl lil Code 128 FNC1 character a Symbologies Symbology Options Beepel 4 gt mj 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 311 Appendix A Configurable Settings Plessey Plessey is a pulse width modulated symbology like most other bar codes It includes
377. r User s Manual 101 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 3 Enter the access phone number then tap Next il Settings ISP Connection 9o Enter the number exactly as it should be dialed Include any extra numbers such as an outside line or credit card 9 319 363 3580 IF you travel or change area codes often use dialing rules 4 Enter the user name password and domain if provided by an ISP or your network administrator then tap Finish ISP Connection 9o User name Po Password Po IF provided by ISP or network administrator Ej 102 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 5 Tap the Advanced tab from the Connections screen then tap Select Location to specify your current location These settings apply to all connections Tap Use dialing rules tap OK then tap Edit to continue Dialing Locations Dialing Locations Based on your location dialing rules determine Based on your location dialing rules determine how a number is dialed and the best number how a number is dialed and the best number to use if more than one exists to use if more than one exists Use dialing rules Use dialing rules Select where you are dialing From Select where you are dialing From Home OHome Work Mobile Mobile a Work E ls 730 740 750 760 Screens 741 751 761 Screens 6 Specify your current phone type If your phone type is pulse dialing check th
378. r a pop up menu then select View All Files View All Files Paste Paste Shortcut New Folder 2 The new registry file should be on the root of the Flash File Store folder with today s date y File Explorer 4 aff 11 49 i Flash File Store 5 Persistent Co E SSConfigDir B System lsa ignore_my_d 3 21 03 E PSMinfo 3 21 03 j ReadmeSupp 5 5 05 registry SR05145001 3 21 03 a S5 Log 5 20 05 Updating Other Computers in Your Network These instructions assume you have Windows XP on your desktop 1 Connect your 700 Color Computer to your desktop using Microsoft ActiveSync and a cradle Make sure the ActiveSync application on your desktop is up and running and connected to your 700 Color Computer 126 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 3 Installing Applications 2 On your desktop select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel double click pU the Folder Options icon then click the View tab Beneath Hidden Folder Options files and folders check Show hidden files and folders then click OK to close Folder Options General View File Types Offline Files Folder views fou can apply the view such as Details or Tiles that you are using for this folder to all folders Apply ta Al Reset All Folders Advanced settings O Files and Folders C Automatically search for network folders and printers V Display file size information in fold
379. r type so that you know which version of the software to install Tap Start gt Settings gt the System tab gt About gt the Version tab then make a note of the information in Processor Download the program to your desktop or insert the CD or disk that contains the program into your desktop You may see a single XIP EXE or ZIP file a SETUP EXE file or several versions of files for different 700 Color Computer types and processors Be sure to select the program designed for the Windows Mobile and your 700 Color Computer processor type Read any installation instructions Read Me files or documentation that comes with the program Many programs provide special installation instructions 4 Connect your 700 Color Computer and desktop 5 Double click the EXE file Ifthe file is an installer the installation wizard begins Follow the di rections on the screen Once the software is installed the installer au tomatically transfers the software to your 700 Color Computer e If the file is not an installer an error message stating that the program is valid but it is designed for a different type of computer is displayed Move this file to your 700 Color Computer If you cannot find any installation instructions for the program in the Read Me file or docu mentation use ActiveSync Explore to copy the program file to the Program Files folder on your 700 Color Computer For more infor mation on copying files using ActiveSy
380. rage space on your 700 Color Computer select Larger than 64 KB in Type You can also use the File Explorer to find files on your 700 Color Com puter and to organize these files into folders Tap Start gt Programs gt File Explorer FA File Explorer a m 12 38 x a My Device v 1 Application D A CabrFiles ConnMgr Flash File Store attpdemds My Documents profiles Program Files Temp Tap the folder name to open it Paste Shortcut Select All 3 22 03 3 26K New Folder Tap New Folder to create a new folder Note You can move files in File Explorer by tapping and holding the item you want to move and then tapping Cut or Copy and Paste on the pop up menu 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Customizing Your 700 Color Computer You can customize your 700 Color Computer by adjusting settings and installing additional software Adjusting Settings You can adjust settings to suit the way you work To see available options tap Start gt Settings gt either the Personal tab or the System tab located at the bottom of the screen You might want to adjust the following Eig settings amp 12 50 Y Eig settings 4 61 01 ES Be E D BF Buttons Input Menus About Audio Backlight Owner Password Phone Certificates ClearType Clock Information Tuner Q CE gt d Sounds amp Today Intermec Memory Power Notifications Settin
381. rd 239 installation functions SETUP DLL 236 placing files onto storage card 128 unit information control panel applet 364 Cabinet Wizard creating CAB files 239 troubleshooting 240 using the application 224 Cabling scanner 216 Calendar all day events 52 creating 56 appointments adding a note 58 assigning to a category 60 changing 55 creating 55 deleting 62 finding 62 making recurring 59 setting a reminder 57 viewing 53 categories 51 meetings sending a request 61 options changing 63 Pocket Outlook 50 recurrence pattern 53 Start menu icon 31 synchronizing 51 Call Guard alert enable while roaming Phone application CDMA radios 153 Call history Phone application CDMA radios 149 GSM radios 155 Capacitor internal super 6 Capturing thoughts and ideas via Notes 75 Card support CompactFlash cards 21 MultiMediaCards 21 radios 23 Secure Digital cards 21 412 Carrier location of ESN 165 Categories calendar 51 contacts assigning to 69 CDMA IxRTT 140 activation with SB555 Watcher 165 Bell Mobility 183 Sprint 172 Telus 183 Verizon 168 antenna color code 133 AT command set 184 copying files from web site 162 via Microsoft ActiveSync 163 via storage cards 163 CORE module 140 location of ESC 165 phone activation 144 146 phone application 144 setting up 162 terminology 162 CElmager location of the executable file 128 migrating AUTORUN DAT files 128 Channel 80
382. rd changes and start again Tap Yes when you are prompted to verify this action Refresh will discard all unapplied edits and refetch values for this page Refresh now About Configuration Parameters You can find this information about each configuration parameter Name and Purpose Describes the parameter and its function Action Describes what to do with a parameter once that parameter is selected SNMP OID Lists the SNMP OID for the parameter Syntax or Options Syntax lists the two character code for the parameter if the parameter is configurable by scanning a bar code or by sending parameters through a network Both Syntax and Options list acceptable values for the para meter 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 301 Appendix A Configurable Settings Data Collection Control Panel Applet Z Note This applet is not available in units with PSM Build 3 00 or newer To determine your PSM Build version tap Start gt Programs gt File Explorer gt the PSMinfo text file e If your unit has PSM Build 3 00 or newer then you may have the Intermec Settings control panel applet in place of the Data Collection applet Information about the settings you can configure with the Intermec Settings applet is described in the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual The online manual is available from the Intermec web site at www intermec com Intermec Settings See the Data Collection
383. re developed for your device such as Pocket Word Creating a Note To create your note tap New then write draw type or record your in formation For information about using the input panel writing and dra wing and creating recordings see Basic Skills on page 30 Writing Using the stylus write directly on the screen Drawing Using the stylus draw directly on the screen Typing Using the input panel enter typed text into the 700 Color Computer Do this by tapping keys on the onscreen keyboard or by using hand writing recognition software Recording Create a stand alone recording or embed a recording into a note 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 75 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 76 Synchronizing Notes Notes can be synchronized between your desktop and device either through notes synchronization or file synchronization Notes synchroniza tion synchronizes the notes on your 700 Color Computer with Outlook Notes on your desktop File synchronization synchronizes all notes on your 700 Color Computer with the My Documents folder for the 700 Color Computer on your desktop To synchronize your notes through notes synchronization first select the Notes information type for synchronization in ActiveSync The next time you synchronize all notes in My Documents and its subfolder on your device appear in Outlook Notes on your desktop Notes that contain only text appear as regular notes
384. reate the _ RESETMEPLEASE TXT file in the Windows directory The preferred method to create this file is within the DllMain portion of the SETUP DLL file It looks like this include lt windows h gt include lt Tlhelp32 h gt include lt winioctl h gt include lt ce_setup h gt in the public SDK dir define IOCTL TERMINAL RESET CTL CODE FILE DEVICE UNKNOWN FILE ANY ACCESS 2050 METHOD NEITHER BOOL APIENTRY DllMain HANDLE h DWORD reason LPVOID lpReserved Gl return TRU DllMain J RRR RRR KKK KKK KR KK IK I I IR KI I I I Ck kCk ck k kc k kCk k Ck kc k k kc kc k kck ck kck ck ckckck ck kkk SDOCBEGINS BOOL IsProcessRunning TCHAR pname Description Get process table snapshot look for pname running Arguments pname pointer to name of program to look for for example app exe Returns TRUE process is running LT FALSE process is not running SDOCENDS J RRR RRR KKK KKK KK RK KOC I I RARA RRA RR RRA RRA Ck kCk k k kc k Ck kc k k kc kc k kck ck kck ck RARA BOOL IsProcessRunning TCHAR pname HANDLE hProcList 236 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 7 Programming PROCESSENTRY32 peProcess DWORD thDeviceProcessID TCHAR lpname MAX PATH if pname pname return FALSE _tcscpy lpname pname tcslwr lp
385. rinting to complete the COM port registration To change your COM port selection clear uncheck the En able Wireless Printing box select a new COM port then check Enable Wireless Printing again Check Default COM ports that already are in use are grayed out When you enable Wireless Printing a status message is shown near the bottom of the screen to confirm your action To print a test page to your printer tap Print Test Page Check Default to set this printer to identify the assigned COM Port as the WPPort in the registry See the Wireless Printing Development Guide for more details on WPPort 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 191 Chapter 4 Network Support Tap ok to return to the Wireless Printing page E settings y d izss QD Bluetooth PB20 4862374 00c01b05e2b9 Choose COM Port Ocom O Com Q coms O come come X Qcowo _ Enable Wireless Printing Default Printer is not enabled Print Test Page New Tools Accounts El gt File Transfer Use this page to enable your unit to receive files from another Bluetooth device or from any device that supports this function 192 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 4 Network Support x Note that this does not apply to the 730 Computer From this point this ya transfer is similar to an IrDA file transfer To transfer a file tap Start gt File Explorer Programs gt File Explorer and locate the
386. riting to the NPCP Driver All Print data can be sent to the printer using the WriteFile function The print data written to the driver must contain the proper printer commands for formatting If the function returns FALSE the NPCP error may be retrieved using IOCTL NPCP ERROR See the description on the next page 200 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 5 Printer Support NPCP Driver 1 0 Controls An application uses the DeviceloControl function to specify an printer operation to be performed Certain I O controls are required to bind and close communication sessions with the printer and must be completed before any other commands to the driver can execute properly The function returns TRUE to indicate the device successfully completed its specified I O control operation otherwise it returns FALSE The following I O control codes are defined define IOCTL_NPCP_CANCEL CTL CODE FILE DEVICE SERIAL PORT 0x400 METHOD BUFFERED FILE ANY ACCESS define IOCTL NPCP BIND CTL CODE FILE DEVICE SERIAL PORT 0x401 METHOD BUFFERED FILE ANY ACCESS define IOCTL NPCP CLOSE CTL CODE FILE DEVICE SERIAL PORT 0x402 METHOD BUFFERED FILE ANY ACCESS define IOCTL NPCP ERROR CTL CODE FILE DEVICE SERIAL PORT 0x403 METHOD BUFFERED FILE ANY ACCESS define IOCTL NPCP FLUSH CTL CODE FILE DEVICE SERIAL PORT 0x
387. rity community strings and traps a To access the settings from the 700 Color Computer tap Start gt Settings gt the System tab gt SNMP to access its control panel applet SNMP Tap a tab to access its menus These tabs represent three groups of settings or parameters Security starting on the next page Traps starting on page 357 Identification starting on page 359 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 351 Appendix A Configurable Settings Security a To access the settings from the 700 Color Computer tap Start gt Settings gt the System tab gt SNMP gt the Security tab to access its parameters SNMP The following are parameters that affect encryption and community strings Note that these are listed in the order of their appearance within the Security tab Read Only Community Sets the read only community string for this 700 Color Computer which is required for processing of SNMP get and get next requests Action Tap the Read Only Community parameter then enter a community string to change this parameter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 10 5 1 2 0 Options The read only community string can be up to 128 ASCII characters De fault is Public eiu Q SNMP cw ead Only Community public E Read Write Community lt private gt Read Encryption lt OfF gt Write Encryption Off Encryption Key lt gt E Read Only Community i Security Traps
388. rong cable is used or if the scanner firmware is older than 2 0 and the Failed to save one or more settings message appears then this step failed This process can take time as the terminal is going through a group of RS 232 settings to communicate with the scanner After successful com municated with the scanner about eight beeps are generated it initializes the scanner with the 700 Computer s current settings This process might generate a series of beeps pending on the firmware version installed in the scanner These beeps are suppressed in firmware versions 2 08 or greater Troubleshooting the 1551E 1553 Tethered Scanner Do the following to troubleshoot your 1551 1553 Tethered Scanner 1 Ensure the correct cable is used for the scanner on the tethered scanner port Note the 700 Computer cannot supply power to the scanner 2 Perform a quick test to determine whether the connection is good Temporary select the scanner model as ASCII then enable the scan ner port state Go to a command prompt or a notepad and scan a data label If a label is wedged into the command prompt or notepad then the connection is good 3 If step 2 passes reset the scanner configurations to their defaults scan the Reset Factory Defaults label on the next page to prevent miscom munication then reenable the scanner port state 4 If step 2 fails then the firmware installed in the tethered scanner may be older than version 2 0 Upgrade your sca
389. ror define NR NE VS BYTE 122 session layer sequenc rror define MAC CRCERR BYTE 124 MAC CRC error define RLENERR BYTE 123 MAC too much data received define FRMERR BYTE 200 Frame Reject define FRMERR IF BYTE 201 Frame Reject Invalid Frame define FRMERR NR BYTE 202 Frame Reject NR Mismatch define FRMERR NS BYTE 203 Frame Reject NS Mismatch define NDMERR BYTE 204 Normal Disconnect mode error define BINDERR BYTE 210 bind error define IPLDUR BYTE 221 invalid presentation layer response define HEADJAM BYTE 222 printer head jam define PAPEROUT BYTE 223 printer paper out define LOWVOLTS BYTE 224 printer low voltage define HIVOLTS BYTE 225 printer over voltage define LOWBAT BYTE 226 printer low battery define COVEROFF BYTE 227 printer cover off error define HEADFAULT BYTE 228 printer head short or driver short error define PFFAULT BYTE 229 paper feed motor fault define FRAME NOT ACKED 0x8000 frame was not received by printer and need to be resent 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 203 Chapter 5 Printer Support O Neil Printer Driver The DTR printer communications driver is a Stream Device Driver named ONEIL DLL All applications use WIN32 API functions to access drivers Basic operations are easily implemented by applications through the CreateFile WriteFile DeviceIOControl and CloseHandle Wi
390. rsionMax major version Numeric value returned by OSVERSIONINFO dwVersionMajor The CAB file is valid for the currently connected device if the version of this device is less than or equal to VersionMax BuildMin build_number Numeric value returned by OSVERSIONINFO dwBuildNumber The CAB file is valid for the currently connected device if the version of this device is greater than or equal to BuildMin BuildMax build_number Numeric value returned by OSVERSIONINFO dwBuildNumber The CAB file is valid for the currently connected device if the version of this device is less than or equal to BuildMax 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 7 Programming Example The following code example shows three CEDevice sections one that gives basic information for any CPU and two that are specific to the SH3 and the MIPS microprocessors CEDevice A template for all platforms UnsupportedPlatforms pltfrml Does not support pltfrml The following specifies version 1 0 devices only VersionMin 1 0 VersionMax 1 0 CEDevice ARM Inherits all CEDevice settings This will create a CAB file specific to ARM devices ProcessorType 2577 ARM cab file is valid for ARM microprocessors UnsupportedPlatforms pltfrml is still unsupported The following overrides the version settings so that no version checking is performed VersionMin VersionMax CEDevice MIPS Inherits
391. rt Wedge to send any data coming into the 700 Color Computer through the COMI port from an external input device as keyboard data to an application on the desktop For example if you have Pocket Word running on your 700 Color Computer desktop information scanned with a scanner connected to the COM1 port appears in the Word document If another data collec tion application is running and is active on the 700 Color Computer the scanned information appears in that application L4 Note When Comm Port Wedge is selected regardless of the data sent by the external input device you cannot control the device or the data format using any of the Intermec scanner control or data transfer APIs from the Data Collection Resource Kit from the IDL or the internal Data Collection software The external input device is governed by what software it has onboard to tell it how to scan take pictures or send the data elsewhere 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 213 Chapter 6 Scanner Support 214 Select 1551 1553 to enable the Sabre 1551E or 1553 Tethered Scanner to scan then send data as keyboard data The 1551 1553 Tethered Scanner has software onboard that translates scanned data into charac ters so the running active application does not need to know how to do that All the scanner control and data transfer APIs will work with the 1551 1553 Tethered Scanner so you can control the device Select Disable All to disable this
392. rted radios x Note Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation could void the user s authority to operate the equipment 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 23 Chapter 1 Introduction Accessories The following accessories are available for the 700 Color Computer Note that this is not a complete list Contact your Intermec representative for in formation about these and other accessories that are not in this list Accessory Descriptions Intermec Part Number 700 Color Single Dock Charger with Ethernet and Auxiliary Battery Charger 225 681 001 Single Dock Charger with USB and Ethernet Quad Battery Charger Single Battery Charger Multidock Charge Only holds four 700 Computers Multidock Charging with Ethernet support holds four units Modem Dock Vehicle Dock Vehicle Cradle Snap On Modem Long Range Tethered Scanning Adapter 3 3v to 5v DEX Adapter Standard Scan Handle Option Dockable Scan Handle Belt Clip No Ethernet Support 225 683 001 852 060 001 852 054 001 852 060 002 225 682 004 225 682 003 225 683 002 225 685 001 225 680 101 225 687 001 225 686 002 225 683 001 714 525 001 714 502 001 714 525 002 805 612 001 Physical and Environmental Specifications 730 Computer X k X xK PA o lt X PA PX MK KK X X X X x Use this section to locate technical information about the 700 Color Com puter and
393. ryption 386 profile security information WEP encryption 385 Typing mode Pocket Word 83 Typing on the screen Pocket Word 83 U Unit configuration parameters automatic shutoff 393 backlight timeout 393 date time 393 key clicks 393 volume 393 Unit information battery status 363 CAB files 364 ActiveX control tools 365 Bluetooth stack 364 Comm Port Wedge 364 NPCP printer 364 S9C Upgrade 365 Windows configuration 365 wireless printing sample 365 versions 20 362 Unit Manager date time 393 423 Index nshifted plane on keypad regular keypad 292 PC configuration parameter 307 A user ID 327 E user ID 327 Jpdate your PCS Vision profile Phone application CDMA radios 152 Jpdating bootloader 121 JRLs ActiveSync 48 Adobe Acrobat Reader 184 AT command interface CDMA IxRTT SB555 184 GPRS GSM MC45 184 GPRS GSM MC46 184 full screen display 241 MIBs 195 Microsoft Exchange e mail account 88 Microsoft Passport account 88 Microsoft support 29 MSDN library 248 MSDN Windows CE documentation 194 Windows Mobile 29 Windows Mobile support 29 Utilities control panel applet app launch 369 dock switch 366 registry save 367 wakeup mask 368 Gc E GE V Verizon activation process 168 Vibrator enabling 22 phone application 160 programming 289 Video files Windows Media Player 92 Viewing mobile favorites and channels Pocket Internet Explorer 99 Virtual wedge bar code con
394. s Symbology ID lt Dis able gt Code 39 user ID lt gt Code 128 user ID lt D gt Codabar user ID lt D gt Code 93 user ID lt D gt Interleaved 2 of 5 user ID lt I gt m Change Symbology ID Setting 8 Disable User defined O ISO IEC Standard Symbologies Symbology Options Beepel 4 gt Ej 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings AY settings a 4 1200 QQ Data Collection Symbology ID lt Disable gt Code 128 user ID lt D gt Codabar user ID D Code 93 user ID D i Interleaved 2 of 5 user ID lt I gt Change Code 39 user ID Setting 7 Symbologies Symbology Options Beepel 4 gt mj Code 39 User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter you can set your own ASCII character to identify Code 39 bar code data Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer Action Tap to expand the Symbology ID parameter select the Code 39 user ID parameter then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 4 1 3 1 Options x where x is a single ASCII character Default is asterisk Code 128 User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter you can set your own ASCII character to identify Code 128 bar code data Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Colo
395. s Apply Defaults Refres Apply Versions Battery Status CAB Files Versions CABFiles Battery Status mj mlj 700 Color Screen 730 Screen 20 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Storage Media CompactFlash Cards Secure Digital Cards Chapter 1 Introduction Note MultiMediaCards MMC s are not supported in 700 Color Com puters The 700 Color Computer supports both CompactFlash and Secure Digital storage cards To access either card slot locate the access door at the top of the 700 Color Computer remove its two screws then remove the door See the 700 Color with Windows Mobile 2003 Quick Start Guide PIN 962 054 069 for more information The 730 Computer only supports the Secure Digital storage card The CompactFlash card slot is embedded in the 730 Computer and cannot be removed To access the Secure Digital card slot locate the access door at the top of the 730 Computer remove its screws then remove the door See the Model 730 Mobile Computer Quick Start Guide PIN 962 054 068 for more information On 700 Color Computers the CompactFlash card slot accepts either a storage card or the 802 11b or 802 11b g radio which is factory installed and cannot be removed The 730 Computer does not support Compact Flash storage cards The Secure Digital card slot accepts storage cards only Storage Media Access Door 700 Color Computer 730 Computer This illustrat
396. s Not supported when us ing an imager Check digit dollar sign only asterisk only default and dollar sign and asterisk Not used default Mod 43 transmitted Mod 43 not transmitted French CIP transmitted French CIP not transmitted Italian CPI transmitted Italian CPI not transmitted Any length default Minimum length Minimum length 001 254 Minimum length 1 254 default is 6 Bar code length RO DAW ARUN e OO l2 c CO n HO Le Note If Bar code length 1 then Minimum length is entered Settings e 41 0 Q Data Collection eh ode 39 Decoding Active gt PO Format Standard 43 characters Start Stop Not transmitted Start Stop characters lt Not supported v Symbologies Symbology Options Beepel 4 gt New Tools Accounts 1 mj 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Standard 2 of 5 Standard 2 of 5 is a discrete and self checking symbology that uses the bars to encode information and the spaces to separate the individual bars Action Tap to expand the Standard 2 of 5 parameter select the setting to be changed then tap an option to change this setting or select an option from the drop down list SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 1 1 4 1 Options Decoding Not active default Active Format Identicon 6 start stop bars default Computer Identics 4 start stop bars Not use
397. s 296 Ambient lighting 2 Annotations index Microsoft Reader 95 Antenna radio type 133 APIs 802 11 267 AT command interface 184 IrSock 198 App launch control panel applet 369 Application keys app launch control panel applet 369 wakeup mask control panel applet 368 Appointments Calendar adding a note 58 assigning to a category 60 changing 55 creating 55 deleting 62 finding 62 making recurring 59 setting a reminder 57 viewing 53 via Calendar 50 APS linear imager about 207 ASCII printing 198 printing to a port port print method 198 raw text to printer 198 ASN 1 195 AT command interface 184 testing 185 Attaching notes to text Microsoft Reader 95 Audio phone application 160 Audio control panel applet input mixing 8 Audio files Windows Media Player 92 Audio system external headset jack 4 microphone 4 speaker 3 AutoCab command line syntax 130 AutoFTP 248 AutoIP 194 Automatic Private IP See AutoIP Automatic shutoff bar code configuration 393 397 configuration parameter 393 Autostart FTP 248 AvantGo channels Pocket Internet Explorer 98 AXCommunication 365 AXFileTransfer 365 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Index AXReaderCommand 365 AXVWedge 365 Backlight control panel applet ambient light sensor 2 keypad 12 Backlight timeout bar code configuration 393 397 configuration parameter 393 Bar code configuration audio volume 393 automatic shutoff
398. s se lect Keyboard from the Input method drop down list then select Large keys EF Settings Input rout nate 8 Large keys fe r t O Small keys idif g O Use gestures for the following keys and remove them from the keyboard e Space Shift key do Backspace n Enter Input Method Word Completion Options If stylus taps become inaccurate align the touch screen Ej Using Block Recognizer Character recognition software gives you a fast and easy method for enter ing information in any program on your 700 Color Computer Letters numbers and punctuation you write are translated into typed text E Tap the input panel arrow then tap Block Recognizer Write a letter in the box When you write a letter it is converted to typed text that appears on the screen For specific instructions on using Block Recognizer with Block Recogniz er open tap the question mark next to the writing area Tap for assistance New Tools Ag 36 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Using Letter Recognizer With Letter Recognizer you can write letters using the stylus just as you would on paper E Tap the input panel arrow then tap Letter Recognizer Write a letter in the box When you write a letter it is converted to typed text that appears on the screen For specific instructions on using Letter Recognizer with Letter Recognizer open tap the question
399. se tables are to help you determine what is on your particular computer Hardware Features 730 Computers 802 11b radio Bluetooth 740 Computers Ethernet Bluetooth 741 Computers Ethernet Bluetooth 750 Computers Ethernet 802 11b radios Bluetooth 751 Computers Ethernet 802 11b g radios Bluetooth 760 Computers Ethernet 802 11b CDMA IxRTT WAN data only GSM GPRS WAN data and voice radios Bluetooth 761 Computers Ethernet 802 11b g CDMA 1xRTT WAN data and voice GSM GPRS WAN data and voice radios Bluetooth This is for units sold in the United States Software Applications Computers 730 740 CORE page 137 X X Microsoft Phone for CDMA Radios page 144 Microsoft Phone for GSM Radios page 154 On board Wired Ethernet page 134 PhoneUtility page 159 SB555 Watcher page 162 Wireless Local Area Network page 134 Wireless Personal Area Network page 189 Wireless Wide Area Network WN AN Communicator WWAN Toolkit Does not apply to WAN radios See the WWAN Communicator Users Guide P N 074250 X X X X X X X X 132 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Antennas 760 761 Computers The 760 Computers have color coded tips to identify the WWAN radio type within Below are the colors and their types The 761 Computers in the United States and Canada use the external antenna with no color in its tip See your Intermec representative for more
400. sensor This can be a value from 0 always off to 255 always on pOutBuf must point to a buffer that contains a byte value of the desired setting ITC AMBIENT FRONTLIGHT does not apply to the 730 Computer This IOCTL sets the threshold for the frontlight ambient sensor This can be a value from 0 always off to 255 IpOutBuf must point to a buffer that contains a byte value of the desired setting 256 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL HAL GET DEVICEID This IOCTL returns the device ID There are two types of device IDs supported which are differentiated based on the size of the output buffer The UUID is returned if the buffer size is set to sizeof UNIQUE DEVICEID J otherwise the oldstyle device ID is re turned Usage include pkfuncs h include deviceid h Syntax BOOL KernelloControl IOCTL HAL GET DEVICEID LPVOID lpInBuf DWORD nInBufSize LPVOID lpOutBuf DWORD nOutBufSize LPDWORD lpBytesReturned Parameters IpInBuf Should be set to NULL STRICT_ID settings are not supported IpInBufSize Should be set to zero IpOutBuf Must point to a UNIQUE_DEVICEID structure as defined by DEVICEID H if the UUID is to be returned nOutBufSize The size of the UNIQUE_DEVICEID in bytes if the UUID is to be returned A DEVICE_ID as defined by PKFUNCS H is re turned if the size in bytes is greater than or equal to sizeof DE VICE ID
401. ser ID 325 code 93 308 length 308 user ID 326 datamatrix 322 date time 393 EAN 13 user ID 328 8 user ID 328 good read beep duration 337 beeps 336 identification contact 359 location 361 name 360 image dimension 340 interleaved 2 of 5 317 user ID 326 key clicks 393 lighting mode 341 macro PDF 314 matrix 2 of 5 318 user ID 328 maxicode 323 micro PDF417 316 MSI 313 user ID 326 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Index PDF417 314 user ID 326 plessey 312 user ID 327 prefix 330 QR code 321 security encryption key 356 read encryption 354 read only community string 352 read write community string 353 write encryption 355 SNMP security subnet mask 324 standard 2 of 5 305 user ID 327 sticky aimer duration 339 suffix 331 telepen 319 user ID 328 trap authentication 357 threshold 358 UPC A user ID 327 E user ID 327 UPC EAN 307 virtual wedge 343 code page 349 grid 348 postamble 346 preamble 344 volume 393 Configuring service settings Phone application GSM ra dios 157 Connecting to an ISP 100 e mail server 116 work 104 Connecting to a mail server via Inbox 79 Connections See also Getting connected directly to e mail server 116 ending 116 setting up an e mail account 116 to an ISP 100 via modem 100 to work 104 via modem 105 via VPN server 113 via modem to an ISP 100 to work 105 via VPN server to work 113 via wire
402. ser ID 327 UPC EAN 307 virtual wedge 343 virtual wedge code page 349 virtual wedge grid 348 virtual wedge postamble 346 virtual wedge preamble 344 vibrator 22 Data Matrix configuration parameter 322 Date setting 395 Date Time configuration parameter 393 DHCP 194 replicating registry settings 123 Display full screen 241 Display specifications 24 Dock switch control panel applet 366 Docks modem support 17 DRAM low battery shutdown 6 maintenance 6 Drawing mode Pocket Word 85 Drawing on the screen See also Notes Pocket Word 85 Drivers DTR communications 205 installing 204 opening 205 removing 204 writing to 205 NPCP closing 200 communications 202 I O controls 201 installing 199 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Index opening 200 reading from 200 removing 199 writing to 200 O Neil See DTR printing DTR printing 204 closing driver 205 communications 205 opening driver 205 removing driver 204 writing to driver 205 E E mail account setting up an account 116 E mail server getting connected 116 EAN configuration parameter 307 13 user ID 328 8 user ID 328 Editing a profile 373 Edition information 28 Emails SMS messages via Phone application CDMA radios 150 GSM radios 156 Ending a connection 116 Environmental specifications 25 Epson Escape Sequences 198 Error messages comm port wedge 214 tethered scanner 214 ESN location on computer 16
403. ser s Manual 291 Chapter 7 Programming Remapping the Keypad Z Unshifted Plane Gold Plane 292 Note Use caution when remapping the keypad Improper remapping may render the keypad unusable Data within the 700 Color Computer could also be lost should any problems occur Applications have the ability to remap keys on the 700 Color Numeric Keypad and 700 Color Alphanumeric Keypad This will allow applications to enable keys that would otherwise not be available such as the F1 function key Also to disable keys that should not be available such as the alpha key because no alpha entry is required Care should be exercised when attempting to remap the keypad because improper remapping may cause the keypad to become unusable This can be corrected by cold boot ing the device which will cause the default keymap to be loaded again Note that remapping the keys in this way affects the key mapping for the entire system not just for the application that does the remapping There are three planes supported for the 700 Color Numeric Keypad and Alphanumeric Keypad Keys that are to be used in more than one shift plane must be described in each plane The unshifted plane contains values from the keypad when not pressed with other keys such as the following Press the Keys Numeric Keypad Alphanumeric Keypad To Enter This ua re v9 The gold plane contains values from the keypad when a key is simulta ne
404. sh to do this activation another time tap Cancel to close this wizard then tap Yes Exit Activation Wizard Your wireless device may not be activated yet Are you sure you want to exit the Activation Wizard It is necessary to initiate activation before using your Microsoft Phone ap plication Below are the instructions 1 Tap Start gt Programs gt the Phone desktop icon or tap Start gt Phone from the Today screen to access the application which processes your phone calls Tap the Close button in the upper right corner of this ap plication to close 2 From the Phone application tap Tools gt Activation Wizard 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 3 Tap Auto to initiate the activation The activation process has been Activation process ES start E 12 14 O automated for your convenience recommended or you may use Manual For Auto Activation click Auto and the wizard will connect to the verizon Wireless Network to activate the device Please make sure you are in a strong signal area before beginning this Chapter 4 Network Support 4 The application acknowledges that your phone is now in service Tap Finish to close the wizard Activation Completed Your Wireless device has been activated Enjoy Thank you for choosing Verizon Wireless Wizard 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Click Finish to close the Activatio
405. sion in the appropriate Key field 3 Profile Wizard 7 46125 Q Basic Security advanced 8021 Securit Association Encryption LL Data TX Key Ej 376 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings To Enable WPA Encryption Using a Preshared Key 1 Set 8021x Security as None 2 Set Association to WPA See page 372 for information about WPA encryption 3 Skip Encryption as it is automatically set to TKIP See page 372 for more information about TKIP 4 Enter the temporal key as ASCII 12345 in the Pre Shared Key field 23 Profile Wizard ee d 1 27 ok Basic Security Advanced 8021x Securit None X Association Encryption WPA T TKIP Y Pre Shared Key 1 1 Ej 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 377 Appendix A 378 Configurable Settings PEAP Protected EAP This protocol is suitable for performing secure authentication against Win dows domains and directory services It is comparable to EAP TTLS see page 385 both in its method of operation and its security though not as flexible This does not support the range of inside the tunnel authentica tion methods supported by EAP TTLS Microsoft and Cisco both support this protocol Use PEAP to configure the use of PEAP as an authentication protocol and to select Open WPA or Network E
406. slash 0000606 Enter a minus sign gt x J G Enter a plus sign Tab to the right Tab to the left Gw Gold White Increase volume Gold White amp Note Pocket PC applications are accessible only if configured to do so in the App Launch portion of the Utilities control panel applet See page 366 for more information ite amp ite ite amp tlic ite amp ite ite amp ite ite Y de ite amp ec ite amp CEREA E A T ES S Decrease volume 14 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Alpha Blue Plane Keys The alphabet can be entered with either the numeric keypad or the alpha numeric keypad Below and on the next page are the key sequences Numeric Keypad When you press Ger the Scanning Alpha LED WO shows red for the Alpha mode The keypad stays in Alpha mode until you press Ge To type a lowercase c press the 2 key three times To type a letter on the same key as the last letter entered wait two seconds then enter the correct series of keystrokes to create the next letter While you are in the Alpha mode and you press to initiate the CAPS mode you will render a CAPS LOCK until you press again Once you are in CAPS mode you stay in CAPS until it is pressed again Press to enter a space ToEnter Press the Keys ToEnter Press the Keys 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual ABC End ABO
407. sport 87 contacts managing 90 sending messages 91 working with 89 setting up an account 88 using My Text 43 MultiMediaCards card support 21 NDIS_SUPP_LOGGING_OFF EnableSuppLogging 287 NDIS_SUPP_LOGGING_ON EnableSuppLogging 287 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual NDISUIO_PACKET_DRIVER SwitchPacketDriver 288 Network adapters antenna color code 133 Ethernet communications 134 no networking 135 wireless 802 11 134 wireless printing 189 Network EAP LEAP security method 391 PEAP security method 380 Network settings Phone application GSM radios 158 Network type 802 11 radio module 374 NLED driver vibrator 289 NLED_SETTINGS_INFO_ID NLEDSetDevice 290 Notes Object Store packaging an application 120 Opening drivers DTR 205 NPCP 200 Operating system specifications 25 Owner information Windows Mobile settings 45 P Packaging an application CompactFlash storage cards 120 Flash File Store 120 Object Store 120 Persistent Storage Manager 120 Secure Digital storage cards 120 Page format printing 198 Password Index adding to appointments 58 contacts 68 creating a note 75 drawing on the screen 41 creating a drawing 41 selecting a drawing 41 Pocket Outlook 75 recording a message 42 Start menu icon 31 synchronizing notes 76 writing on the screen 38 alternate writing 39 converting writing to text 39 selecting the writing 38 tips for g
408. ssenger tap Start gt Programs gt MSN Messenger Setting Up an Account Before you can use MSN Messenger you must set up the instant messag ing accounts to use For MSN Messenger Service you must have a Micro soft Passport or Hotmail account For Exchange Instant Messaging you must have an Exchange account 1 Create a connection for your device To use MSN Messenger Service set up a connection to the Internet to use Exchange Instant Messaging set up a connection to your corporate network See page 100 for more information on getting connected 2 In MSN Messenger tap Tools gt Options gt the Accounts tab 3 Select either Enable MSN Messenger Service or Enable Exchange In stant Messaging or both 4 Enter your sign in name and password for the selected accounts Your sign in name is usually in the username domain com form 5 If you selected both accounts under Sign in using this account first select which account to sign in to first Accounts Enable MSN Messenger Service Sign in name amthing hatmail com Enable Exchange Instant Messaging Sign in name Sion in using this account first C MSN Messenger Service Q Exchange Instant Messaging General Privacy Accounts E 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Signing In and Out To sign in tap anywhere on the screen Follow the directions on the screen To sign out tap Tools Sign Out
409. sterisk Interleaved 2 of 5 User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter you can set your own ASCII character to identify Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code data Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer Tap to expand the Symbology ID parameter select the Interleaved 2 of 5 user ID parameter then enter a user ID value to change this parame ter setting 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 4 1 10 1 x where x is a single ASCII character Default is I not lowercase L PDF417 User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter you can set your own ASCII character to identify PDF417 bar code data Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer Tap to expand the Symbology ID parameter select the PDF417 user ID parameter then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 4 1 12 1 x where x is a single ASCII character Default is an asterisk MSI User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter you can set your own ASCII character to identify MSI bar code data Note that this is not avail able when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer Tap to expand the Symbology ID parameter select the MSI user ID parameter then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 4 1 11 1 x where x is a single ASCII character Default is D 700
410. stry File 1 On the original 700 Color Computer select Start Programs the File Explorer icon then tap My Device Flash File Store Scroll down to the bottom of the list of files and folders press and hold your stylus in the white area beneath for a pop up menu then select View All Files View All Files Paste Paste Shortcut New Folder 2 Look for a registry file If one exists select to highlight that file press and hold for a pop up menu select Delete then Yes to remove this file y File Explorer P d 8 47 x Flash File Store 5 Persistent Co SSConfigDir B System a ignore_my_d 3 21 03 E 3 21 03 ReadmeSupp 5 5 05 3 21 03 6 20 05 Copying the RegFlush CAB File Note Information for the Intermec web site is subject to change 1 Using your web browser go to the Intermec web site at www intermec com then select Service amp Support gt Developer s Library 2 Scroll down then click Intermec Component Toolbox beneath the Software Downloads header Register to use the library if you have not already done so 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 3 Installing Applications 3 Scroll down for the RegFlush Registry Save header click Download next to RegFlush to download the CAB file to a location on your desktop Copy the REGFLUSH CAB file then paste this file anywhere in the 700 Color Computer Loading the Registry S
411. t Longa Ate pte nh athe Ma ore Aba E iurata 202 NPCP Error Codes 25 potero ad 203 O Neil Printer DAN tL SU ER CERA AE hee td RENS MERE A TA d eee ad 204 DIR Driver Installation and Removal especies d EX EE PER SEE EE 204 Opening the DTR Drivet bh duoc corte det et ela riot on bula aiat hele n oko Peau 205 Closing the LER DAVE obrera tete eges Pob atop Ariel tepido ditat cay taco eu 205 Writing to the DTR Driver d o te A Eee te Be cus 205 DTR Printer Communications cese e Ra A e Da pti bac quet 205 6 Scanner Support ois orbis DR e dab e xA D errereen 207 Scanner Control and Data Transfer ii 9 re ee as A ae end RU e Red reca 208 Data Collection Configuration cx cesser son eee SET Ae T A E ERR X WERE e x RE Oe 209 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual xi Contents Internal Same rs rta lcd Pra biet tne bu alte Loris asp eta beg hal ardet Pr att 210 For Units With PSM Build 3 00 or Newer pa ouk iaa saciar e sei 210 Scanner and Imager Settings ios spud d Sach d A Bac wen Cs V ace ire NA E d on a cas dd 211 Internal Scanner Supported Symbolopies vidad spices PIER ER EP CE 212 Tethered Scanners qucd ius ope us wheelies eee INOLTRE pe EE PASS 213 For Units With PSM Builds Older than 3 00 no ericsson eR ctas 213 Enabling and Disabling ss dot barbie er dd 213 Error Message s i aene eiea sotto pace e EE EA wearer dirt dra 214 Changing Comm Settings 2 Love Rove e AR 214 Scanner Cabling uode apre n eta vara aci 216 Limitations and Capa
412. t list tap the contact and then tap Edit 2 Scroll to and tap Categories 3 On the Select tab check the categories to assign to the contact 4 To create a new category tap the Add Delete tab enter the category name then tap Add The new category is automatically checked in the Select tab 5 Tap ok to return to the contacts E contacis Ey o v Business A check mark indicates C Holiday a selected category Personal Reviews select adaroelete Edit Ej Copying a Contact 1 In the contact list select the contact To select multiple contacts tap and drag 2 Tap Tools and then select Copy Contacts 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 69 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Sending a Message to a Contact 1 In the contact list tap and hold the contact To select multiple contacts tap and drag Then tap and hold the selected contacts 2 On the pop up menu select Send Email or Send SMS depending upon the type of message to send er dz tok 2 To dale Mees mcleodusa net Send Subj Status Edit My Text Z Note To send an e mail message you must have an e mail address config ured for the contact To send an SMS Short Messaging Service message you must have an SMS number for the contact which is usually the mo bile phone number 70 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Finding a Contact
413. t network Before you manually launch data provisioning wait at least 30 minutes In some cases you may have to wait up to two hours 1 If Data Provisioning does not start automatically select Admin gt Data Provisioning from the bottom menu bar FGlspss5 Watcher e Ready to Connect SIERRA WIFELEGE PCS Vision X About Activation Wizard Data Frovisioning 2 Tap Yes to proceed with data provisioning SB555 Watcher You have requested to launch Data Provisioning Would you like to continue 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Activation over the air typically takes 1 20 minutes SB555 Watcher ef Mz 6 56 EY SIERRA WIF ELEGER PCS Vision X m Tools Admin If data provisioning fails do the following f Data Provisioning fails and the message could not prepare data ser vices please contact Sprint displays retry the Data Provisioning step by tapping the Admin menu icon at the bottom of the Watcher screen Select Data Provisioning and answer yes to the request f after several attempts to complete the Data Provisioning over the air it may be necessary to manually enter the data activation method Go to Intermec Knowledge Central www intermec com then select Ser vice amp Support gt Knowledge Central to learn about manual activa tion The art
414. t of symbology sizes is available to gether with a fixed level of error correction for each symbology size Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Com puter Action Tap to expand the PDF417 parameter tap to expand the Micro PDF417 parameter select a setting to be changed then select an option to change this setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 1 1 27 1 Options Decoding Not active default Active Code 128 Emulation Not active default Active Emm iena Q Data Collection E amp Micro PDF 417 007 Decoding lt Not active i Code 128 Emulation lt Not active gt a Interleaved 2 of 5 lt O00006000000000 a Matrix 2 of 5 010067 Symbologies Symbology Options Beepel 4 gt mj 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Interleaved 2 of 5 Interleaved 2 of 5 I 2 of 5 is a high density self checking continuous numeric symbology used mainly in inventory distribution and the automo bile industry L4 Note An Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code label must be at least three characters long for the 700 Color Computer to scan and decode correctly Action Tap to expand the Interleaved 2 of 5 parameter select the setting to be changed then tap an option to change this setting or select an option from the drop down list SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 1 1 23 1 Options Decoding Not activ
415. t the laser scanner To determine your PSM Build version tap Start gt Programs gt File Ex plorer gt the Flash File Store folder gt the PSMinfo text file For Units With PSM Builds Older than 3 00 Do the following to select a beeper volume 700 Color Computers built with a laser scanner have three options Off High or Medium 700 Computers built with an imager have just two Beeper or Vibrate 730 Computers have just the Beeper option See Appendix A Configurable Settings for more information about the Beeper Volume or Beeper option 1 Tap Start gt Settings gt the System tab gt the Data Collection icon to access its control panel applet 2 Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Beeper LED tab then tap this tab 3 For units with laser scanners Tap Beeper Volume select an option then tap Apply to change the set ting For units with imagers Select either option then tap Apply to change the setting For 730 Com puters the Vibrate option is not supported 4 Tap ok to confirm this change then tap ok to exit the Data Collection control panel applet 12004 old Emm an 46 12 29 old Emm r 46 12 15 old Data Collection Data Collection Beeper Beeperz Change Beeper Setting Change Beeper Setting Beeper D vibrate Beeper Symbology Options Beeper LED virtual A Symbology Options Beeper LED Imager 4 F Symbology Options Beeper LED virtual 4 F mj
416. tall the selected certificate Web Enrollment Tap Web Enrollment to obtain a user certificate over the network from an IAS Server Tap ok to return to the Security page EF Profile Wizard ec uz 2 46 ok web Enrollment Import Root Certificate ce Import Root Cert Import User Certificate Certificate Path cer eee Key Path pyk xxx Import User Cert 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings LEAP Cisco Lightweight EAP LEAP is the Cisco Lightweight version of EAP See page 371 for informa tion about EAP Use LEAP to configure the use of LEAP as an authentication protocol select Open WPA or Network EAP as an association mode or as sign Network EAP Note that this defaults to the Network EAP To Enable LEAP with an Open Association 1 Set 8021x Security as LEAP 2 Set Association to Open 3 Skip Encryption as it is automatically set to WEP See page 372 for information about WEP encryption 4 Enter your unique User Name to use this protocol 5 Select Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each time to access the protocol or leave Use following password as selected to automatically use the protocol without entering a password Profile Wizard 4 6 2 48 Basic Security Advanced 8021x Security LEAP Association Encryption Open wer T
417. tate state of object store HAL RESET INFO PHAL RESET INFO Reset reason types define HAL RESET TYPE UNKNOWN 0 define HAL RESET REASON HARDWARE 1 cold define HAL RESET REASON SOFTWARE 2 suspend define HAL RESET REASON WATCHDOG 4 define HAL RESET BATT FAULT 8 power fail define HAL RESET VDD FAULT 16 warm boot Object store state flags I de de OBJECT STORE STATE UNKNOWN 0 OBJECT STORE STATE CLEAR 1 ne H ne H Fh Fh p pe A A 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 261 Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL HAL GET BOOT DEVICE This IOCTL code allows software to check which device CE booted from Usage Zinclude oemioctl h Syntax BOOL KernelloControl IOCTL HAL GET BOOT DEVICE LPVOID lpInBuf DWORD nInBufSize LPVOID lpOutBuf DWORD nOutBufSize LPDWORD lpBytesReturned Parameters Should be set to NULL Should be set to zero Must point to a buffer large enough to hold a DWORD 4 bytes that contains the boot device The following boot devices are sup ported define HAL BOOT DEVICE UNKNOWN defi AL BOOT DEVICE ROM XIP defi AL BOOT DEVICE ROM defi AL BOOT DEVICE PCMCIA ATA defi AL BOOT DEVICE PCMCIA LIN defi AL BOOT DEVICE IDE ATA defi AL BOOT DEVICE IDE ATAPI nOutBufSize The size of pOurBuf in bytes 4
418. tatus Connected Tap to connect and synchronize Tap to stop synchronization sync stop View synchronization status Tools Ej Tap to synchronize via IR or change synchronization settings For more information about ActiveSync on your 700 Color Computer switch to ActiveSync then tap Start gt Help 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 49 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Microsoft Pocket Outlook Microsoft Pocket Outlook includes Calendar Contacts Tasks Inbox and Notes You can use these programs individually or together For example you can use e mail addresses stored in Contacts to address e mail messages in Inbox Using ActiveSync you can synchronize information in Microsoft Outlook or Microsoft Exchange on your desktop with your 700 Color Computer You can also synchronize this information directly with a Microsoft Ex change server Each time you synchronize ActiveSync compares the changes you made on your 700 Color Computer and desktop or server and updates both computers with the latest information For information on using ActiveSync see ActiveSync Help on the desktop You can switch to any program by tapping it on the Start menu Calendar Scheduling Appointments and Meetings 50 To switch to Calendar on the 700 Color Computer tap Start gt Calendar Use Calendar to schedule appointments including meetings and other events You can check your appoint
419. ter 346 with without data 347 Power control panel battery status 5 RAM maintenance 6 specifications 26 Windows Mobile settings 45 Preamble configuration parameter 344 420 with without data 345 Prefix configuration parameter user ID 330 Printer support 198 IrDA printer driver 198 NPCP printer driver 199 O Neil printer driver 204 Profile label 802 11 radio module 374 Profiles 802 11 radio module 373 advanced settings 392 basic information 374 security information 375 editing 373 Programs adding or removing Windows Mobile 45 PSM determining build version 18 packaging an application 120 PSM build 302 Q QR code configuration parameter 321 R Radios See also Network adapters card support 23 Reader commands 394 configuration change 394 date and time settings 395 Reading from drivers NPCP 200 Real Time Clock restore after cold boot 367 Record button recording a message 42 Recording via Notes 42 Recording a message Pocket Word 84 Recording mode Pocket Word 84 Recovery CD AutoCab method 130 AUTOUSER DAT file 129 RegFlushKey API 241 S9C upgrade 365 updating the system software 127 Recurrence pattern Calendar 53 RegFlush utility 129 Registry confirm the new regisry file 126 copy the REGFLUSH CAB file 124 delete the old registry save 124 keypad remapping 294 load the application 125 replicating settings 123 sample view of key mapping 298 update other comp
420. the network to detect your position making some Sprint PCS applications easier to use Turning location off wil hide your location from everyone except 911 Even if location is turned on in this handset no service may use your location without your express permission Location 8 Location ON 911 Only Phone Location Data system Phone Info Ej Turning location on will allow the network to detect your position Location Location ON C 911 Only Phone Location Phone Info Sprint Networks Verizon Networks 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 151 Chapter 4 Network Support 152 Tap the Data tab to either reset your connection settings for PCS Vi sion or update your PCS Vision profile For Sprint Networks if your 761 Computer is unable to make a data connection and it has been more than four hours since activation you can launch data provisioning from this screen Tap Provision then fol low the prompts This would take several minutes to set up the data connections Note The data provisioning process can be automatically initiated by the Sprint network by attempting to make a cellular line connection to the WAN before the 761 Computer is data provisioned or by manually starting the connections through this screen Intermec recommends that Sprint Network push the data provisioning to your unit This should oc cur shortly after the voice activation is complete 8 v
421. the operation After all data is sent to the printer ensure that the printer continues to print the report properly by polling the printer s status Use IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH to poll the printer s status If an error is re ported by the IOCTL then use IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR to get the error and determine the correct recovery procedure See sample code in the 700C Dev Tools Installable Drivers Port Drivers Npcp NPCPPrint directory for more details on printing printer communications and error code handling 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 5 Printer Support NPCP Error Codes Call the IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR I O control function to receive PL N compatible error codes Applications must decide how to act upon the data returned Definition of NPCP communications Errors and Printer Errors define PNRDY BYTE 102 link not ready error define RXTMO BYTE 104 link no receive error define TXTMO BYTE 106 link no transmit error define BADADR BYTE 111 frame address error define GAPERR BYTE 112 link gap error timeout in receive data define LSRPE BYTE 113 frame parity error on length field define IFTS BYTE 120 session layer invalid frame this state define NS NE VR BYTE 121 session layer sequenc r
422. the Intermec FTP Server components A few of the parameters are visible in the registry by default but most must be created in order to modify the default behavior of the FTP server BlockSize Setting this parameter configures the Intermec FTP Server to transmit and receive Ethernet packets using the specified data block size By default the FTP server transmits and receives data using a 64K data block size Adjust ing this value may be useful in certain wireless TCP IP installations Key HKLM Software Intermec IFTP Value Type REG DWORD data block size in bytes Valid Range 0x100 0x10000 256 65536 decimal Default 65536 DeviceName This parameter configures the Intermec FTP Server to include the speci fied device name in the Intermec Device Network Announcement IDNA Adjusting this value may be useful in assigning a symbolic name to this device for asset tracking Key HKLM Software Intermec IFTP Value Type REG_SZ Valid Range None Default None DeviceURL This parameter configures the Intermec FTP Server to transmit the speci fied URL in the IDNA This can be used by Intermec management soft ware for asset management Key HKLM Software Intermec IFTP Value Type REG_SZ Valid Range None Default None 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 243 Chapter 7 Programming IDNATarget This parameter configures the Intermec FTP Server to transmit the IDNA to a specific destination instead of
423. the bottom of the 700 Color Computer Note that the keypad is to the bottom in this illustration 4 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Battery The 700 Color Computer comes with a 14 4 Watt hour 7 2V replaceable Lithium Ion Lilon battery The 730 Computer comes with an 8 8 Watt hour 3 7V replaceable Lilon battery To view the status of this battery tap Start gt Settings gt the System tab gt the Power icon gt the Power tab to view the current status of both the Power main battery and the backup battery Tap ok to exit this information Eg settinas E tinas Power Main battery Lilon Battery power remaining o BEG Backup battery LL 100 On battery power mo a device if mot n external power O Turn off device iF not used For Power Battery Motifications 5 minutes v mj For Units With PSM Builds Older than 3 00 You can also view the battery status by accessing the Unit Information control panel applet Tap Start gt Settings gt the System tab gt the Unit pak Information icon gt the Battery Status tab to view the current status T NIE ormation icon the Battery Status tab to view the current status Tap ok to exit this information Unit Information Main battery Good 99 gt Defaults Refresh Apply Versions Battery Status cas ries Files mj 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manu
424. the calendar If you are working in Day view tap the time slot for the new appointment and then tap New to have the time automatically entered for you To change an appointment tap it in the calendar and then tap Edit Change any appointment detail by tapping it and entering the new infor mation 4 Note Tap the arrows to the right of the description and location boxes to choose from previous entries When entering a time you can type military and abbreviated time forms such as 2300 becomes 11 00 PM 913pm becomes 9 13 PM 911 be comes 9 11 AM and 9p becomes 9 00 PM Tap to return to the calendar the appointment is saved automatically 73 Calendar d 2 47 ok Subject Location Starts 3 30 05 12 00PM Ends 3 30 05 1 00PM All Day No Occurs Once Reminder Remind me 15 minute s Categories No categories Attendees Mo attendees Status Busy Sensitivity Normal Appointment notes Edit Ej Tap to choose from predefined text Tap to choose from previously entered locations Tap to select a time Tap to select a date Notes is a good place for maps and directions 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 55 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Creating an All Day Event To create an all day event do the following 1 Tap New 2 Tap All Day then select Yes Subject Training T Location Starts 3 30 05 12 00PM Ends 3 30
425. the communication settings of COMI port matched the settings of the device The Pocket PC Pocket Office applications misbehave when control characters such as carriage return are wedged This is a known Pocket PC problem which is being worked with Microsoft and for which a work around is being developed Communications port is COMI and cannot be changed A complete bar code label is detected when the time between bytes the inter byte gap exceeds 100 ms This allows that data could be concate nated if two labels were received while the Comm Port Wedge or the 1551 1553 Tethered Scanner was not performing a read That is it could be wedging data just read or the read thread could be preempted Also the labels could appear concatenated if the scanner itself were to buffer the labels before transmitting them When enabled the Comm Port Wedge menu option has this limitation There is no bar code API to get bar code data from the bar code scan ner The Comm Port Wedge transmits the data through the keyboard interface only When enabled the 1551 1553 menu option has these capabilities Grid Data Editing is available The source of the symbology configurations is only available via the Easy Set command labels You can only configure the Virtual Wedge configurations via the Data Collection control panel applet Virtual Wedge page See Appendix A Configurable Settings for information May transmit the data t
426. the following When connected via modem or VPN tap the Connectivity icon on the navigation bar and then tap Disconnect When connected via cable or cradle detach your device When connected via Infrared move the device away from the other computer or device When connected via a wireless network switch off the connection Connecting Directly to an E mail Server ES You can set up a connection to an e mail server so that you can send and receive e mail messages by using a modem or network connection and In box on your 700 Color Computer Note The ISP or network must use a POP3 or IMAP4 e mail server and an SMTP gateway You can use multiple e mail services to receive your messages For each e mail service you intend to use first set up and name the e mail service If you use the same service to connect to different mailboxes set up and name each mailbox connection Setting Up an E mail Account 116 Do the following to set up an e mail service Tap the question mark at the top of the screen for more assistance 1 On your 700 Color Computer tap Start gt Inbox to access the Inbox application Tap Accounts gt New Account 2 Enter an e mail address tap Next Cancel then Next after the status of the automatic configuration is listed as Completed 57 mbox il d 2 13 E mail Setup 1 5 o9 E mail address Enter e mail address Name company corn Cancel back Next Edit
427. the number below 6 Enter the phone number provided when your 760 Computer was acti vated and tap Next 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 167 Chapter 4 Network Support Verizon Automated Activation Process x Note This process takes approximately 60 seconds Do the following to activate Verizon on your 760 Computer v 1 Tap Start Programs the Watcher icon Watcher 2 Tap Yes I accept to accept the license agreement then tap OK to con tinue Note that this license agreement does not appear again after this installation E License Agreement e 1 12 fok Please read the license agreement carefully SIERRA WIRELESS SOFTWARE END ATTENTION CAREFULLY READ THIS AGREEMENT YOU INDICATE THAT YOU HAVE RI AUTHORITY TO ENTER INTO THIS TERMS AND CONDITIONS AND THA BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDI IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE 8 Yes I Accept O Na I Decline 3 Select OK to initiate the warm boot then after the warm boot start the Watcher program again select Automated Activation then click Next x Note You must be in the Verizon coverage area to activate your 760 Computer and only in the location of intended use Eg sasss watcher d 2 06 Please select one of the Following options Manual You enter the activation Actiwation code Verizon account phone number and System ID SID provided wath the product documentation e Automated Use yo
428. the registry at HKEY LOCAL MACHINENHARDWARENDEVICEMAPNKEYBDNVkeyGold The alpha plane mapping can be found in the registry at HKEY LOCAL MACHINENHARDWARENDEVICEMAPNKEYBDNVkeyAlpha Alphanumeric Keypad For the 700 Color Alphanumeric Keypad the following registry keys con tain the plane mappings The unshifted plane mapping can be found in the registry at HKEY LOCAL MACHINENMHARDWARENDEVICEMAPNKEYBDNALPHANVkey The gold plane mapping can be found in the registry at HKEY LOCAL MACHINENMHARDWARENDEVICEMAPNKEYBDNALPHANVkeyGold The alpha plane mapping can be found in the registry at HKEY LOCAL MACHINENHARDWARENDEVICEMAPNKEYBDNALPHANVkeyAlpha 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 293 Chapter 7 Programming How Key Values Are Stored in Registry Id Change Notification To know which fields to update in the registry you must know what Scan Codes are assigned to each physical key see the Keypad Scan Codes and Meanings table on the next page The Scan Code is used at the lowest level of the system to let the keypad driver know which physical key has been pressed The keypad driver takes that scan code and looks it up in a table a copy of the one stored in the registry to determine which values to pass on to the operating system Each registry key is just an array that describes to the keypad driver what value needs to be passed for each physical key The key values are indexed by the scan code t
429. the server This prevents you from having duplicate copies of a message but it also means that you no longer have access to messages that you move to fold ers created from anywhere except the 700 Color Computer Ifyou use IMAP4 the folders you create and the e mail messages you move are mirrored on the server Therefore messages are available to you anytime you con nect to your mail server whether it is from your 700 Color Computer or desktop This synchronization of folders occurs whenever you con nect to your mail server create new folders or rename or delete folders when connected For all accounts except ActiveSync you can access folder options by tap ping Tools gt Manage Folders 78 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Connecting to a Mail Server In addition to synchronizing e mail messages with your desktop you can send and receive e mail messages by connecting to an e mail server using a modem or network card connected to your 700 Color Computer You need to set up a remote connection to a network or an ISP and a connec tion to your e mail server For more information see Getting Connected on page 100 When you connect to the e mail server new messages are downloaded to the 700 Color Computer Inbox folder messages in the 700 Color Com puter Outbox folder are sent and messages that were deleted on the e mail server are removed from the 700 Color Computer Inbo
430. then tap ok to exit this applet See Chapter 1 Notifications Zar Introduction for more information 334 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Beeper Frequency Sets the frequency for the good read beep Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer Action Tap the Beeper frequency parameter then enter a frequency value to change this parameter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 1 4 1 7 1 Options 1000 4095 default is 2090 Emm i Eazos Data Collection Beeper volume lt High gt Beeper frequency 20907 i Good read beeps lt 1 gt Good read beep duration lt 80 gt Change Beeper frequency Setting 2090 Symbology Options Beeper LED virtual 4 F a 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 335 Appendix A 336 Configurable Settings Good Read Beeps Sets the number of good read beeps Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer Action Tap the Good read beeps parameter then select an option to change this parameter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 1 4 1 8 1 Options O No beeps 1 One beep default 2 Two beeps AY settings a 4 1206 QQ Data Collection Beeper volume lt High gt Beeper Frequency lt 2090 gt Good read beep duration lt 80 gt E read beeps Setting D 1 Oz
431. this parameter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 1 4 1 6 1 Options 1 Beeper default 4 Vibrate not supported on 730 Computers AY settinos 4 461229 Q Emm a 461215 Q Data Collection Data Collection Beeper lt Beeper gt Beeper lt Beeper gt Change Beeper Setting Change Beeper Setting 8 Beeper vibrate Symbology Options Beeper LED Imager 4 F Symbology Options Beeper LED vituald 4 gt mlj New Tools Accounts 1 mlj 700 Color with Imager Screen 730 Screen 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 333 Appendix A Configurable Settings Beeper Volume Sets the volume for the good read beep Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Color Computer Action Tap the Beeper volume parameter then select an option to change this parameter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 1 4 1 6 1 Options 0 Low 1 High default 2 Medium 3 Off 4 Vibrate AY settings a 4 1204 Q Data Collection Beeper volume Highz t Beeper Frequency 20907 Good read beeps lt 1 gt Good read beep duration lt 80 gt Change Beeper volume Setting Symbology Options Beeper LED virtual 4 F a Disabling the Volume To disable the beeper tap Start gt Settings gt the Personal tab gt Sounds 8z Notifications gt the Volume tab drag the System volume slider bar to the Sounds amp left Silent position
432. tion to change this parame ter setting Tap to access the Code 93 Lengths parameter SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 1 1 7 1 Options 0 Not active default 1 Active Code 93 Length Sets the Code 93 bar code length Action Tap to expand the Code 93 parameter then tap to expand the Code 93 Lengths parameter Tap the setting to be changed then tap an option to change this setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 1 1 19 1 Options Bar code length 0 Any length 1 Minimum length default Minimum length 001 254 Minimum length 1 254 default is 6 x Note If Bar code length 1 then Minimum length is entered Emm a 461106 QD Data Collection E Code 93 Mot active gt amp Code 93 length lt 0006 gt Bar code length lt Any length Minimum length lt 6 gt ES Code 128 lt Active gt Symbologies Symbology Options Beepel 4 gt mj 308 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Code 128 Code 128 is a variable length continuous high density alphanumeric symbology that uses multiple element widths and supports the extended ASCII character set Action Tap the Code 128 parameter then select an option to change this parame ter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 1 1 9 1 Options 0 Not active default 1 Active AY settings a 461109 Q Data Collection amp Code 128 lt Active gt B Code 128 optio
433. trix lt 1 gt Decoding lt active gt amp Maxicode lt 1 gt Symbologies Symbology Options Beepel 4 gt New Tools Accounts E mlj 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings MaxiCode MaxiCode is a fixed size 2 D matrix symbology which is made up of offset rows of hexagonal elements arranged around a unique circular finder pat tern ASCII data is encoded in six bit symbol characters The symbol con tains 33 rows which are alternately 30 and 29 elements wide There are five different code sets A single MaxiCode symbol can encode up to 93 characters of data Note that this is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Color Computer or if you are using a 730 Computer Action Tap to expand the MaxiCode parameter select the setting to be changed then tap an option to change this setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 3 1 1 33 1 Options Decoding 0 Not active 1 Active default Settings a 46120 Q Data Collection Decoding Active gt E Data Matrix lt 1 gt i Decoding Active gt Symbologies Symbology Options Beepel 4 gt New Tools Accounts 1 mlj 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 323 Appendix A Symbology Options la alus Data Collection 324 Configurable Settings To access the settings from the 700 Color Computer tap Start Settings the System tab the Data
434. ttings applet is described in the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual The online manual is available from the Intermec web site at www intermec com Unit Information is a read only control panel applet that provides infor mation about your 700 Color Computer such as software version builds available CAB files and the internal battery status To access the settings from the 700 Color Computer tap Start gt Settings gt the System tab gt Unit Information to access its control panel applet Tap a tab to access its menus These tabs represent three groups of settings or parameters Versions next paragraph Battery Status starting on page 363 CAB Files starting on page 364 You can view the latest software build version on your 700 Color Computer by accessing the Unit Information control panel applet To access the settings from the 700 Color Computer tap Start gt Settings gt the System tab gt Unit Information gt the Versions tab to view the latest software build version Tap ok to exit this information Unit Information Unit Information 700 Platform Build lt 2 12 gt 700 Platform Build 3 107 p 29C lt gt 39 lt gt i DataCollection Build lt searaying003 085 gt DataCollection Build lt searaying3 123 gt Defaults Refresh Apply Defaults Refresh apply Versions Battery Status CAB Files Versions CABFiles Battery Status mlj mj 700 C
435. ttings are configured from the In termec Settings applet See the the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual available from the Intermec web site at www intermec com for more information about each enabled option ASCII Selected for Scanner Model To send data coming into the 700 Color Computer through the COMI port from an external input device as keyboard data to an application on the desktop do the following 1 Select ASCII from the Scanner model option 2 Tap to check Enable scanner port 3 Tap File gt Save Settings from the bottom of the screen y Intermec Settings y 44 2 19 O H Internal Scanner H Dack Tethered Scanner Enable scanner port Symbologies Symbology Options Scanner Settings Scanner model Decode Security E Virtual Wedge Magstripe Reader With ASCII selected Symbology Options Hardware Trigger and Scan ner Port settings are configured from the Intermec Settings applet See the the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual available from the In termec web site at www intermec com for more information about each enabled option 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support 6 Note When selecting either the 1551E or the 1553 Scanner or enabling the scanner port for these scanners the 700 Computer tries to communi cate with the attached scanner If the scanner is not powered if the cable is not connected properly the w
436. tures of the 700 Color Computer imager See the Imager Demo V1 0 Users Guide for information L4 Note 700 Color pertains to 740 741 750 751 760 and 761 Com puters unless otherwise noted 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 207 Chapter 6 Scanner Support Scanner Control and Data Transfer 208 Note To use the methods described below enable Data Collection func tionality on the 700 Computer using the bootloader configuration menu The Data Server and associated software provide several ways to manipu late scanner control and data transfer between the scanner subsystem and user applications Automatic Data Collection COM Interfaces These COM interfaces allow user applications to receive bar code data and configure and control the bar code reader engine ITCAxBarCodeReaderControl functions These ActiveX controls allow user applications to collect bar code data from the scanner to configure the scanner and to configure audio and visual notification when data arrives e ITCAxReaderCommand functions Use these ActiveX controls to modify and retrieve configuration infor mation using the reader interface commands Scanning EasySet bar code labels You can use the FasySet bar code creation software from Intermec Technologies Corporation to print configuration labels Scan the labels to change the scanner configuration and data transfer settings Use the Intermec EasySet software to pr
437. u CP TIT 368 App Launch A io a hen a dio a Ec RE eA ac d ud oa vaca cb Rd eda euge A ea ER 369 Wireless Network Control Panel Applet 1 522222 600 rr AREE RR Ren 371 About the Wireless NEGWOER Dioses tilo PORE ERE SE Paetos 371 Terminology cte udo tei p op A ane neu Eos cite toh bue dian 371 Configuring Your Wireless Network o2 Leges dal bacs b vob e ie bbb abi de 373 DI A edu da RN ea lati icu mk Gris S LM aan ctus 374 SECUEILY xercte np wR RES RM MU ER MED M tg hate ah ae 375 Advanced s si tives sate iain LER VERE E D ach eT ei 392 Other Configurable Parameters 632 ice dr eda o ped oe Pu P Ia P itd eeu 393 Using Reader Commands seminars AE qr rao esas ul 394 Change Configuration saver o dira orde d 394 Set Fimeand Dat AAA Se i aa e ai i e eea aii egi iada 395 Configuration Bat Codes o oe Ea Macro inhi EE E E a pia eR a aE wip ob ep Ale 396 Audio Volume aa sy aes o RU bed Date UN ake Dee a Ea argui as 396 zXatomatics Ural A bdo dates ape sateen b Sahel gone idan Ay pieta sid 397 Backlieht Timeout roo der ar da deed p iex oes tr ea ote pent a packer qt 397 Key Click ecevorze ebbe VeIedd ECC PE UPDPIpU See bees Cm ERE 398 Virtual Wedge Grid Preamble Postamble ocres rre 399 A A 399 Preamble aaa ale tas doradas 399 Postain oles ato ode e os BA 399 B Troubleshooting sssessssseeee 401 xvi 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Contents Index Classes and Functions a Mia Se dg R
438. ullScreen API http support microsoft com support kb articles Q266 2 44 ASP Instructions on how to create a full screen application for eVB applica tions also using the SHFullScreen API http support microsoft com support kb articles Q265 4 51 ASP 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 241 Chapter 7 Programming FTP Server FTP support is provided through the FTP Server application FTPDCE EXE MS Windows CE Versions which is provided as part the base system FTPDCE is the Internet File Transfer Protocol FTP server process The server can be invoked from an application or command line Besides ser vicing FTP client requests the FTP Server also send a network announce ment to notify prospective clients of server availability x Note You should consult the RFC959 specification for proper use of some of these commands at the following URL e http www ietf org rfc rfc959 txt for the text version or http www w3 org Protocols rfc959 for an html version Do the following to send commands 1 Start an FTP client and connect to the device FTP server 2 Log in with intermec as the user name and cr52401 for the pass word 3 From the FTP client send the command 4 Wait for a response Synopsis ftpdce options Options where addr is in the form of a b c d Sets the single target address to which to send the network an nouncement Default is broadcast Sets the FTP data block size
439. unique user name and password to use this protocol Select Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each time to access the protocol or leave Use following password as selected to auto matically use the protocol without entering a password 5 Tap Get Certificates to obtain or import server certificates See page 388 for more information 6 Tap Additional Settings to assign an inner PEAP authentication and set options for server certificate validation and trust See page 381 for more information ES Profile wizard Ped 2 33 tok Basic Security advanced 8021x Security FEAP Association Encryption WPA TKIP v Password c Prompt for password a Use Following password ooo ooo Get Certificates Additional Settings Ej 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 379 Appendix A 380 Configurable Settings To Enable PEAP with Network EAP 1 Set 8021x Security as PEAP 2 Set Association to Network EAP See page 371 for information about EAP 3 Set Encryption to either WEP or CKIP See page 371 for informa tion about CKIP and page 372 for information about WEP encryption 4 Enter your unique user name and password to use this protocol Select Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each time to access the protocol or leave Use following password as selected to auto matically use the protocol w
440. ur 58555 to start an Activation automated activation session ml 168 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 4 Network Support 4 Click Next click Next again to dial the number displayed on the screen Jj eB555 Watcher 4 2 07 E Watcher will establish a connection to an automated activation service Please be patient as this may take a feve minutes Once completed you should see Programming OK displayed on the screen Please select Next to begin The Following number z wilbedaled 12289 O ml 5 The activation process starts automatically AY sB555 watcher 4207 E Tools Admin El 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 169 Chapter 4 Network Support 170 6 You will see a series of unlock codes on your screen B555 Watcher py raa REY RE Commit OK Programming OK SIERRA WIRELESS nato A Conmect 55 ram Tools Admin El 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual ag Internet Explorer 9 10 Z 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Click the Connect button circled in the following illustration to connect to the carrier s network Tools Admin Select Start gt Internet Explorer then choose a web site Your unit is now successfully activated nternet Explorer 2 12 30 DX Maps amp Directions n P windowsMedia com F Money
441. ur Activation Code below Your Device s Electronic Serial Number is 60137409 Activation Cade 1 E 5 Enter the phone number and MSID from Sprint tap Next to continue ES start ok Your Activation Code was accepted You will now need to enter the Phone Number MDN and MSID IMSI 5 for your device mc pp Lj wc DEJ LJ a 6 The application prompts whether the information entered is correct If so tap Yes to continue else tap No to return to the previous screen Confirmation Phone number MDN 8166861509 MSID IMSI 8 310008 166861509 Please double check these numbers Is the information you entered correct 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 145 Chapter 4 Network Support 7 Note that voice service is available immediately Data service take a minimum of four hours of activation before you can use the service If after four hours a data connection is not established see Data Provi sioning on page 144 to manually launch data provisioning The application acknowledges that your phone will be in service in four hours Tap Finish to close the wizard ES start eo disas QD Guneri kationi Your PCS phone is being acivated Your phone will be available to use in approximately four hours Thank you for choosing Sprint Click Finish to close the Activation Wizard a Data Provisioning Verizon Z Phone 146 Note If you wi
442. ur resouce kit via the IDL for a list of valid editing expression values Settings g uum Data Collection Virtual wedge lt Enable gt E Preamble lt gt Pestamble zie Code page 1252 Change arid Setting Beeper LED Virtual Wedge KIG New Tools Accounts 1 mlj 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Code Page Sets the virtual wedge code page The code page controls the translation from the character set of the raw collected data to Unicode which is the character set expected by Windows CE applications The default code page is 1252 which is the Windows Latin 1 ANSI character set Action Tap the Code Page parameter then select an option to change this param eter setting SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 15 3 2 1 1 6 1 Options The only acceptable value for the code page parameter is 1252 which is the default Settings eim Data Collection Virtual wedge lt Enable gt E Preamble lt gt Pestamble zit Grid lt gt Change Code page Setting 1252 Y Beeper LED Virtual Wedge KIG New Tools Accounts 1 mj 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 349 Appendix A Configurable Settings Intermec Settings Control Panel Applet You may have the Intermec Settings control panel applet Information about the settings you can configure with this applet is described in the Intermec Compute
443. ut a topic or contain special instructions for handling a particular condition or set of circumstances 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Before You Begin Global Services and Support Warranty Information To understand the warranty for your Intermec product visit the Intermec web site at www intermec com and click Service amp Support The Intermec Global Sales amp Service page appears From the Service amp Support menu move your pointer over Support and then click Warranty Disclaimer of warranties The sample code included in this document is presented for reference only The code does not necessarily represent complete tested programs The code is provided as is with all faults All warranties are expressly disclaimed including the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Web Support Visit the Intermec web site at www intermec com to download our current manuals in PDF format To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals contact your local Intermec representative or distributor Visit the Intermec technical knowledge base Knowledge Central at intermec custhelp com to review technical information or to request technical support for your Intermec product Telephone Support These services are available from Intermec Technologies Corporation In the U S A and Canada call 1 800 755 5505 Service Description and choose this option Factory Repair and Requ
444. uter back in the charger and continue to charge your mobile computer for at least four hours to make sure the battery is fully charged The 700 Color Computer will not turn on when placed in a dock Make sure the dock is plugged in and your mobile computer is securely seated in the dock The 700 Color Computer shuts down during operation You may have a very low battery Put the battery in a charger The 700 Color Computer does not turn off The 700 Color Computer does not turn off while it is processing data If this situation continues for a long period of time it does run down the battery unless you have it connected to an external power or in a charging dock Should the 700 Color Computer lock up perform a warm boot If the mobile computer stays locked up then perform a cold boot See Chapter 1 Introduction for information on performing warm boots and cold boots The 700 Color Computer takes a long time to boot up after a warm or cold boot is performed Normal recovery time is 30 to 45 seconds If the recovery takes longer then contact support personnel 402 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Index The Classes and Functions Index covers classes and functions for the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer The General Index covers all topics Those in italics are figures those in bold are tables The Files Index is to assist you in locating descriptions for device drivers applica tions utiliti
445. uters 126 writing to a storage card 129 Registry Save control panel applet 367 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Registry settings AutoCfg 194 AutoFTP 249 Autolnterval 194 AutoIP DHCP 194 DhcpMaxRetry 194 DhcpRetryDialogue 194 EnableDHCP 194 keypad driver 294 keypad planes alpha 293 gold 293 unshifted 293 Regulatory approvals specifications 26 Removing drivers DTR 204 NPCP 199 Removing programs Windows Mobile 45 47 Replicating registry settings 123 Reset button 19 Reset connection settings for PCS Vision Phone applica tion CDMA radios 152 Roaming toggle between automatic or Sprint Phone ap plication CDMA radios 153 RTC See Real Time Clock S S9C unit information control panel upgrade files 365 Sabre 1551E or 1553 See also Tethered scanner cabling 216 settings 215 Sample code NPCP printing 202 SB555 Watcher activation 165 Bell Mobility 183 Sprint 172 Telus 183 Verizon 168 copying files to computer 162 via Microsoft ActiveSync 163 via storage cards 163 location of ESN 165 Scan codes alphanumeric keypad 296 numeric keypad 295 SCAN Mute Audio control panel applet 8 Scanner beeper volume selecting 9 turning it off 11 turning it on 7 mute feature turning it off 8 specifications 25 unit configuration parameters automatic shutoff 393 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Index backlight timeout 393 date time 393 key clicks 393
446. velopers using Microsoft tools products and technologies It contains a bounty of technical programming information including sam ple code documentation technical articles and reference guides This automatically starts the FTP Server FTPDCE EXE when the 700 Color Computer is powered on This is provided with the NDISTRAY program the Network Driver Interface Specification tray application which displays the popup menu that currently allows you to load and un load the network drivers Tap the antenna icon in the System Tray of the Today screen a sample antenna icon is circled below for this pop up menu x rer Start e q 9 05 E Friday February 11 2005 Tap here ta set owner information 9 154M 10 154M No unread messages a pime 3 Active tasks 1 High priority 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 7 Programming The default is to start the FTP Server at boot time unless the following registry entry is defined and set to 0 which disables AutoF TP 1 en ables the AutoF TP The entry can be set from the NDISTRAY pop up menu by selecting either AutoFTP On or AutoF TP Off HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Software Intermec Ndistray StartupIFTP These new entries are located below the selections to load the network drivers If the StartupIFTP registry key is not defined the FTP Server is loaded by default to provide out of the box capability for customers who want to begin loa
447. volume 393 utilities configuration button wakeup mask 368 Scanner cabling 216 Scheduling appointments and meetings via Calendar 50 SDMMC Disk 128 Searching for text Microsoft Reader 95 Secure Digital cards card support 21 installing applications 122 123 migrating applications 128 packaging an application 120 specifications 25 Security configuration parameter encryption key 356 read encryption 354 read only community string 352 read write community string 353 subnet mask 324 write encryption 355 Selecting drawing via Notes 41 Sending and receiving messages via Inbox 77 Serial port modem support 17 Serial position COM B 366 Services Phone application GSM radios 157 Setting date and time 395 Setting up an e mail account 116 SETUP DLL installation functions 236 SIM cards IMSI assigned CDMA 1xRTT 141 GSM GPRS 143 installation status GSM GPRS 143 phone number assigned GSM GPRS 142 Simple Network Management Protocol See SNMP SMS Folder behavior connected to e mail server 78 SMS messages Phone application CDMA radios 150 GSM radios 156 Snap on modems 17 SNMP 195 configuration parameters identification contact 359 identification location 361 identification name 360 security encryption key 356 security read encryption 354 security read only community string 352 security read write community string 353 security subnet mask 324 security write encryption 355 trap authentication 3
448. w Volume increase Right arrow Tab 2 ABC End 8 TUV asterisk 0 Win 5 JKL A3 NE TE d 38 None Action plus symbol 3 DEF backlight 9 N XYZIPgDn 888 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 295 Chapter 7 Programming Numeric Keypad Scan Codes and Meanings continued Press this Key Meaning ScanCode Enter at symbol 0x1D 6 MNO A4 0x1E None 0x1F 0x40 Charge Detect 0x41 LCD frontlight Ambient light Threshold crossed Keypad Backlight Ambient Light Threshold Crossed Alphanumeric Keypad The following scan codes pertain to the 700 Color Alphanumeric keypad Alphanumeric Keypad Scan Codes and Meanings Press this Key Meaning ScanCode Reserved 0x00 I O button 0x01 Scanner Handle Trigger 0x02 Scanner Left 0x03 Scanner Right 0x04 A A1 key 0x05 B A2 key 0x06 Escape Send 0x07 Left arrow Back Tab 0x08 Up arrow Volume increase 0x09 Down arrow Volume decrease 0x0A Right arrow Tab 0x0B Action End 0x0C E Win 0x0D F equal sign OxOE G asterisk OxOF C A3 0x10 H forward slash 0x11 D A4 0x12 296 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 7 Programming Alphanumeric Keypad Scan Codes and Meanings continued Press this Key Meaning ScanCode J PgUp 0x13 K as symbol 0x14 L minus sign 0x15 M 1 0x16 N 2 0x17 I backlight 0x18 P PgDn 0x19 Q comma OxlA R plus sign Ox1B S 4 0x1C T 5 0x1D O 3 Ox1E Caps Lock OxlF BkSp 0x20 VI period 0x21
449. with a set of API calls to configure or monitor status of the 802 11b or 802 11b g network The CORE module for the 802 11 NIC It provides the 802 11b or 802 11b g status informa tion displayed when the CORE application is running This is the Control Panel for configuring the 802 11b or 802 11b g network parameters Note that it is an EXE file and is actually called by CPL802 CPL see below It is also called by the CORE application when the Configuration button is pressed A control panel application that does nothing but call 80211CONF EXE Internally manages the Scan List activity This handles profile management for radio configurable values This handles radio configuration and security authentication based on a selected profile The Profile Manager supports up to four radio configuration profiles These profiles are the same as those set by the Wireless Network control panel applet that runs on the Windows CE unit You can configure different 802 11b or 802 11b g profiles and switch between them using the 802 11 API See the ConfigureProfile function on page 283 for more information 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 267 Chapter 7 Programming Basic Connect Disconnect Functions Below are functions available for the 700 Color Computer when enabled with the 802 11b or 802 11b g radio module RadioConnect Connects to the available radio Use this function if you plan on using a lot of A
450. x folder Messages that you receive directly from an e mail server are linked to your e mail server rather than your desktop When you delete a message on your 700 Color Computer it is also deleted from the e mail server the next time you connect based on the settings selected in ActiveSync You can work online or offline When working online you read and re spond to messages while connected to the e mail server Messages are sent as soon as you tap Send which saves space on your 700 Color Computer When working offline once you have downloaded new message headers or partial messages you can disconnect from the e mail server and then de cide which messages to download completely The next time you connect Inbox downloads the complete messages you have marked for retrieval and sends the messages you have composed Setting Up or Changing an Account To set up an account To set up a POP3 or IMAP4 e mail account tap Accounts gt New Ac count Follow the instructions in the New Account Wizard To set up an SMS account tap Accounts gt Accounts and then tap SMS Follow the instructions on the screen To change options for an account 1 Tap Accounts gt Accounts 2 Tap the name of the account and follow the instructions on the screen To delete an account 1 Tap Accounts gt Accounts 2 Tap and hold the name of the account and then tap Delete Note You can set up several e mail accounts including your ActiveSync
451. xcel gt New A blank workbook appears Or if you have selected a template for new workbooks in the Tools gt Options dialog box that template appears with appropriate text and formatting already provided You can open only one workbook at a time when you open a second workbook save the first You can save a workbook you create or edit in a variety of formats including Pocket Excel PXL and Excel XLS You can also save a workbook as a template by moving the workbook to the Templates folder Pocket Excel contains a list of the files stored on your 700 Color Comput er Tap a file in the list to open it To delete make copies of and send files tap and hold a file in the list Then select the appropriate action from the pop up menu Pocket Excel provides fundamental spreadsheet tools such as formulas functions sorting and filtering To display the toolbar tap View gt Toolbar EF Pocket Excel O ET ok here as you enter them ar Se Sum 66 00 r 3 m gt EE zoomicon 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 89 0 abla w e r t v u t o p L c P a s a r a h TK T shift x c v b njm calal i tje gt New Edit View Format Tools EE AutoSum icon Format icon 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual MSN Messenger Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Note If your workbook contains sensitive information you can protect it with a password To do so open the workbook tap
452. xiCode configuration parameter 323 Meetings Calendar sending a request 61 via Calendar 50 Memory and storage specifications 25 Menus Windows Mobile settings 45 Messages sending to contacts 70 via Inbox composing sending 81 downloading from server 80 MIBs ASN 1 195 files 195 object identifier 196 418 OIDs 196 Micro PDF417 configuration parameter 316 Microphone 4 phone application 159 Microprocessor specifications 25 Microsoft Developer Network Library See MSDN library Microsoft Exchange e mail account 87 Microsoft Passport account 87 Microsoft Reader books downloading 93 reading 94 removing 95 features 95 adding bookmarks 95 adding drawings 95 annotations index 95 attaching notes 95 copying text 95 highlighting text 95 searching for text 95 using the library 93 Windows Mobile 93 Microsoft s Wireless Zero Config 373 Migrating applications Flash File Store 128 CompactFlash storage cards 128 Secure Digital storage cards 128 Migrating to a 700 Color Computer 130 Mobile Favorites Pocket Internet Explorer 97 Mobile Favorites folder Pocket Internet Explorer 96 Modem position COM A 366 Modems creating a connection to an ISP 100 to work 105 specifications 25 MP3 files Windows Media Player 92 MSDN library 248 MSDN Windows CE documentation 194 MSI configuration parameter 313 user ID 326 MSN Messenger about 87 accounts Microsoft Exchange e mail 87 Microsoft Pas
453. xplorer 96 Windows Mobile 100 ITC_KEYBOARD_CHANGE CreateEvent 294 ITU T interface specifications 184 K Keeping a to do list via Tasks 73 Key clicks bar code configuration 393 398 configuration parameter 393 Key sequences alpha blue keys alphanumeric 16 numeric 15 gold keys numeric 13 gold white keys alphanumeric 14 Keyboard See also Keypad Windows Mobile input panel 35 Keypad advanced remapping 294 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Index alphanumeric alpha blue key sequences 16 gold white key sequences 14 scan codes 296 backlight control panel applet 12 change notification 294 driver registry settings 294 numeric alpha blue key sequences 15 gold key sequences 13 scan codes 295 planes 292 remapping 292 sample registry keys 298 specifications 25 L Laser scanner configuration parameters 300 data collection parameters beeper frequency 335 beeper volume 334 codabar 306 codabar user ID 325 code 11 320 code 11 user ID 329 code 128 309 code 128 FNCI character 311 code 128 user ID 325 code 39 304 code 39 user ID 325 code 93 308 code 93 length 308 code 93 user ID 326 EAN 13 user ID 328 EAN 8 user ID 328 good read beep duration 337 good read beeps 336 interleaved 2 of 5 317 interleaved 2 of 5 user ID 326 macro PDF 314 matrix 2 of 5 318 matrix 2 of 5 user ID 328 micro PDF417 316 MSI 313 MSI user ID 326 PDF417 314 PD
454. y lt gt Change Write Encryption Setting O On 8 orf Security trans 1dentification Identification mj 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 355 Appendix A 356 Configurable Settings Encryption Key Identifies the key that this 700 Color Computer uses to encrypt or deci pher SNMP packets Encryption is used only by software provided by In termec Technologies If encryption is enabled SNMP management plat forms will not be able to communicate with the 700 Color Computer The encryption key is returned encrypted Action Tap the Encryption Key parameter then enter a security encryption key value to change this parameter setting Note You also need to set either Read Encryption page 354 or Write Encryption page 355 or both SNMP OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1963 10 5 1 6 0 Options The encryption key can be from 4 to 20 ASCII characters Default is NULL 46152 D SNMP Read Only Community lt public gt E Read Write Community lt private gt i Read Encryption Off Write Encryption Off Encryption Key lt gt B Encryption Key Setting Security Traps Identification m 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Traps a To access the settings from the 700 Color Computer tap Start gt Settings gt the System tab gt SNMP gt the Traps tab to access its parameters SNMP T The
455. ystems Information ION Configuration File Edit view Help fe gt a 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support 2 Tap the Data Collection option then tap to expand Internal Scanner This sample screen is for the IT4000 scan engine y Intermec Settings e f 11 14 e Data Collection n Enable scanner port Syrnbologies E Symbology Options El Scanner Settings Scanner model 174000 H Triggering mode Hardware trigger 4 Spotter beam duration Q i Turn aff after goad read E Imager Settings amp leDecode Security amp Dack Tethered Scanner Be Virtual Wedge File Edit View Help ll gt Ej Scanner and Imager Settings Depending on what is selected as the scanner model image settings de code security scanner settings and virtual wedge are configured from the Intermec Settings applet See the the Intermec Computer Command Refer ence Manual available from the Intermec web site at www intermec com for more information about each enabled option 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual 211 Chapter 6 Scanner Support Internal Scanner Supported Symbologies See the following table for a guideline and Appendix B Bar Code Symbol ogies for more information on each supported symbology Symbologies EV10 IT4000 SE900 SE900HS SE900 S6 SE900HS S6 Code39 X X X X X X UPC EAN Code 128 Interleaved 2 of 5 Code 93 Codabar Code 2 of 5
456. yz to quickly find it in the list Edmonds De dedmonds dee in e a Emig Irvin EmigIr ncs com e Tapto see additional phone Gruber Bobb grandmagruberGa e numbers and e mail addresses Gruber Jim jgruberZ2 netzero e A Gruber Jim gnc amp integr aonline e Tap to display or edit the Gruber Mike mpg5540 yahoo c e contact details Hosford Chu chuck hosford bo e Jasa Jaz JazHot5hotsiGaol c e Send Email Tap and hold to display a mE pop up menu of actions Beam Contact linda mayo e e Delete Contact bert2imsn c e 3yer Jerry dyer5805 amp aol e Retchless N nathan retchless e Yelarde Sus Susan elarde ad e New Yiew Tools Tap to toggle to By Company note the Name view Tap to create a new contact 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Creating a Contact 1 Tap New then use the input panel to enter a name and other contact information Scroll down to see all available fields 2 To assign the contact to a category scroll to and tap Categories and se lect a category from the list In the contact list you can display contacts by category 3 To add notes tap the Notes tab You can enter text draw or create a recording For more information on creating notes see Notes Captur ing Thoughts and Ideas on page 75 4 When finished tap OK to return to the contact list

Intermec 700 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents